IntroductionWelcome| 00:06 | Hello! My name is Paul Aubin and
welcome to Revit Architecture 2011
| | 00:10 | Essential Training.
| | 00:12 | Over the last few years, Revit has
taken the building industry by storm.
| | 00:16 | Every day more and more firms are adding
Revit to their workflow, and one thing is certain:
| | 00:20 | It often has something to do with BIM.
| | 00:23 | BIM stands for Building Information
Modeling, and it is one of the topics that
| | 00:26 | we will explore in this course.
| | 00:28 | We'll start with basics like
walls, columns, doors and windows.
| | 00:33 | We'll explore how these items are
added to your model, understand their
| | 00:36 | association to levels and grids,
manipulate their key properties and settings.
| | 00:40 | I'll show you how to create a topographic
surface, upon which your building can sit.
| | 00:44 | We'll even do this from imported CAD
data, such as an AutoCAD file from your
| | 00:48 | consulting engineer.
| | 00:49 | We'll put a roof over our head, as we
look at Revit's roofing tools. Do you use
| | 00:54 | curtain walls in your designs?
| | 00:55 | Well, Revit has lots of
functionality here for us to explore, as well.
| | 00:59 | And what Building model would be
complete without stairs, railings, toilet
| | 01:03 | fixtures, and other equipment and furnishings?
But using Revit is not just about modeling.
| | 01:09 | I'll show you how you can annotate
your drawings - called views in Revit - with
| | 01:12 | text, dimensions, and
other architectural symbols.
| | 01:16 | As you will see, there is quite a bit
required to create a complete virtual
| | 01:19 | model of your building project,
| | 01:20 | so if you are ready to start your
journey into the world of Revit Architecture,
| | 01:24 | you've come to the right place.
| | 01:25 | Let's get started!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library, you have
| | 00:04 | access to the exercise files
used throughout this title.
| | 00:06 | The exercise files are in an Exercise
folder, which I've placed on my desktop.
| | 00:10 | You can store it wherever you can like.
| | 00:12 | There are files for most movies.
| | 00:14 | They reside in the subfolders
named according to the chapters.
| | 00:16 | It is not necessary that you use these files.
| | 00:19 | You can use files of your own
in place of them, if you wish.
| | 00:22 | If you are a monthly or annual
subscriber to lynda.com, you don't have access to
| | 00:26 | the exercise files, but you can
follow along using your own work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Core ConceptsIntroducing building information modeling (BIM)| 00:00 | So I know you're probably anxious to get into
Revit right away, but before we do, let's
| | 00:04 | talk about a few high-level concepts first.
| | 00:06 | For starters, just what is BIM?
| | 00:09 | Well, BIM stands for Building
Information Modeling, and it's a term that was
| | 00:12 | coined a few years back by Autodesk
to basically describe the process of
| | 00:16 | creating virtual models that
represent building facilities.
| | 00:20 | Now Revit is often heavily touted as
purpose-built for Building Information
| | 00:25 | Modeling, and this is true, but that
often leads to confusion that somehow Revit
| | 00:30 | and BIM equal the same thing.
| | 00:32 | Revit and BIM are not the same thing.
| | 00:34 | Revit is a tool to help us achieve
BIM, and what BIM is is a process that we
| | 00:40 | follow to create building
model data, that is two things:
| | 00:45 | coordinated and computable.
| | 00:47 | Those are the two most important tenets of BIM.
| | 00:50 | If all of the parts and pieces that
make up your BIM project are fully
| | 00:54 | coordinated with one another, and don't
require any manual updates to keep them
| | 01:00 | in sync, and if you've got a robust,
rich data stored of information that can
| | 01:05 | be used both internally by the system
and exported out to the larger project
| | 01:10 | team to do meaningful computations,
like energy analysis, like structural
| | 01:17 | loads, like lighting analysis, air
loads, air cooling, any of those things,
| | 01:24 | then you've got BIM.
| | 01:27 | So there's a lot of different ways
that we can achieve BIM, and Revit is an
| | 01:31 | excellent tool to help us achieve that,
because it does many of those things that
| | 01:34 | I just described, natively.
| | 01:36 | Now, it's important to understand
that 3D is not the only component of BIM.
| | 01:42 | Often when you hear BIM, in the same
sentence, you will hear people talk about 3D.
| | 01:46 | Now don't get me wrong, 3D is very important.
| | 01:48 | If your primary goal is to perform
clash detection between your structure and
| | 01:52 | your mechanical systems, or if you want
to make sure that your stair tower fits
| | 01:56 | into the overall
architecture, 3D is pretty important.
| | 01:59 | If you need to do visualization to get
high-quality renderings and so forth, 3D
| | 02:04 | is pretty important.
| | 02:05 | However, 3D is not the only
aspect that makes BIM special.
| | 02:09 | 3D is just part of it.
| | 02:11 | I think that the 'I' in BIM is sometimes
even more compelling than the 'M' in BIM.
| | 02:17 | Think about cost estimating tasks,
think about specification writing, think
| | 02:22 | about energy load analysis, think
about heating and cooling, think about
| | 02:25 | structural loads; all of
these things require data.
| | 02:29 | We have all this data. Instead of
manually computing all the various things that
| | 02:34 | we need to get a proper design, why
not let the computer do what computers do
| | 02:38 | best - compute stuff.
| | 02:40 | So this is what BIM is all about.
| | 02:42 | So again, let's not focus just on the 'M.'
Let's also think about the 'I,' and if we
| | 02:47 | have got the two together in a fully
coordinated package, in a way that Revit
| | 02:51 | will give us, then what we've got
is a fully implemented BIM solution.
| | 02:56 | So with that introduction in mind,
let's go ahead and get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working in one model with many views| 00:00 | So what's so special about Revit anyhow?
| | 00:02 | Well, there are many possible answers
to that question, but in this movie, I'd
| | 00:05 | like to focus on one of the easiest and
most immediate benefits of using Revit.
| | 00:10 | Whether you are an architect, or
an interior designer, a draftsman, a
| | 00:13 | contractor, or other building
professional, you'll likely spend a lot of time
| | 00:17 | looking at and working in
Plans, Elevations and Sections.
| | 00:21 | In Revit, work you do in Plan is
immediately reflected in Elevation and
| | 00:26 | Section, and vice-versa.
| | 00:28 | I'm in a file called Office, if you'd
like to follow along, and I'd like to
| | 00:31 | start with the 3D view.
| | 00:36 | Notice that in Revit we have a full-
blown 3D model that's generated as we work.
| | 00:40 | We can orbit the view around, we can
study the building from various angles, we
| | 00:49 | can see through transparent surfaces
and into the building and begin studying
| | 00:55 | design ideas and see how they react to
the overall whole, and we can even select
| | 01:02 | elements directly in 3D and
begin to make modifications.
| | 01:08 | When you select an element in any view,
including 3D, and you make a change,
| | 01:13 | that change is instantly reflected in all views.
| | 01:16 | You'll notice that I moved the door here,
and it moved instantly in the Plan view.
| | 01:20 | You could start in Elevation,
and you could select the door here.
| | 01:25 | That door would be selected here and
here, and whichever view you decided to
| | 01:32 | move it in, that change would
apply instantly to all the other views.
| | 01:39 | Perhaps you are working in Elevation and
you decide you want to add some new windows.
| | 01:45 | You can add those windows, and just like that,
| | 01:48 | they will appear
immediately in your Elevation view.
| | 01:51 | But this sort of behavior is not
limited to just graphical views.
| | 02:00 | Perhaps I want to get a better look at
Door Number 110, which happens to be here
| | 02:06 | in this Conference Room.
| | 02:07 | You'll notice how when I select it in a
Schedule view, which is not a graphical
| | 02:11 | view at all, it highlights the
door in the Plan view as well.
| | 02:15 | If I were to make a change to that door
number and make it door number 120, that
| | 02:20 | change would occur instantly in both
the Schedule, which would sort it further
| | 02:26 | down the list, and the Plan view, which
would already reflect the change of 120.
| | 02:33 | Suppose that 120 no longer wanted
to be a Single-Flush door, but I
| | 02:37 | actually wanted that to be something
larger and more open, and I switched
| | 02:41 | it to a Double-Glass door.
| | 02:43 | That change will take place
instantly throughout the model.
| | 02:46 | It will get larger in Plan, it will
change type in the Schedule, and the new
| | 02:50 | sizes will be reflected
in the Schedule, as well.
| | 02:53 | Perhaps Door Number 110A, which also is part
of the Conference Room, is no longer needed.
| | 02:59 | I can select Door Number 110A
in the Schedule and delete it.
| | 03:04 | A warning will appear, but then I can
confirm that warning, and Revit will then
| | 03:08 | delete the door everywhere in the model,
anywhere that it happens to be shown,
| | 03:12 | whether it's the Schedule or the Plan.
| | 03:14 | And how useful is that that I know, with
confidence, that I can make such changes,
| | 03:19 | and I don't have to chase them down in
drawing after drawing after drawing, like
| | 03:24 | the traditional process would have me do.
| | 03:27 | But perhaps one of the most exciting
aspects of having a single model in
| | 03:30 | multiple views is that you can
create a new view anytime you need to.
| | 03:35 | So if I look at the options available
to me, I can create 3D views, Callout
| | 03:40 | views, Drafting and Plan views, but
perhaps one of my favorites is the Section view.
| | 03:44 | With just a couple of clicks, I can cut
a section through the building anywhere
| | 03:49 | that I like, double-click that Section
head, and I'm looking instantly at a full
| | 03:55 | section of the entire building
in the location that I indicated.
| | 03:59 | Should I want to make a change in that
view, I know with confidence that I can
| | 04:04 | make the change in that new view, and I
won't have to worry that later I'll go
| | 04:08 | to the second floor, and I'll have
to coordinate that change separately.
| | 04:12 | The change has already taken place.
| | 04:15 | So Revit offers us some amazingly
powerful benefits by simply keeping all of our
| | 04:20 | views coordinated, and the way it does
that is that all views are like windows
| | 04:24 | looking in on a live
virtual model of our building.
| | 04:28 | So we are creating a virtual modeled
representation of the building project that
| | 04:32 | we hope to create, and then Revit
coordinates all of the different ways that we
| | 04:36 | can view and print and
convey that information for us.
| | 04:41 | In traditional architectural design and
documentation procedures, drawings are
| | 04:45 | the result of carefully
reasoned thought and design.
| | 04:47 | A process of draw, erase, redraw, does
eventually lead to the desired result,
| | 04:53 | which must then be replicated over
and over again to other drawings like
| | 04:57 | Sections and Elevations.
| | 04:59 | Such changes need to be manually
coordinated and kept up-to-date with one
| | 05:03 | another when they change.
| | 05:04 | Each drawing conveys only a small
abstracted part of the whole, and can
| | 05:08 | easily get out of sync.
| | 05:10 | In a Revit BIM workflow, all
modifications are performed directly on the model
| | 05:15 | in any view that's
convenient to the task at hand.
| | 05:19 | Revit views are live representations
of the model data, displayed through
| | 05:23 | the prism of conventional architectural
drafting types, like plans, sections and schedules.
| | 05:28 | However, since each such view is really
just a window looking at the whole, the
| | 05:33 | various views cannot get out of sync,
and therefore always accurately convey
| | 05:38 | the current state of the design, and
that is the power of Revit and the power
| | 05:43 | of BIM.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding Revit element hierarchy| 00:00 | All elements in Revit fit
into a built-in hierarchy.
| | 00:03 | The purpose of this lesson is to
simply expose you to the high-level
| | 00:06 | concepts and give you a better
understanding of how elements in the system
| | 00:09 | fit into a larger framework.
| | 00:11 | So if you imagine the hierarchy of
Revit being an overall framework and
| | 00:15 | branching off into two main branches,
on one branch you would have model
| | 00:19 | elements and on the other
branch you would have annotation.
| | 00:22 | And this is sort of the most
fundamental split of Revit elements in the system.
| | 00:27 | Model elements represent anything that's real.
| | 00:30 | So if you can imagine that you can
actually put your hand on it and touch it
| | 00:33 | when the building is built, anything
like these walls or these windows or these
| | 00:38 | doors or the stairs or the
railings - those are model elements.
| | 00:42 | They represent real things that
we can actually physically touch.
| | 00:45 | On the other side of the
spectrum, we have annotative elements.
| | 00:48 | Things like these wall tags, these door
tags, these room tags, these dimensions,
| | 00:54 | those things are not real.
| | 00:55 | They're not actually painted on the
floor when the building is built, nobody
| | 00:59 | builds those things, but they are used
on drawings and in our communication to
| | 01:03 | convey design intent, to convey
materials, to convey a variety of other things,
| | 01:08 | but they are explanatory information.
| | 01:10 | Those items in Revit only occur in
the view in which they are drawn.
| | 01:17 | Model elements, on the other hand,
show all the time in all views.
| | 01:21 | This is a fundamental split, or a
fundamental difference in the behavior of
| | 01:25 | these two elements.
| | 01:26 | We saw in the many views movie that
if you make a change in one view, it
| | 01:30 | immediately applies in all views, and
that's the behavior that you would expect
| | 01:34 | to see with model elements, but
Annotation, on the other hand, gets applied
| | 01:38 | view by view by view.
| | 01:40 | So, for example, if I were to take this
Level 1 floor plan and duplicate it, you
| | 01:46 | would see that I would get an exact copy
of all the geometry on this floor plan;
| | 01:50 | however, I would not get any of the annotation.
| | 01:53 | I wouldn't get any of those
tags or any of those dimensions.
| | 01:56 | Now, that's not to say that if I
needed that information on this view that I
| | 02:00 | have to start all over again; we
certainly could go in and select something that
| | 02:05 | we wanted to share between the views
and copy it and paste it to the other view,
| | 02:10 | if that was appropriate.
| | 02:12 | That's certainly within
our realm of possibility.
| | 02:15 | All I want you to understand here is
the default behavior in Revit is that
| | 02:19 | Annotation is always view-specific, and
the model, on the other hand, shows in
| | 02:24 | all views simultaneously.
| | 02:26 | And we saw plenty of examples
of that in the previous movie.
| | 02:29 | The next concept that I'd like to share
with you is the overall hierarchy of the
| | 02:33 | elements themselves.
| | 02:35 | It branches down into a four-stepped hierarchy.
| | 02:38 | At the top level of the
hierarchy we have Categories.
| | 02:41 | Now, Categories is a fixed list of items
that are defined by the Revit software,
| | 02:46 | that they group overall objects into.
| | 02:49 | Things like Walls, and Doors, and
Floors, and Text, and Dimensions, these are
| | 02:53 | all broad categories that
Revit manages and maintains.
| | 02:57 | Beneath that, we have Family.
| | 02:59 | Now, we can have sometimes one
family, sometimes many families.
| | 03:03 | A family is an element that has a
predefined behavior, structure, or what
| | 03:08 | have you, that it shares in common, but
that might differ from another similar family.
| | 03:14 | So, for example, a Single-Flush door
is a family, but that Single-Flush door
| | 03:20 | might come in a variety of sizes.
| | 03:22 | Those sizes would be the next here,
down in the hierarchy, called Types.
| | 03:27 | Any variations of a family would be
saved and defined as types, and then
| | 03:32 | finally, the individual instances that we can
click on in the model, those are our instances.
| | 03:38 | So now you can see this information as
feedback onscreen when you pause your
| | 03:42 | mouse over an object.
| | 03:43 | You'll also see that same message
appear down in the Status Line at the bottom
| | 03:48 | left-hand corner of your screen.
| | 03:49 | So you can see here, the item I have
highlighted is a Wall, and it says, Walls
| | 03:54 | is the category, then there is a
colon separator, Basic Wall is the family,
| | 03:59 | and another colon separator and then
Interior 4 7/8", 1-hr. That's the type.
| | 04:06 | The wall that I could actually click
on and select, that's the instance.
| | 04:10 | So again, here is a door.
| | 04:12 | Doors the category, Single-Flush is
the family, 36" x 84" is the type, and
| | 04:18 | this is the instance.
| | 04:21 | So get in the habit of looking for
those messages when you pause over things
| | 04:25 | onscreen, because that feedback can
really be helpful to help you know that
| | 04:28 | you're selecting the right element,
or to give you some feedback as to what
| | 04:32 | family an item belongs to, or
what type it belongs to, and so on.
| | 04:36 | So as we have seen, Revit has a pretty
well-defined hierarchy of elements, and
| | 04:40 | it's definitely a good idea for you to
get comfortable with the overall concepts
| | 04:44 | and the overall organization of that
hierarchy and be on the lookout for the
| | 04:49 | little tips onscreen, so that you
know what element, or family, or category
| | 04:52 | something belongs to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Getting Comfortable with the Revit EnvironmentUsing the Recent Files screen and the Application menu| 00:01 | One of the first things we need
to do is learn how to access files.
| | 00:04 | The Recent Files screen greets you when
you first launch Revit, like I see here.
| | 00:07 | This screen gives you quick access to
up to four of the most recent opened
| | 00:10 | projects and/or family files.
| | 00:12 | You will also find quick links to
open projects that aren't listed.
| | 00:16 | create new projects, open and create family
files, and even view help files and videos.
| | 00:21 | When you are not viewing the Recent
Files screen, you will use the Application
| | 00:24 | menu for such functions.
| | 00:26 | The Application menu is accessed from
the big R button at the top left-hand
| | 00:29 | corner of the screen.
| | 00:30 | This menu is very similar to the one
you would find in Microsoft Office, or the
| | 00:34 | Windows start button.
| | 00:35 | And you use this menu to access your
typical file management input and output
| | 00:40 | commands throughout the software.
| | 00:41 | So I am looking at the recent files
screen, and we can see the three areas that
| | 00:46 | I have just mentioned.
| | 00:47 | We can open projects from here, we can
create projects from here, and if the
| | 00:51 | project you want to open is already
listed on the list, you just simply click
| | 00:54 | the big icon for it here.
| | 00:56 | The same true with families.
| | 00:57 | If you want to open a
family, you would click here.
| | 00:59 | You want to create a family, you would
click here, or you just click from one of
| | 01:02 | the most recent ones that
you would have here or here.
| | 01:04 | Finally, if want view the help file, you
can do What's New here, the general Help
| | 01:09 | file here, or there are even some
useful little videos that Autodesk provides
| | 01:12 | that you could access from right here.
| | 01:15 | So let's just go ahead and just open up the
basic sample project that comes with the software.
| | 01:19 | Again, if you have installed the default
Revit Architecture, you should have this
| | 01:22 | project available to you.
| | 01:24 | It opens up onscreen with the most recently
viewed view accessible, in this case a 3D view.
| | 01:29 | Now if I am already in the software
and I want to open up files, I can just
| | 01:35 | simply go to the Application menu, and
I would locate the Open command here.
| | 01:38 | So I could open existing projects here,
open existing families here, and there's
| | 01:43 | a variety of other
formats that are listed, as well.
| | 01:46 | If I want to create a new file, I would
find that here, and again that it would
| | 01:49 | be a new Project file or Family file.
| | 01:52 | Now family is like an item that
you would place in your Project file.
| | 01:56 | So maybe a piece of equipment or piece
of furniture, and we will talk about this
| | 01:59 | later in the training series.
We will have a whole chapter on working with
| | 02:03 | and creating families.
| | 02:05 | Now one last area that we want to look
out in Application menu is up here at the
| | 02:08 | very top, there are these two small icons:
| | 02:10 | We have one here called Recent Documents
and another one next to called Open Documents.
| | 02:15 | Now at the moment if I were to click on
Open documents, I would just see the one file.
| | 02:18 | This is this is the basic
sample file that I have opened.
| | 02:20 | If I click on Recent Documents,
| | 02:23 | this is another way that we can access
all of the recently opened Project and
| | 02:28 | Family files that we've had available.
| | 02:30 | In this case, I just have two choices listed.
| | 02:32 | Now if there is a project that I am
working on now and for the next several
| | 02:36 | weeks, and I don't want it to scroll
of the list, I have this really handy
| | 02:40 | little pushpin feature right here.
| | 02:42 | I can simply click on this little
pushpin, and regardless of how many files
| | 02:46 | begin to appear in this list and in
what order they are appear in, this slot
| | 02:50 | will be reserved for this file, and I
will always to able to find quick access
| | 02:53 | to it right here, by just going to
the Application menu and opening it.
| | 02:57 | So, the Recent File screen and the
Application menu both provide us quick
| | 03:00 | access to our most recently used
projects and our most recently used families
| | 03:05 | in the Revit software.
| | 03:06 | We can use recent files to get
started when we first launch Revit, and we
| | 03:10 | can use our Application menu any other time to
open files, close files, or create new files.
| | 03:15 | We can even use the Application menu to
generate output and export, and we will
| | 03:18 | talk about those in some of the later movies.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Ribbon and the Quick Access Toolbar (QAT)| 00:00 | In this lesson, we will look at two very
important parts of the Revit user interface.
| | 00:04 | The Ribbon is the primary
interface for most commands and functions.
| | 00:08 | It appears as a series of tabs
across the top of the screen.
| | 00:11 | Above it, on the left-hand side, is the
QAT, or the Quick Access Toolbar, which
| | 00:15 | provides shortcut icons to the
most frequently used commands.
| | 00:19 | In this lesson, we will look at the
basics of interacting with these two
| | 00:21 | important parts of the Revit UI,
so let's start with the Ribbon.
| | 00:25 | Ribbons are organized in panels.
| | 00:28 | Panels are groupings of different
buttons, and they have titles at the bottom
| | 00:32 | and usually are
separated by these vertical bars.
| | 00:35 | Each panel contains a series of buttons.
| | 00:38 | The simplest form of a
button is the basic push button.
| | 00:40 | So our Door command, our Window
command, these are very simple commands where
| | 00:44 | they just do one thing:
| | 00:45 | You click on them, and they run that tool.
| | 00:47 | So those are referred to as just simply buttons.
| | 00:49 | The next kind of command that we have,
or the next kind of button we have, is
| | 00:52 | called the dropdown button.
| | 00:54 | So over here on the Model panel, we have
our Model Group button, and if we click
| | 00:58 | on that, it actually
expands to reveal a small menu.
| | 01:01 | So these are dropdown buttons.
| | 01:04 | Beneath that menu, you'll have
several different options.
| | 01:08 | The third kind of button
actually combines the previous two.
| | 01:11 | So if we look at our
Wall tool, as a good example,
| | 01:13 | we will see that the top half of the
button actually is just like the Door or
| | 01:18 | the Window tool, where you simply
click on it, and you get that function.
| | 01:21 | The bottom half is a dropdown button and
reveals several other Wall-related tools.
| | 01:26 | So you could see that across the Ribbon
here there are actually several examples
| | 01:31 | of the Split button that
we have available to us.
| | 01:34 | Most of the ones that we see here on
this screen are organized vertically, where
| | 01:38 | we are split with the default at the
top and the dropdown at the bottom.
| | 01:42 | If I go over here to the Modify, in
some cases you'll find a horizontally-
| | 01:47 | oriented split button.
| | 01:49 | So in this case, the default command, Cut,
would appear on the left, and on the right,
| | 01:54 | we would have our small dropdown, and
that would reveal a few choices in the
| | 01:58 | dropdown button on the right.
| | 02:00 | Let's look at one other aspect of the Ribbon.
| | 02:02 | If I click over here on the Annotate tab,
we can see two unique Ribbon functions:
| | 02:07 | the expandable Ribbon panel
and the Dialogue Launcher.
| | 02:11 | Let's take a look at the expandable panel first.
| | 02:13 | The expandable panel highlights when
you put your mouse over it and when you
| | 02:17 | click on this small little dropdown
arrow, it reveals a variety of hidden
| | 02:21 | buttons that were maybe not as
frequently used, so they were sort of stashed away
| | 02:25 | under this little expanded panel.
| | 02:27 | But otherwise, each of these buttons
functions the same as any of the others would.
| | 02:31 | The Dialogue Launcher is
just another form of button.
| | 02:34 | It's basically a push button, but it
appears right on the panel itself, and it
| | 02:39 | usually has something to
do with that panel's topic.
| | 02:43 | So in this case, the panel was a Text
panel, and when I click the Dialogue
| | 02:48 | Launcher it actually
launches the Text Properties window.
| | 02:52 | In this window, we could go ahead
and make any changes we wanted to
| | 02:55 | the properties of text.
| | 02:57 | So I am going to go ahead
and cancel out of there.
| | 02:59 | The QAT, or the Quick Access Toolbar, sits
above the Ribbon by default, and we can
| | 03:03 | see it here, across the top of the screen.
| | 03:06 | It has many of your default commands,
like Open and Save and Undo and Redo.
| | 03:10 | Now way over on the right-hand side of
the QAT, there is a small dropdown menu,
| | 03:14 | and this allows us ways to customize the QAT.
| | 03:18 | So, for example, one of the simplest
ways to customize is just to simply add
| | 03:21 | another command to it.
| | 03:22 | In this case, I will choose the New
command, right there off the top the list,
| | 03:26 | and that adds the new icon over at
the left-hand side of the Ribbon.
| | 03:30 | Now if I would prefer to change the
order of how the tools appear on the Ribbon,
| | 03:34 | or add separators, or any other
customizations, I can go all the way down to the
| | 03:38 | bottom of this dropdown and choose the
Customize Quick Access Toolbar command.
| | 03:44 | So I can select commands, I can move
them up and down on the list, I can add and
| | 03:47 | remove separators, and I can even
remove commands from the list altogether.
| | 03:51 | At the very bottom of the dialog, we
have this Show Quick Access Toolbar
| | 03:55 | below the Ribbon command.
| | 03:57 | You will want to consider doing this
if you add lots of commands to your Quick
| | 04:01 | Access Toolbar, and you begin to run
out of room at the top of your screen.
| | 04:04 | When you click OK, you will see that
this moves the QAT down below the Ribbon
| | 04:08 | and gives you a little bit
more space for adding commands.
| | 04:11 | Another way you can add commands to
the QAT is any command on the Ribbon you
| | 04:15 | can right-click, and you will get an option
that says Add to the Quick Access Toolbar.
| | 04:20 | So if I wanted to add the Spelling
command to my Quick Access Toolbar, it's as
| | 04:24 | simple as choosing it there off the list.
| | 04:27 | Now what I am going to is go ahead and
go back to Customize, and I am going to
| | 04:32 | just remove that command from my QAT, I
am going to go ahead and remove the New
| | 04:36 | command, and I am going to put it back
above the Ribbon to kind of reset us back
| | 04:40 | to where we started from.
| | 04:41 | Feel free to customize the QAT on your
own screens, but for now I'll go ahead
| | 04:45 | and leave it set to the Autodesk default.
| | 04:47 | So most of the tasks you perform in Revit
will begin on either the Ribbon or the QAT.
| | 04:53 | These tools are intuitive and easy to use.
| | 04:55 | Make sure you take a little bit of
time to understand their functions and
| | 04:58 | the nuances of their behavior to start
your Revit learning experience off on
| | 05:01 | the right foot.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding context ribbons| 00:00 | Context Ribbon tabs appear on the Ribbon
as you create and modify elements in Revit.
| | 00:05 | In this lesson, we will explore the
various scenarios when you can expect to
| | 00:08 | see Context Ribbon tabs displayed, and I will
show you how to interact with them as you work.
| | 00:12 | We will also look briefly at the
Options bar, which often accompanies Context
| | 00:16 | Ribbons as you work.
| | 00:17 | What I have here onscreen is the basic
sample project that comes with Revit.
| | 00:21 | Looking up at my Ribbon tabs, we have
all the standard tabs: the Home, Insert
| | 00:25 | and Annotate, and way over at the
very right-hand side is Modify.
| | 00:29 | Now look carefully at the Modify tab.
| | 00:31 | When I click on it, you have got
Properties, Clipboard, Geometry, a panel called
| | 00:38 | Modify, View, Measure and Create.
| | 00:40 | When you select an item in the Revit
model, the color of the Modify tab will
| | 00:45 | tint, in this case green,
sometimes in another color, and it will be
| | 00:50 | accompanied by another word -
| | 00:52 | in this case, the word Roofs,
because I have a roof selected.
| | 00:55 | Then over on the right-hand side, you'll
see additional Ribbon panels that also
| | 00:59 | appear tinted in color that give you
access to commands that are unique to that
| | 01:04 | particular selected item.
| | 01:06 | So in this case, I have a roof
selected. I now have a floor selected.
| | 01:10 | Notice that the left-hand side of the
Ribbon is remaining unchanged, so your
| | 01:15 | Properties and your Modify and Geometry, View;
| | 01:18 | all of those panels are unchanged, but
things like Mode and Shape Editing, the
| | 01:23 | tinted colored panels on the right-hand
side, these change as I select different items.
| | 01:28 | Now I have a wall selected. Over here
I have a column selected. Here, I have a
| | 01:34 | topography, or a topo-surface, selected,
and each time the Context Ribbon tab will
| | 01:40 | change to reflect the item that I have selected.
| | 01:45 | So let's direct our
attention to the Options bar.
| | 01:47 | The Options bar is this slot of space
that appears right here below the Ribbon.
| | 01:51 | Now at the moment, with the topo-
surface selected, I have just a single item on
| | 01:55 | the Options bar: the Activate Dimensions.
| | 01:58 | In some cases, when you select
additional objects you will get other options,
| | 02:01 | like when I click this Column,
I would get a check box here.
| | 02:04 | Mostly, the Options bar gives you
items to interact with when you're
| | 02:09 | creating new elements,
| | 02:11 | so on occasion when you have them selected,
but when you are creating new elements.
| | 02:13 | So, for example, if I were going to
add a new wall to this model, what you
| | 02:18 | will notice on the Options bar is that
there is a large collection of settings
| | 02:22 | that are available.
| | 02:23 | We also have our Context Ribbon.
| | 02:26 | So we still have our Modify, and this
time instead of just saying Wall, it says
| | 02:30 | Place Wall, and that indicates for us
that we are actually creating a wall, as
| | 02:34 | opposed to just simply selecting and
editing a wall that already exists.
| | 02:38 | We have a Draw panel with lots of
shapes for the kinds of walls we can draw.
| | 02:43 | But we have all of these features down here.
| | 02:47 | I will get into the specifics of all
these settings in a future movie, when we
| | 02:50 | are actually adding walls.
| | 02:52 | But in this case, I just want you to be
in the habit of looking at the Options
| | 02:56 | bar and realizing that there are
several other options available here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Project Browser and navigating views| 00:01 | Your Revit project is a complete
virtual building model that can be viewed,
| | 00:05 | edited and explored three-
dimensionally, two-dimensionally and in various
| | 00:09 | reports and tabular lists.
| | 00:10 | Each such representation of your project
is referred to in Revit simply as a view.
| | 00:15 | Views are listed and accessed from the
Project browser palette, which functions
| | 00:19 | much like a table of contents for the project.
| | 00:21 | In this lesson, we will explore this
tool and learn to navigate the various
| | 00:24 | kinds of views kinds of
views common to a Revit project.
| | 00:26 | So to help us do that, I've got this condominium
building open here onscreen. It's called Condo,
| | 00:32 | in the chapter 2 of the Exercise Files.
And we are looking, currently, at just an
| | 00:37 | overall three-dimensional view of the building.
| | 00:39 | Now over here onscreen is something
called the Project browser, and this is
| | 00:43 | typically docked over here on the left
-hand side of your screen, and that's
| | 00:48 | probably where you ought
to leave it, in most cases.
| | 00:50 | Now in some cases it might get moved
around, or it might go away. You can see
| | 00:54 | it's got a little closed box
right here, and what happens if I - oops! -
| | 00:56 | accidentally close it?
| | 00:57 | Well I want you to know how to get
it back, just in case you find yourself
| | 01:00 | without it one day wondering, well do I get it?
| | 01:02 | So let's go over here to the View tab,
Way over on the right-hand side, under the
| | 01:07 | User Interface dropdown button,
| | 01:09 | you will see there is an item
here called Project browser.
| | 01:12 | Currently, there is no check box
because we just turned it off, and all you have
| | 01:16 | to do is simply click on it, and it will return.
| | 01:19 | So pretty simply to get it back, just
in case you ever find it gone missing.
| | 01:23 | Now at the very top of the Project
browser, we have an item called Views, and
| | 01:27 | then and underneath that we have
several pretty standard architectural
| | 01:31 | categories that you should be
familiar with: Floor Plans, Ceiling Plans, 3D
| | 01:35 | Views, Elevations, and so on.
| | 01:37 | Beneath each of those is a variety of
different views for the project that we are working in.
| | 01:42 | So, for example, if I want to take a
look at the second floor of my building,
| | 01:46 | all I have to do is double-click the
Level 2 Floor Plan view, and that view
| | 01:51 | will appear onscreen.
| | 01:52 | So this is a pretty typical floor plan
that I am looking at, and notice over here
| | 01:56 | on the Project browser, that Level 2
is now bold to indicate that that is the
| | 02:00 | actual active view onscreen.
| | 02:03 | Maybe I want to look at
the Level 2 Ceiling Plan.
| | 02:05 | I could double-click it the same way,
and now I am looking at the second
| | 02:08 | Floor Ceiling Plan.
| | 02:09 | Maybe I want to look at the South
Elevation. I can double-click it, and now I am
| | 02:14 | looking at the South Elevation.
| | 02:15 | Now we're not limited to just
Graphical views in a Revit project, there are
| | 02:19 | actually lots of different kinds
of views including Schedule views.
| | 02:22 | So to open a Schedule view, it's exactly
the same procedure as to open a Graphical view.
| | 02:27 | You just simply double-click it on
the Project browser, and now instead of
| | 02:29 | seeing a Graphical view of the project,
I am going to see a nice tabular list
| | 02:33 | that in this case is listing all of
the rooms that are part of my project.
| | 02:38 | You can see it's a fairly long list with a
scrollbar over here on the right-hand side,
| | 02:43 | and this particular one is grouped by level.
| | 02:45 | I have also got Section views.
| | 02:47 | Here, I have opened up a view called Section 2.
| | 02:50 | We are not limited to just
opening views from the Project browser.
| | 02:54 | We can actually open views from the
graphical indications onscreen as well.
| | 02:59 | So in this case, you could see that
there is a section head shown here onscreen
| | 03:03 | and if I will simply double-click on it,
you are going to see that it's actually
| | 03:06 | going to open the view that's
associated with that section head.
| | 03:10 | Now take a look over here at the Project
browser, after I double-clicked on that section head.
| | 03:15 | Section 1 is now indicated in bold to confirm
for me that I'm in fact looking at Section 1.
| | 03:22 | Now notice that this is in a dark blue
color, as are these level heads over here;
| | 03:27 | these are also in a dark blue color.
| | 03:29 | Generally speaking, that color
indicates for you that this item is
| | 03:32 | interactive in some way.
| | 03:34 | So if I double-click on Level 2 head,
notice that takes me back to the Level 2
| | 03:38 | Floor Plan, and I can confirm that over
here on the Project browser by noticing
| | 03:43 | that Level 2 is now listed in bold.
| | 03:45 | Now simply opening views
is probably not good enough.
| | 03:47 | We also need to be able to get a better
look at what we are seeing on the views,
| | 03:51 | and in this case, we are kind of far
away from this floor plan right now, so you
| | 03:54 | might want to zoom in and get a better look.
| | 03:56 | We have lots of tools
available for us to do that.
| | 03:59 | Typically assigned to each view over here
in the right-hand corner is a little palette.
| | 04:05 | It's a little toolbar, and
it's called the Navigation bar.
| | 04:08 | If you click on that bar, you will see
that there is actually a little dropdown
| | 04:13 | indicator here with lots of different
ways that we can zoom, some of which
| | 04:16 | should be fairly self-explanatory.
| | 04:18 | Clicking Zoom Out two times is going
to reduce the magnification by two.
| | 04:24 | Zoom to Fit is going to
go back to where we were.
| | 04:26 | It's going to fit to the screen.
| | 04:28 | This one here, Zoom In Region, is very handy.
| | 04:30 | Maybe I want to get a better
look at just this unit of the condo.
| | 04:34 | So I can just drag a box around the
area that I would like to enlarge, and it
| | 04:38 | will fit the screen to that area.
| | 04:40 | Now these are all handy little tools,
but frankly, the fastest and easiest way,
| | 04:45 | and probably the way that I used 99% of
the time myself when working in Revit, is
| | 04:49 | to just simply use the wheel on your mouse.
| | 04:51 | So if you have a wheel mouse, all
you have to do is roll the wheel, and
| | 04:55 | it's going to zoom in.
| | 04:56 | If you roll it the other
way, it's going to zoom out.
| | 04:58 | So just simply rolling it one way
zooms in; rolling it the other way zooms out.
| | 05:02 | If you hold it in and drag, that pans the view,
or scrolls, if you want to think of it that way.
| | 05:09 | So you can get a look at another area,
zoom in, drag it around, zoom out, drag
| | 05:15 | it around, and so on.
| | 05:16 | This works in any kind of view, so I
could be in an Elevation view, and I would
| | 05:23 | roll the wheel, and it would zoom and pan.
| | 05:25 | I could be in a 3D view and drag the
wheel to pan, roll the wheel to zoom.
| | 05:31 | Then we have one more trick
when we are here in a 3D view.
| | 05:34 | We can actually hold down the Shift key
and drag the wheel, and we will be able
| | 05:40 | to orbit the model three-dimensionally.
| | 05:42 | So we can actually spin it around in
three dimensions and get a better look at it.
| | 05:46 | Now, one other tool that we have
available to us in 3D views is this item right
| | 05:50 | over here, which is called the View Cube.
| | 05:53 | Now this is a very common interface
element across all of the Autodesk products.
| | 05:56 | So if you have used any of the other
Autodesk software, you have probably
| | 05:59 | seen this View Cube in those packages as well,
and it works the same way in all of them.
| | 06:03 | Generally, what you do is each of these
little spots on the cube are hotspots,
| | 06:09 | and you can see, by pausing over them,
that they highlight and just simply click
| | 06:13 | that, and it will reorient the
3D view to match that direction.
| | 06:18 | So you could see, if I clicked the
various hotspots, it's taking me to
| | 06:23 | that vantage point.
| | 06:24 | Now another alternative to the Shift
and dragging the wheel is to just simply
| | 06:29 | click and drag the View Cube, and
that does essentially the same thing.
| | 06:34 | It allows me to orbit this around.
| | 06:36 | We have one additional way we can do
that. Notice that if I highlight the round
| | 06:42 | circle that surrounds the View Cube,
this is thought of as the turntable here,
| | 06:46 | and I drag that, that will also spin it
around, but it won't change the height.
| | 06:51 | So it keeps the angle that you are
viewing the model consistent while you just
| | 06:56 | sort of spin it around.
| | 06:57 | If you drag from the cube itself, you
can change both the height and spin it.
| | 07:01 | You are sure to have free
form movement in all directions.
| | 07:04 | So in this lesson, I've shown you
various ways that you can load different views
| | 07:09 | in the Revit Project browser.
| | 07:11 | I have introduced you to the
Project browser, so that you can see the
| | 07:13 | various kinds of views. Again, think of
it as a table of contents for your project.
| | 07:17 | I have shown you some different ways
that you can navigate around the view and
| | 07:21 | nearly everything that you do in Revit
is going to take place in the Context of
| | 07:25 | a view, and it's going to require some
of the skills discussed in this lesson.
| | 07:28 | So it really is worth your while to take
the time to get comfortable with the
| | 07:32 | Project browser, to get comfortable
with views and to get comfortable with view
| | 07:35 | navigation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Properties palette | 00:00 | Properties are available for all
elements in Revit that you create or that you
| | 00:04 | select, and you interact with
them on the Properties palette.
| | 00:07 | The Properties palette is typically
docked on the left-hand side of the screen,
| | 00:10 | although you can move it to other
areas, or make it floating, and so forth.
| | 00:14 | There are various areas in the
Properties palette we're going to look at, like
| | 00:16 | Type Selector and so on.
| | 00:18 | I'm working in our Condo project.
| | 00:19 | Let's go ahead and take a
look at the Properties palette.
| | 00:22 | So, what I want to do here is I'm
actually going to open up a Level 1 Floor Plan
| | 00:27 | view, and we'll start here.
| | 00:29 | There are two general contexts
under which you'll be working with
| | 00:32 | Properties palette.
| | 00:33 | Now here it is over here on the left-hand
side of the screen in its default location.
| | 00:36 | I'm not going to change the
location of the Properties palette.
| | 00:38 | I recommend you kind of
leave it where it is, as well.
| | 00:40 | Let's say that I wanted to draw
some walls here in my project.
| | 00:44 | In a previous movie, we talked about
the Options bar, which gives us a lot of
| | 00:49 | settings available to the
Wall too while we're creating it.
| | 00:53 | But notice also that the Properties
palette indicates the kind of wall that
| | 00:58 | we're drawing, in this case a Basic
Interior Wall, indicates things like the
| | 01:02 | location line of the wall, which in this
case is the Centerline, what level we're
| | 01:05 | drawing it on, Level 1, and so forth, and so on.
| | 01:08 | If I scroll down, you can see that
there are potentially several other
| | 01:12 | settings. Some are blank.
| | 01:13 | We don't have any comments, for example,
in this wall, and it doesn't have an
| | 01:15 | area or volume yet because
we haven't drawn anything.
| | 01:18 | So I could come over, and I could draw
some walls, and don't worry about the
| | 01:21 | specifics of drawing walls right now,
because we'll cover that in a future movie.
| | 01:24 | But while we're actually placing the
wall, items on the Properties palette do
| | 01:29 | gray out, until you complete the
exercise of drawing that particular wall, and
| | 01:33 | then you'll notice that they become
available, and I could go in and interact
| | 01:36 | with, and make changes, like for
instance choose a different type of wall.
| | 01:41 | Now that's while I'm
creating an element, like a wall.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to press the Escape key two
times, which is going to get me out of
| | 01:47 | the Wall command, kind of reset me, get
me back to ground zero, and let's look
| | 01:51 | at what happens when we select some
existing element that already is in our project.
| | 01:57 | So in this case, I selected an
exterior wall, here on the garage, and you'll
| | 02:00 | notice over here that I see similar
kinds of information that I saw for the wall
| | 02:04 | that I just started drawing a moment ago.
| | 02:07 | In this case, I have a Basic
Exterior Wallthat's Brick on Metal Studs.
| | 02:11 | It's also Centerlined,
and it's also on Level 1.
| | 02:14 | So you see a lot of familiar settings
that we've already seen, but now we're
| | 02:18 | able to go in and actually interact
with that wall and make changes to it.
| | 02:22 | I could change it to Exterior Insulation
Finish System instead of Exterior Brick.
| | 02:27 | And while we don't really see much
difference here in a Plan view, we might
| | 02:32 | certainly see some difference from
that change here in an Elevation view.
| | 02:38 | So this wall next to it is still brick,
and the wall that I just changed is
| | 02:43 | now something else.
| | 02:44 | So it's really that easy to select an
element and then over on the Properties
| | 02:48 | palette, make changes to it.
| | 02:49 | If I select a window or a door, or any
other element, the same will apply.
| | 02:55 | Here, I've got a fixed window.
| | 02:57 | It's associated to Level 1.
| | 02:58 | It's got a Sill Height of 1 foot.
| | 03:00 | What would happen if I
change that Sill Height to 2 feet?
| | 03:03 | Now, notice that nothing
seems to have happened yet.
| | 03:05 | Very important thing to understand about
the way that the Properties palette functions.
| | 03:10 | It's considered, in programmer speak,
in computer jargon, a modeless dialog box.
| | 03:16 | Now what that means is that it's
active, and it's onscreen all the time.
| | 03:21 | Simply shifting focus, another kind of
computer jargon, away from the Properties
| | 03:26 | palette back to the Drawing
window actually applies the change.
| | 03:31 | Okay, so you notice how at that moment,
that's when the window shifted up to its
| | 03:35 | new Sill Height of two feet.
| | 03:37 | Now I'm going to select the window next
to it, and I'm going to repeat the process.
| | 03:41 | I'll do a Sill Height of 3 feet.
| | 03:43 | An alternative is, without leaving the
context of the Properties palette, I
| | 03:48 | can also move down here and click the Apply
button and then apply that change at that time.
| | 03:54 | So those are really the two ways that
you can apply the changes that you're
| | 03:58 | making on the Properties palette.
| | 04:00 | And the reason it's done this way is perhaps
you want to do more than just the Sill Height.
| | 04:04 | Maybe you want to change to the Mark,
maybe you want to add some Comments,
| | 04:07 | change the Level even.
| | 04:08 | You could make several modifications
on the Properties palette, and then when
| | 04:11 | you're happy with all those changes,
when you're ready to apply them, you can
| | 04:14 | come down here and click the Apply
button, or just simply shift focus back into
| | 04:19 | the Drawing window, and
that would apply the changes.
| | 04:21 | Okay, but the thing to be careful there
then, so that's a two-sided coin, is to be
| | 04:26 | careful to not accidentally shift
focus out of the Properties palette until
| | 04:30 | you're ready to actually apply the changes.
| | 04:32 | Now, it's not the end of the world
| | 04:33 | if you do. You can always come up here
to your Quick Access Toolbar, your QAT,
| | 04:37 | and simply undo the change, and it
will return to its original location.
| | 04:41 | But it's just it can be frustrating if
you shift focus accidentally when you
| | 04:45 | didn't really intend to.
| | 04:46 | Now let's take a look at one more
aspect of the Properties palette - well
| | 04:50 | two more, actually.
| | 04:51 | Number one is what to do
if it goes missing, okay.
| | 04:54 | We talked about this in a previous
movie, the Project browser movie, and it's
| | 04:58 | the same solution to get this palette back.
| | 05:00 | You go to the view tab, you go over
here to the User Interface dropdown button,
| | 05:05 | and you simply choose Properties.
| | 05:06 | Now it actually turns out there is a faster way.
| | 05:08 | We're going to talk about keyboard
shortcuts in a future movie, but let me just
| | 05:12 | point out to you briefly right here
that next to the word Properties on the
| | 05:15 | tooltip, you're seeing letters PP in parentheses.
| | 05:18 | So an alternative way to get the
Properties palette back is to just simply type
| | 05:22 | the keys PP on the keyboard.
| | 05:25 | You don't press Enter, or anything.
| | 05:26 | You just simply type P and then P. So
those are the two ways you could get the
| | 05:30 | Properties palette back, if it
were to accidentally go away on you.
| | 05:35 | Now let's talk about View properties.
| | 05:37 | So we've talked about Element
properties, where you have something selected
| | 05:41 | or when you're drawing something, and it
clearly says here that that's a basic wall.
| | 05:45 | But I want to direct your attention
right beneath that, to this little
| | 05:48 | dropdown menu where it currently says that we
have Walls, and in parentheses, the number 1.
| | 05:53 | That's telling me I have one wall.
| | 05:56 | Now, Selection will be a topic for a
future movie, but I'm going to go ahead
| | 05:59 | using my Ctrl key right now to select
two walls, and you'll see that it says
| | 06:03 | Walls and the number two.
| | 06:05 | So the number is always the quantity of
items, and then the word before that is
| | 06:10 | what you actually have selected.
| | 06:11 | Now, I'm going to click
anywhere in the empty white space.
| | 06:16 | That will deselect everything I have
selected, and notice that it now says,
| | 06:21 | Floor Plan: Level 2.
| | 06:24 | So, the Properties palette is still
there, it's still active, and it's clearly
| | 06:28 | still showing me some properties.
| | 06:31 | But what are these properties?
| | 06:32 | These properties are now the properties
of the Floor Plan view that I'm looking
| | 06:37 | at, as opposed to any selection of items.
| | 06:39 | So, for example, at the very top it says
View Scale 1/4" = 1'0".
| | 06:45 | This particular Floor Plan
view is at Quarter Inch Scale.
| | 06:49 | If I came over here and
I change this to 1/8" = 1'0" and
| | 06:54 | then I click Apply, same procedure or
shift focus off the palette, you're going
| | 06:59 | to notice that the Floor Plan has
clearly changed. The effect is that all the
| | 07:04 | tags suddenly got larger.
| | 07:06 | Look at my Room tags.
Look at my Elevation marks.
| | 07:09 | If you didn't see it, let me
go ahead and show it again.
| | 07:11 | Here, I'm going to go back to 1/4".
Watch very carefully at the Room tags.
| | 07:15 | Notice how they now appear
to be half the size. Okay.
| | 07:18 | So these properties are the
properties of the Floor Plan view.
| | 07:22 | Now if you have something selected,
you can actually use this little dropdown
| | 07:27 | menu and change your focus of the
Properties palette to either be the
| | 07:32 | selection, the Wall or the
Floor Plan itself, Floor Plan:
| | 07:36 | Level 2, by just simply choosing it off
the list, and then that gives you access
| | 07:40 | to those properties.
| | 07:41 | Now some of these other properties that
are on here for Floor Plans, we have a
| | 07:45 | future movie where we'll talk
about some of these settings.
| | 07:47 | For now, I just want you to be
comfortable with the notion of changing the focus
| | 07:51 | of the Properties palette away from
the selection and to the view itself, and
| | 07:55 | understanding that views have
properties as well as objects. Pretty much
| | 07:59 | everything in Revit has properties.
| | 08:02 | The last point to make: Some items
actually have type-level properties.
| | 08:07 | The difference is basically this.
| | 08:09 | This is an individual wall.
| | 08:11 | If I select it and make a
change, it only affects that wall.
| | 08:14 | Here's a better example here.
| | 08:16 | If I go back to Level 1 Floor Plan, and
I select this wall right here, this was
| | 08:22 | called Exterior Brick on Metal Stud.
| | 08:24 | This wall here is also
Exterior Brick on Metal Stud.
| | 08:28 | Now, these are clearly two
separate instances of that wall.
| | 08:31 | If I select one wall and make a change here,
it only affects the wall I have selected.
| | 08:36 | But if I were to click this button,
Edit Type and make a change here, this
| | 08:41 | dialog, which is not modeless by the
way, again computer speak for "always
| | 08:45 | available," you have to
actually click OK to get out of it.
| | 08:48 | If I made a change here, that change
would apply to all walls that share this type.
| | 08:55 | So if I were to, for example, go in
here and apply a core Skill Fill pattern
| | 09:01 | and make it a nice bright red color,
and click OK, you're going to see all of
| | 09:08 | the exterior walls, with the exception of the
one I changed earlier, changed to this red color.
| | 09:13 | That's an example of a Type property.
| | 09:15 | So, we'll see more of that in line,
in context as we work through the
| | 09:19 | training series, but I just wanted
you to understand that there is a
| | 09:22 | difference between an Instance
roperty that affects just the wall you have
| | 09:26 | selected, and a Type roperty which is
global and affects every wall of that
| | 09:31 | type throughout the entire project.
| | 09:34 | So for nearly every operation you can
perform in Revit will require some
| | 09:37 | interaction with the
Properties palette, as we have seen.
| | 09:39 | Having it available onscreen all the
time is definitely a must, and it's a big
| | 09:43 | help in this regard.
| | 09:44 | So please don't close it.
| | 09:45 | If you do close it, remember that you
can get it back by either typing PP, or
| | 09:49 | going to the View tab on the User
Interface dropdown, and just get in a habit of
| | 09:53 | looking at that Properties palette all
the time for feedback as you work, and it
| | 09:57 | will keep you productive and working well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Selection and modification basics| 00:00 | In this movie, we're
going to talk about selection.
| | 00:02 | Selecting elements is a basic skill
necessary to be successful in Revit.
| | 00:06 | So in this movie, we're going to go
ahead and take a look at the many ways that
| | 00:09 | we can select elements in the Revit environment.
| | 00:11 | The most basic form of
selection is to simply click on things.
| | 00:15 | Before we actually select anything
though, what we're going to need to learn
| | 00:18 | about is what is pre-highlighting.
| | 00:20 | You move your mouse over an
element in the Revit environment.
| | 00:23 | You're going to see the element pre-highlight.
| | 00:26 | It turns bold, it turns purple,
which is the default color, and a
| | 00:31 | message usually appears.
| | 00:33 | This is called pre-highlighting.
| | 00:34 | Now, when I move the mouse away, and I'm
going to bring it back, you're going to
| | 00:38 | see a message usually
appear right there at the cursor.
| | 00:41 | But if you wait a few seconds,
it is going to disappear.
| | 00:45 | That same message will always appear
down on the Status Line in the lower
| | 00:49 | left-hand corner of the screen.
| | 00:50 | That message tells you what kind of element
is under your cursor before you select it.
| | 00:56 | Now, this is called pre-highlighting.
| | 00:58 | If click the element, that's
when I actually make the selection.
| | 01:01 | So until you actually click on
it, it's not actually selected.
| | 01:05 | Now once you've selected the
element, a few things change onscreen.
| | 01:08 | The element turns light-blue.
| | 01:09 | You can see the wall there
is highlighted in light-blue.
| | 01:12 | On the Properties palette, on the left-
hand side of the screen, we see on the
| | 01:16 | Type Selector that we
have a Basic Wall selected.
| | 01:19 | At the top of the screen on the Ribbon
tab, we see Modify Walls tinted in a
| | 01:24 | green color, and that
indicates that we have a wall selected.
| | 01:28 | And then finally, down at the lower right
-hand corner of the screen, we see the
| | 01:32 | quantity of items that we have
selected. In this case, it's just one item.
| | 01:36 | If I deselect the element, which I can
do by clicking in the blank white space, the
| | 01:41 | quantity will change to 0, and all those
other indications will also disappear.
| | 01:45 | So it's really that simple to
select an item and deselect an item.
| | 01:48 | You pre-highlight it.
| | 01:49 | That's the item you want. You click on it.
| | 01:51 | It's now selected.
| | 01:52 | And then if you click
somewhere else, it's deselected.
| | 01:55 | If you select an item and then go on
to select another item, it will deselect
| | 01:59 | the first item in favor of the second item.
| | 02:02 | Now what if I want to select an item, and
not lose the selection of the first item?
| | 02:06 | I can do that using modifier keys.
| | 02:09 | If I hold down the Ctrl key before I
make the selection, a small Plus sign will
| | 02:14 | appear on the cursor, and then I can
move it over and pre-highlight the second
| | 02:18 | item. All of the same indicators will
appear onscreen. And then when I click,
| | 02:22 | you'll see that the new item is added
to the selection of the previous item.
| | 02:27 | Now, in this case, I've highlighted
and selected two wall elements, and
| | 02:32 | therefore, the Modify tab
will still say Modify Walls.
| | 02:36 | The Filter icon in the lower right-
hand corner will indicate that I have two
| | 02:40 | items selected, and the Properties
palette will indicate that both of these
| | 02:44 | items are Basic Wall Interior 4 7/8 inch,
because they're both the same type of wall.
| | 02:49 | Now what if I selected this toilet
fixture and then held the Ctrl key down and
| | 02:57 | selected the bathtub along with it?
| | 03:00 | Well in this case, the Context Tab
will read Modify Plumbing Fixtures because
| | 03:06 | both items are in the same
category of Plumbing Fixture.
| | 03:09 | But if we look at the Properties
palette, it'll now say that Multiple
| | 03:12 | Families are Selected.
| | 03:13 | Now, family is the word that Revit uses
to describe elements of different kinds,
| | 03:17 | and so in this case, the toilet is one
family, the tub is another family, so it
| | 03:22 | can't tell us one or the other, so it
just simply says there's multiple items.
| | 03:26 | Now the quantity, of course, is still 2,
down in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 03:30 | If we select a third item
that's of a different category,
| | 03:34 | now you're going to see, in the
Properties palette, that we have multiple
| | 03:37 | categories selected in gray, on the Type
Selector, and on the Ribbon, it's going
| | 03:42 | to say Modify Multi-Select, because
we now have items of different categories
| | 03:47 | selected, so it can no longer tell us
the category of item. But we do have
| | 03:51 | three in our quantity.
| | 03:52 | Now, selecting with the Ctrl key is
certainly a handy way to add to our selection.
| | 03:58 | We can also use another Modifier key.
| | 04:00 | Let's say that I have these four
elements selected, and I actually decide that I
| | 04:04 | want to deselect one of those items.
| | 04:06 | I can hold down the Shift key.
| | 04:08 | So if I hold down the Shift Key and select
again, it will deselect the previous item.
| | 04:14 | In addition to our Ctrl and Shift keys,
we have another key that we can use to
| | 04:18 | modify the selection.
| | 04:20 | Let me give you an example.
| | 04:21 | I'm going to move my mouse right
about here, and of course, the item that's
| | 04:26 | pre-highlighted under my mouse is a
Single Flush Door, and again, you can see
| | 04:30 | that confirmed with both of the
tooltip and the Status Line.
| | 04:33 | What if I was interested in the wall
that the door was actually attached to?
| | 04:37 | Certainly I could zoom in, or I could
move the mouse around and try and get it
| | 04:40 | to pre-highlight another item,
but I have another alternative.
| | 04:43 | I can use the Tab key.
| | 04:44 | Now in this case, it's a little
different than it was with the Ctrl and Shift,
| | 04:48 | because I don't want to hold down the Tab key.
| | 04:51 | If I do, I'm going to get this
like strobe light effect, and that's
| | 04:55 | definitely not what we want.
| | 04:56 | So I'm going to let go of that.
| | 05:00 | With the door pre-highlighted, if I
simply press and release the Tab key, you're
| | 05:05 | going to see the selection focus shift
to the next eligible item, and in this
| | 05:10 | case that's the wall.
| | 05:11 | If I press Tab again, it turns out that
there is a third eligible item in this
| | 05:15 | case, which is actually
something called the Chain of walls.
| | 05:18 | Now a Chain of walls or lines, as you
can see in the Status Line, is walls or
| | 05:24 | lines that are connected end-to-end.
| | 05:26 | So in this case, you can see the two
walls that are highlighted are connected
| | 05:30 | in a chain, and so they share
endpoints, in other words, and so they are
| | 05:34 | pre-highlighting together.
| | 05:36 | If that's the selection I want,
that's when I need to click my mouse.
| | 05:40 | That's very important because a lot
of folks get the tabbing part, but they
| | 05:44 | often forget the clicking part.
| | 05:46 | So if I come over here and I tab, tab, oh yeah,
| | 05:50 | that's the selection I want,
and then I move my mouse away,
| | 05:53 | I lose the selection because all I
had done was pre-highlight the items.
| | 05:57 | I didn't actually select them.
| | 05:58 | So again, remember, tab, tab, then click.
| | 06:02 | You don't have a selection
until you actually make the click.
| | 06:05 | Now, let's look at another chain selection.
| | 06:09 | Now in this case, you can see the chain
is much more dramatic, because the chain
| | 06:14 | actually connects end-to-end, and goes
from one wall to the next, and goes all
| | 06:18 | the way around the entire floor plan.
| | 06:19 | So depending on the shape of the
elements and how they touch end-to-end, your
| | 06:24 | chain could be quite a few walls, and
this becomes a really convenient way to
| | 06:28 | select the exterior walls on most buildings.
| | 06:31 | So again, don't forget to click
to actually make the selection.
| | 06:35 | So those are modify keys that we can use
to make selections, but there are other
| | 06:39 | ways we can make selections, as well.
| | 06:41 | Two very important ways are
the Window and the Crossing.
| | 06:44 | Now both involve clicking and dragging
with the mouse, but whether or not you drag
| | 06:49 | from left to right or right to left,
changes the way that the selection is made.
| | 06:52 | So let's go ahead and do the Window first,
which is click and drag to the right.
| | 06:59 | Now notice as I move to the right, the
elements don't pre-highlight until I've
| | 07:04 | actually completely surrounded them.
| | 07:07 | So in this case, it's just the plumbing
fixtures, then the door gets added, then
| | 07:11 | the door and a small wall and then
another small wall and the two sidewalls, and
| | 07:15 | then finally, if I release, all
of those items will be selected.
| | 07:19 | Notice of course, that the two
horizontal walls, the long ones, do not get
| | 07:24 | selected because they are
longer than that Selection window.
| | 07:29 | So if I wanted to add this wall and
this wall to the selection, I would need to
| | 07:34 | use other methods, like the Ctrl
key, to add them to the selection.
| | 07:38 | Now what about the Crossing selection?
| | 07:40 | The Window was, again, left to right and
notice the edge of the boundary was solid.
| | 07:48 | The Crossing selection goes right to
left, and notice the edge of the boundary
| | 07:54 | is dashed, and notice again that this
one begins to select items as soon as they
| | 08:01 | are touched or crossed by the Selection Window.
| | 08:04 | So you only need to touch the item,
instead of completely surrounding it.
| | 08:08 | Now you can completely surround it as
well, but just touching it is all that's
| | 08:12 | required to make that selection.
| | 08:14 | So again, a Window, you
have to completely surround.
| | 08:18 | A Crossing, you just have to touch.
| | 08:20 | Now all of these methods actually work together.
| | 08:23 | You can make one Crossing selection,
hold the Ctrl key down, add a Window
| | 08:28 | selection to it, click over here, use
your Shift key, deselect, use your Shift
| | 08:33 | key and deselect with a crossing, and so forth
and so on; all of the methods work together.
| | 08:39 | You can even come in and do a Chain
selection, but again, don't forget to hold
| | 08:45 | down a Ctrl or a Shift key before you
click because otherwise, you'll lose
| | 08:50 | whatever else you have previously selected.
| | 08:52 | Now once I've made a complex selection,
it may be that I have almost exactly the
| | 08:57 | selection I want, but there's just one
or two elements that are in there that I
| | 09:00 | didn't want, like looking at this
selection, I say, you know I am happy with the
| | 09:04 | selection, but I really only am
interested in the walls that I have selected.
| | 09:08 | Now I could go around and painstakingly,
with the Shift key, deselect the toilets
| | 09:12 | and the doors, and so on,
but there is a faster way.
| | 09:15 | On the Ribbon, when you have a
selection, you will get a Filter button.
| | 09:19 | This Filter button will display a
dialog that shows you, by category, all of the
| | 09:24 | items in your current selection.
| | 09:26 | Now there is some useful information in here.
| | 09:28 | There is a Count column that tells you
how many items of each category you have.
| | 09:32 | So in this case, I have 11 walls and
three plumbing fixtures and so on.
| | 09:35 | By simply deselecting the check boxes
for the categories you are not interested
| | 09:39 | in and clicking OK, you remove
those items from the selection.
| | 09:44 | So a very powerful Revit way to select
is to make a selection that's too big,
| | 09:50 | then go to Filter, in this case
doing Check None is going to be the most
| | 09:54 | efficient thing to do.
| | 09:55 | That will remove all the check boxes,
and then I'll only select Plumbing
| | 09:59 | Fixtures and Specialty Equipment.
| | 10:01 | And you'll see, from that selection, I
now have just the equipment selected
| | 10:07 | instead of all that other stuff.
| | 10:08 | So that becomes a very
powerful and useful way to select.
| | 10:12 | So please keep all of these
selection techniques in mind.
| | 10:15 | You're going to use these constantly
in all of your Revit projects and all
| | 10:18 | of your Revit work.
| | 10:19 | Practice them, get comfortable with them,
because you're going to be using these
| | 10:24 | every day in everything you do in Revit.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing Revit options| 00:00 | Like most computer programs, Revit has
many user configurable settings and options.
| | 00:05 | Many of the settings are configured
optimally out of the box from the factory,
| | 00:08 | and probably don't need to
be changed by most users.
| | 00:11 | So there are several settings that you
at least want to understand why they are
| | 00:15 | set the way they are and possibly
consider making changes to them.
| | 00:19 | To do these kinds of changes, we look in
the Options dialog box, and we can find
| | 00:22 | that from the Application menu, which
again, is the big R button in the top
| | 00:26 | corner of the screen, and Options way
down here toward the bottom of the menu.
| | 00:30 | When we do, this dialog will appear.
| | 00:33 | So here in the General tab, in the very
first area, we have our Save reminders.
| | 00:36 | Now if you've used a computer program for
a while, you know how important it is to save.
| | 00:40 | The Save reminder gives us an
opportunity for Revit to remind us every so
| | 00:44 | often to save our file, if we have not
done so ready, and the increments that
| | 00:49 | are available are as few as 15 minutes and
all the way up to 4 hours, or even No reminders.
| | 00:54 | Now clearly, No reminders I would not
recommend, unless you are very confident in
| | 00:59 | your ability to remember to save.
| | 01:00 | 15 minutes may be a little too
frequently and a little disruptive, because the
| | 01:04 | Save reminder will pop up
and interrupt your work.
| | 01:07 | 30 minutes is the default, which is
not a bad choice, and I would definitely
| | 01:11 | recommend starting at least there.
| | 01:12 | Getting much beyond that: 1 hour, 2 hours,
| | 01:15 | I'll you what I tell all my other
students: How much work are you willing to loose?
| | 01:19 | That's basically how I would set this number.
| | 01:20 | So I am going to leave it at 30 minutes.
I'm going to recommend you do the same.
| | 01:24 | If you want to be extra cautious,
you can go down to 15 minutes.
| | 01:27 | Let's take a look at a couple of
quick things on the User Interface tab.
| | 01:30 | If you're interested, there are
actually two versions of the theme, Light and
| | 01:34 | Dark, and so you can play with
those and see how those appeal to you.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to come back and talk about
the keyboard shortcuts in just a moment,
| | 01:40 | but we have a few other settings
down here that we can take a look at.
| | 01:44 | This area is pretty important.
| | 01:46 | When you are working in the environment,
the tabs on the Ribbon will either stay
| | 01:53 | on the Modify tab, or they will return to
whatever previous tab you were working in.
| | 01:58 | Now I think the defaults here are
actually pretty good, the return to previous
| | 02:02 | tab for the project environment, and in
fact when we talk about the family editor
| | 02:06 | in a future chapter, you may want to
come back here and actually set that
| | 02:10 | behavior here as well.
| | 02:11 | To have Revit continually go back to the
Modify tab, I find a little disruptive.
| | 02:16 | So you could be working in the
environment, you click on something, you make
| | 02:20 | a modification, and then you're on the Home
tab, and then it jumps over to the Modify tab.
| | 02:24 | I don't really care for that.
| | 02:25 | So I do prefer the return to previous tab and
actually, like I said, I prefer it in both cases.
| | 02:31 | So I am going to make that change here,
and I'll remind you of that when we talk
| | 02:34 | about families in the Family chapter.
| | 02:36 | Now you may have noticed the
tooltips already in your work in Revit.
| | 02:41 | The default behavior is Normal, and if I
open this up, there are actually 4 choices.
| | 02:46 | I think None is pretty self-explanatory,
but let's talk about Minimal and High.
| | 02:50 | So I am going to click OK here, and
even without a project open, I can actually
| | 02:55 | click on one of the Ribbon tabs and
expand it, and pause my mouse over a tool,
| | 03:00 | and I am going to pause just over the Wall tool.
| | 03:02 | Now you notice how the tooltip was
small and gave a little bit of information,
| | 03:06 | and then as I waited a little longer
with my mouse in the same location, it
| | 03:10 | expanded and gave this larger
tooltip and showed a graphic along with it.
| | 03:14 | The first version of the tooltip, this
one, is what you would see in Minimal, and
| | 03:20 | the second version, the one that just
appeared, that's what you'd see in High.
| | 03:24 | When you set it to Normal, like the
default, that's when it does both. It starts
| | 03:28 | off Minimal, and then it
goes to High after a pause.
| | 03:31 | So you can choose whichever one appeals to you.
| | 03:34 | If you're just getting started in Revit,
I recommend leaving the tooltips set on
| | 03:39 | and set to one of those three choices.
| | 03:41 | I am not too concerned whether you do
Minimal or High, but just that you do have
| | 03:46 | tooltips enabled, because there is a
lot of really useful information in here.
| | 03:50 | So get in the habit of reading these tooltips.
| | 03:52 | When you become a more seasoned Revit
user, and you don't really feel like you
| | 03:55 | need the extra tooltips anymore, you
can certainly go in to Options at that
| | 03:59 | time, click on User Interface, and change it to
None, if you no longer want to see the tooltips.
| | 04:04 | Now there is one other really useful
thing that we want to know on the tooltips,
| | 04:08 | and it ties back to this
item here, Keyboard Shortcuts.
| | 04:11 | So let me cancel out of here one more time.
| | 04:13 | Let me go over here and pause over this.
| | 04:16 | Notice right next to the word
Wall, in parentheses, it says (WA).
| | 04:20 | That's the keyboard shortcut for the Wall tool.
| | 04:23 | So to demonstrate that actually, I can just
kind of click and create a new empty project.
| | 04:28 | That's not really important because I
am not actually really going to draw
| | 04:31 | anything, but I just want
to show you how this works.
| | 04:33 | Certainly if I click the
Wall tool, I would create a wall.
| | 04:37 | But I am going to press
Escape and get out of there.
| | 04:39 | If I type the letters wa on my keyboard,
notice that does exactly the same thing.
| | 04:44 | If I type the letters dr,
that changes me to the Door tool.
| | 04:48 | If I type the letters wn, okay, that
changes me to the Window tool, and so on.
| | 04:55 | Now I am going to press
Escape to cancel of there.
| | 04:57 | So as you pause over each tool, if it
has a tooltip, they are going to appear
| | 05:01 | there in parentheses.
| | 05:03 | Now I highly encourage you to learn the
tooltips, to pay attention to those, and
| | 05:09 | to get used to using them, because it
can greatly enhance your productivity, and
| | 05:12 | anybody who has used Revit for a while
will swear by the keyboard shortcuts.
| | 05:16 | Now this is a relatively new
enhancement in the software, new in 2011, where we
| | 05:20 | can actually customize the keyboard
shortcuts in a dialog box interface.
| | 05:24 | So you can use this tool for two things.
| | 05:27 | I'm not actually a huge fan of
customizing them, okay so again you click here,
| | 05:31 | and it brings this second window up,
but this can actually be a really handy
| | 05:35 | tool to find out if a keyboard
shortcut exists for something.
| | 05:38 | Like if I wasn't sure if the Railing
Command had a keyboard shortcut, I can just
| | 05:42 | type in the Search box here and see if it does.
| | 05:45 | And you'll notice that Railing is
listed here as a command, but there's no
| | 05:48 | shortcut associated with it.
| | 05:50 | If I want to change that, I could
actually press the keys here and assign a
| | 05:54 | shortcut to the Railing command here on the fly.
| | 05:58 | So depending on how frequently you
envision making Railings, and how useful
| | 06:02 | you think it might be to have a Railing
shortcut, you could go through with that modification.
| | 06:07 | If I click the little x, it'll clear
that, and you'll see the whole list again.
| | 06:11 | So as you scroll through here, this is
another way where you can see all the
| | 06:16 | shortcuts that are
available for the various commands.
| | 06:19 | So more than using it as a
customization tool, which is certainly what it's
| | 06:22 | designed for, it can be a great
educational tool for you to learn what the
| | 06:26 | shortcuts are for the commands
that you use most frequently.
| | 06:29 | So I highly recommend that you do
that and get comfortable with what
| | 06:33 | those shortcuts are.
| | 06:34 | The last thing I want to point out to
you here in the Options dialog is on the
| | 06:37 | File Locations, and this is actually a
little bit more important, maybe to your
| | 06:42 | CAD Manager if you have a CAD manager in
your office. But you should at least be
| | 06:46 | aware that these paths exist, so when we
click over here, there's three locations
| | 06:51 | here that are kind of important.
| | 06:52 | The first one is the template file.
| | 06:55 | In the background, when I click the
New command, it opened a drawing for me.
| | 07:00 | It opened a project file for me, and
it didn't really ask me any questions
| | 07:03 | about that project file.
| | 07:05 | It automatically used this file right here,
this Revit template file, as the default.
| | 07:10 | Now in a coming movie, we are
going to talk about template files in a
| | 07:14 | little more detail.
| | 07:15 | So we will get an opportunity to
discuss that, but that's where that came from.
| | 07:18 | This is the default location where it will
save files if I don't give it another location.
| | 07:23 | So by default, it's my Documents folder.
And then when you get into families,
| | 07:27 | there's also templates for that.
| | 07:29 | So it's kind of important to understand
that these paths exist and that you can
| | 07:32 | customize them, but again, I would check
with your CAD manager first, if you have
| | 07:36 | such an individual at your organization.
| | 07:39 | So that's just a brief look at some of
the settings that are overall settings in
| | 07:43 | the Revit project environment, some of
the things that I think you should get
| | 07:47 | comfortable with, and at
least know they are there.
| | 07:48 | So again, don't forget to
set your Save reminders,
| | 07:51 | learn those keyboard shortcuts, and you
are going to find that those things are
| | 07:54 | going to make it very useful for you
to not only preserve your work and not
| | 07:57 | loose anything, but to also be a
little more productive with the way you
| | 08:00 | execute the commands.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Starting a ProjectCreating a new project| 00:00 | All of the work you do in Revit is
contained in a single Revit project file.
| | 00:04 | Revit offers a few methods
for creating new project files.
| | 00:07 | In this lesson, we'll learn how to
create project files in both the Recent File
| | 00:10 | screen and the Application menu.
| | 00:11 | So we've already seen the Recent
File screen in a previous movie.
| | 00:14 | Let's just review it again here.
| | 00:16 | At the very top of the Recent File
screen, we have the Projects area, and we
| | 00:20 | could of course use the Open link to
open an existing project file that we
| | 00:24 | already have somewhere on our network
or hard drive, but if we want to create a
| | 00:27 | brand-new project from scratch,
we would click the New link here.
| | 00:31 | When we do, Revit won't
ask us any questions at all.
| | 00:34 | It'll simply open up the screen and
show us a blank view, ready for us to begin
| | 00:39 | adding model geometry.
| | 00:41 | So how did it know what we wanted here,
you know, any configurable settings,
| | 00:44 | what we were interested in?
| | 00:46 | If we look at the Project browser we have
Level 1, we have Level 2, we have a Site plan;
| | 00:50 | how did it know all the stuff?
| | 00:51 | All of that information is contained in
a template file, and in a future movie, we
| | 00:57 | will be talking in more detail about
template files, but let me just explain to
| | 01:00 | you right now where this
template file came from.
| | 01:03 | If we go take a look at the Options
command, which is on the Application menu,
| | 01:08 | and we look over here at the File
Locations tab, you are going to see the very
| | 01:13 | first path here indicates a location, and
at the very end there is this file name
| | 01:20 | right here, default.rte.
| | 01:22 | Now rte is the file extension that Revit
uses for template files, Revit template
| | 01:27 | files, and default is just that:
| | 01:28 | It's just the default template file.
| | 01:30 | So that default file comes from Autodesk.
| | 01:33 | It includes two levels.
| | 01:35 | It includes a Site Plan, some Ceiling
Plans, some basic Building Elevations and
| | 01:39 | really not much else.
| | 01:40 | So it's a really simple, straightforward,
basic template file, and when you use - I
| | 01:46 | am going to go ahead and
close this without saving it -
| | 01:48 | when you use this link right here on
the Recent File screen, it just opens that
| | 01:54 | default template automatically
without asking any questions.
| | 01:57 | Now if you go to the Application menu
instead and choose New, and then over here
| | 02:03 | you have several different kinds of
file that you can create, so we can create
| | 02:07 | new projects, new families, new
conceptual masses or title blocks,
| | 02:11 | if I create a New Project, which is the
same thing that we were looking at with
| | 02:15 | the New, this time we are going to get
a dialog because it's going to confirm
| | 02:19 | for us which template that we want to use.
| | 02:21 | Now by default, it's going to have a
Template file selected here, and if I just
| | 02:26 | kind of drag through here, you'll
notice that it's the same default.rte that
| | 02:32 | we saw a moment ago.
| | 02:33 | It's just that here basically Revit is
confirming that yes, in fact, this is the
| | 02:38 | template that we want to use.
| | 02:39 | In the next movie, or in a future movie,
we are going to actually click the Browse
| | 02:42 | button here and look at the other
Template files that we have available to
| | 02:45 | create projects from, but for now
I'm just going to leave it default.rte.
| | 02:49 | Down here, I want to create a new Project.
| | 02:52 | It's also possible to create a new
Project template, which we are not going to
| | 02:56 | get into, and we are going to OK, and
when the screen opens, it looks exactly the
| | 03:02 | same as where we were a moment ago.
| | 03:04 | We got Level 1, Level 2, Site, and so on.
| | 03:06 | So there's really not much difference in
the two methods that I just chose to do that.
| | 03:11 | So you'd really use the second method if
you want to verify the template file is
| | 03:15 | in fact the correct one, and/or click
the Browse button to choose a different
| | 03:19 | template file, and as I said, in a future
movie we will go ahead and do that, and
| | 03:23 | we will explore the other
template files we have available.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the importance of template files| 00:00 | Revit ships with a few template
files to help you get started in your
| | 00:02 | projects right away.
| | 00:04 | You can use a provided template file
as is, you can customize it if it's
| | 00:06 | necessary, or you can even build your own.
| | 00:09 | In this movie, we'll look at a few
examples to help you get started and to help
| | 00:12 | you understand what's provided
in a well-thought-out template.
| | 00:15 | In a previous movie, we created a project
using the New link on the Recent File screen.
| | 00:19 | This link creates a project
from the default template.
| | 00:22 | If you want to actually choose the
template that you want to start from, you
| | 00:25 | need to go to the Application menu instead.
| | 00:27 | So let's go to Application menu,
under New, and choose New Project.
| | 00:32 | Here we can click Browse, and you will
see a list of provided template files
| | 00:37 | that are available to you.
| | 00:38 | I'm in the US Imperial installation of Revit.
| | 00:41 | If you're in a metric version,
you'll see metric templates at the top, or
| | 00:44 | something along those lines, and
you'll see a slightly different list of
| | 00:47 | templates, but the
concepts will remain the same.
| | 00:49 | So let's go ahead and start
with the default template first.
| | 00:52 | I'm going to go ahead and open it up. Click OK.
| | 00:55 | I'm just going to point out a few of
the main features that you would see.
| | 00:59 | The most obvious thing that you see
when you start off in a new project is in
| | 01:03 | your floor plan view there are these four
elevation markers oriented around the screen.
| | 01:07 | If you pause over each one, they
tell you which Elevation they point to.
| | 01:10 | In this case, this is the West,
down here we have the South, and so on.
| | 01:14 | Those correspond to the four Elevation
views that are over here in the Project browser.
| | 01:19 | In addition to that, we have some
Ceiling Plans, some Floor Plans.
| | 01:22 | There is a Site Plan.
| | 01:24 | The Site Plan differs from the
Floor Plan really in just the scale.
| | 01:27 | You could see to this one is set to
1"= 20', where our typical floor plans
| | 01:32 | are set to 1/8''= 1'.
| | 01:35 | Now, the default template doesn't
include any Legends, doesn't include any
| | 01:39 | Schedules, nor any Sheets.
| | 01:41 | It's a pretty simple, basic starting point.
| | 01:43 | So let's go ahead and close out of
here, and let's look at a few of the
| | 01:47 | alternatives that you might want to explore.
| | 01:49 | So I'm going to go to New > Project
again, I'm going to click Browse, and this
| | 01:54 | time I'll take at look at
the Residential-Default.
| | 02:01 | When you create your own Revit
projects, you can create lots of views.
| | 02:04 | We're going to talk
about this in a future movie.
| | 02:06 | You could see that they have done a
lot of the work for you over here by
| | 02:08 | creating several different
views on different floor plans.
| | 02:12 | We still have a few ceiling plans.
| | 02:14 | There are the four
Elevations that we had before.
| | 02:17 | And the thing I'd like to point out
here that's a little bit different than the
| | 02:19 | other template was this one
actually starts with some Schedules.
| | 02:23 | Now how is this important?
| | 02:24 | Well, let's go ahead and
open up a Door Schedule.
| | 02:26 | You could see that it's got some
predefined columns already in it.
| | 02:29 | It doesn't really show us any doors, though.
| | 02:31 | Well, that's very simple.
| | 02:32 | The reason for that is we don't
have any doors in our project yet.
| | 02:35 | So let's go ahead and take care of that.
| | 02:36 | I am just going to draw a quick little wall,
because you can't add doors without a wall.
| | 02:41 | I'll go ahead and throw in a couple of doors.
| | 02:46 | I do a zoom around that area, and don't
worry about the details of what I've done.
| | 02:50 | We'll cover all of the specifics of
adding doors and walls in a later movie.
| | 02:54 | But here I have door number 1, 2, and 3.
| | 02:58 | Let's go ahead and take a look at the
Door Schedule, and you'll see the Doors
| | 03:01 | Number 1, 2, and 3 are
already available on Schedule.
| | 03:04 | So by including things like Schedule
views and some of the other views in the
| | 03:07 | template, you can save yourself and
other folks that use the template a lot of
| | 03:11 | work in the setup steps that would
otherwise be required to go ahead and get
| | 03:14 | started with a project.
| | 03:15 | Just close out of here, and
we'll do one more example.
| | 03:20 | It turns out that if you just click the
New button right there, it automatically
| | 03:24 | defaults to New Project.
| | 03:25 | So that's a little shortcut for you.
| | 03:26 | I'm going to go ahead and click
Browse, and this time I'm going to choose
| | 03:30 | the Commercial-Default.
| | 03:31 | Click Open, then OK.
| | 03:39 | Like the other templates we've seen,
this one has some floor plans, one
| | 03:44 | ceiling plan, a couple of elevations, and a few
schedules, just like we saw in the last template.
| | 03:49 | This one also has several Sheet views.
| | 03:52 | So let's take a quick look
at what this does for us here.
| | 03:55 | I'm going to zoom in on my
Elevation marker over here on the West.
| | 03:59 | If I pause over this, it confirms
for me that that's the West Elevation.
| | 04:03 | Notice it says it's number 2 on A5.
| | 04:06 | That's actually corresponding to the
sheet A5 that we see over here, and if I
| | 04:10 | expand it with the little Plus sign, you'll
see that sheet actually contains two Elevations:
| | 04:14 | West, which we've just verified by
pausing over the Elevation indicator there in
| | 04:18 | the Plan view, and it's also
includes the East Elevation.
| | 04:21 | If I open the sheet up, you can see
that this is the West Elevation right down
| | 04:25 | here, and here's the East here.
| | 04:27 | Let's go ahead and zoom in a little bit.
| | 04:28 | That confirms for me that that's in
fact West, which is number 2, and this one
| | 04:37 | is East, which is number 1.
| | 04:39 | So again, a lot of set up works is being
done for us automatically, and how nice
| | 04:43 | would it be to be able to just start
laying out your building model, and already
| | 04:46 | have your sheets kind of taking care themselves?
| | 04:48 | So these are just a few of the
benefits that you might have when you start a
| | 04:51 | project with a well-thought-out
and well-defined template file.
| | 04:55 | So in this movie, we've looked at a few
different examples, given you some ideas.
| | 04:59 | As you get more experienced with Revit,
you might want to take some of these
| | 05:02 | ideas and customize and build your own
template that's in compliance with your
| | 05:05 | own office standards.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding project settings| 00:00 | Even if you start your project with a
template, there are still many project
| | 00:03 | settings that you want to take a quick
look at and verify before you get started
| | 00:07 | doing any serious work.
| | 00:08 | So let's just review the
steps of creating a template.
| | 00:10 | We're going to go to the Application menu.
| | 00:12 | Click New > Project.
| | 00:13 | I'm going to Browse for a template, and
I'll start with the Commercial-Default.
| | 00:17 | Now, most of the settings that are
overall and apply globally to the entire
| | 00:25 | project can be found in the Manage tab.
| | 00:27 | Let's go ahead and start with the Project Units.
| | 00:30 | The unit should already be set to the
most common unit that you use in whatever
| | 00:35 | region you happen to live in.
| | 00:36 | So in my case, I've installed the US
Imperial version, and so most of the units
| | 00:41 | are set in US imperial
Units like feet and inches.
| | 00:44 | Typically, that's probably going to be
acceptable, the default settings, but
| | 00:47 | you might want to verify them just to
make sure that the actual unit you're
| | 00:51 | interested in is set or
perhaps the level of precision.
| | 00:55 | You can see here that there are quite a
few choices. The default in my case is
| | 00:59 | Feet and fractional inches, but I could
change it to Decimal feet, or Fractional
| | 01:03 | inches, or even Millimeters, or Centimeters.
| | 01:06 | I can also change the level of precision.
| | 01:09 | So perhaps I'm not interested in
rounding down to the nearest 32nd of an inch.
| | 01:13 | I might only be interested
in the nearest 8th of an inch.
| | 01:16 | I can make that change here.
| | 01:17 | I can even tell it to suppress the zero
feet in front of group units, so when it says
| | 01:23 | 0 feet 6 inches I can ask Revit to
basically show just 6 inches without the 0 feet.
| | 01:27 | And I'll leave that turned off.
| | 01:30 | Go ahead and click OK here.
| | 01:32 | Under the other settings, we
have similar lists of choices.
| | 01:36 | So for area, we can see that we can
choose between Square feet, or Square
| | 01:40 | meters, or Square inches.
| | 01:42 | And again, we have decimal precision, so
if you want to go to 2 decimal places on
| | 01:47 | your square foot calculations.
| | 01:48 | And we can even tell it what
symbol to use at the end of square feet.
| | 01:52 | So we can use SF, or we could ft2
whatever setting is more appropriate for
| | 01:58 | your Office standards.
| | 01:59 | You can take a look at Volume, Angle,
Slope; they all have similar types of choices.
| | 02:06 | You can also indicate for Revit which
decimal symbol you'd like to use, whether
| | 02:09 | you want to use the period, or the
comma, depending on what region you're in.
| | 02:13 | I should point out that all of these
settings, if you're an architect these are
| | 02:17 | probably the only one you need to worry about,
| | 02:19 | they're listed in here in the Common Discipline.
| | 02:21 | There are other units settings for other
disciplines like Structural and Engineering.
| | 02:27 | And if I just choose those real quick,
you can see that there is quite a few
| | 02:30 | options in here to look at.
| | 02:31 | So if you're structural engineer, you
might want to go through those various choices.
| | 02:35 | If you're an Electrical engineer, likewise.
| | 02:38 | In my case, I'm just going to keep
myself focused in the architectural, so I'm
| | 02:41 | going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:42 | So that's one set settings that you
want to just do a quick verification on
| | 02:46 | and make sure. Even if you typically
work in feet and inches, you might be doing
| | 02:50 | a project overseas, and that
project has to be in metric units,
| | 02:53 | so you might want to take a look at some
of those settings before you get started.
| | 02:57 | The next thing I'd like to
look at is Project Information.
| | 02:59 | Now, this is a pretty straightforward text
dialog box, so each of the parameters in
| | 03:04 | here is just a text field,
like the Project Issue Date.
| | 03:07 | So if we're going to issue this
project at the end of the summer,
| | 03:09 | we could go ahead and put in a date for this.
| | 03:12 | And I'll just go ahead
and make up a date for now.
| | 03:15 | We'll say this is going
to be August 30th of 2010.
| | 03:18 | We could say that this is Design
Development, who the Owner is.
| | 03:29 | What's the Project Name?
| | 03:33 | Keep these fairly generic
right now and the Project Number.
| | 03:38 | We can even click here and
type in the Project Address.
| | 03:41 | This is actually the street address
that will show up on the title block.
| | 03:46 | So this might be 123
Main Street, so forth and so on.
| | 03:52 | In addition to this information, even
though you have project address, that's
| | 03:55 | just textual information
that feeds the title block.
| | 03:57 | We can actually indicate for Revit our actual
geographic location where we are in the world.
| | 04:03 | And we do that with a
different command right here;
| | 04:05 | this is the Location button.
| | 04:07 | So we're going to go ahead and click on that.
| | 04:09 | And this will open up the
Location Weather and Site dialog.
| | 04:13 | This is actually tied into
Google Map so as you can see.
| | 04:16 | So it's using the Internet Location Service,
or Internet Mapping Service, as it says here.
| | 04:20 | And you're able to actually
type in your actual address.
| | 04:23 | So I'm going to put in Carpinteria,
California, and you can see it actually
| | 04:29 | started to guess for me.
| | 04:30 | And I guess there is only
one Carpinteria out there.
| | 04:32 | And when I click Search, it will take
me from Boston, which is the default from
| | 04:37 | the mother ship - that's actually
where Autodesk is located for Revit -
| | 04:40 | and takes me over here to
Carpinteria, California, and it defaults to
| | 04:44 | the Satellite View.
| | 04:45 | But I can easily change that, I
actually guess this is the Terrain View.
| | 04:49 | I can easily change that to the Map,
or I could go to the Satellite photo, or
| | 04:54 | could do some sort of a Hybrid
View, whichever view that you like.
| | 04:58 | Now, maybe I'm nearby Carpinteria.
| | 05:01 | I don't actually want to be right there.
| | 05:02 | I can actually click the little
indicator and drag it to another location.
| | 05:07 | So if the address that you plug in
doesn't get you exactly where you need to go,
| | 05:12 | you can go ahead and move it around.
I'm just kind of leave it in downtown area there.
| | 05:16 | The more accurate you make that, the
better off will be if you later export your
| | 05:21 | model to any kind of building analysis software.
| | 05:24 | Your mechanical engineers, if they need
to do load calculations for ventilation
| | 05:28 | and heating conditions,
| | 05:29 | knowing the actual location gives them
the data they need so that they can do
| | 05:32 | proper calculations, and so on.
| | 05:35 | So these are just a few of the overall project
settings that you might want to take a look at.
| | 05:39 | I do want to point out that there are
quite a few other settings available in Revit.
| | 05:43 | So as you get a little bit
more experience, you'll definitely want to
| | 05:46 | start exploring some of these.
| | 05:48 | Some of those settings you'd want to
actually save in your template file, so that
| | 05:52 | you get to use them over and over again.
| | 05:53 | Others you'd want to set project-by-project.
| | 05:56 | So in this lesson, we've looked at a
few of those basic overall settings.
| | 06:00 | Make sure you've given them a look
before you get started doing your project work.
| | 06:04 | And get those things configured
appropriately for the project and the
| | 06:07 | location you're in.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening and saving projects| 00:00 | In this movie, we'll talk about
opening files, and saving files.
| | 00:03 | Opening should be fairly
straightforward and if you've used a computer program
| | 00:06 | for any length of time, then
you know how important saving is.
| | 00:10 | Both of these functions are critical to your
work, and you'll be doing them all the time.
| | 00:13 | We'll also talk about Saving As,
making copies, and working with backup
| | 00:17 | files in this lesson.
| | 00:18 | I should mention, however, that all of
the lessons here in the training series
| | 00:23 | work in a stand-alone single-user environment.
| | 00:25 | What this means is only one person
can be in those files at a given time.
| | 00:29 | But if you work in an office with more
than one Revit user, you are going to be
| | 00:32 | opening and saving files
a little bit differently.
| | 00:34 | So we're going to talk about, at the
end of the lesson, the concept of work
| | 00:37 | sharing and working in a work-sharing
environment and how that allows multiple
| | 00:41 | users to access the same files and how
the process of opening and saving will
| | 00:45 | vary slightly in that environment.
| | 00:46 | So let's go ahead and start with the
basics for a stand-alone environment,
| | 00:50 | with the Open command.
| | 00:51 | We could certainly open right
here from the Recent File screen.
| | 00:55 | The other option we have is we can go to
the Application menu and go to Open > Project.
| | 01:00 | It's also on the QAT, and we can also
use the Windows shortcut: Ctrl+O. I am
| | 01:06 | going to browse to my Exercise Files in
my Chapter03 folder, and I am going to
| | 01:12 | find the file called Open and Save.
| | 01:14 | I am going to go ahead and open that up. Okay.
| | 01:18 | So here is a really simple
office building structure.
| | 01:21 | We'll actually be working on this file
throughout the training series, building it
| | 01:24 | sort of from scratch.
| | 01:25 | So let's say I made some changes, and I
am ready to save; all I need to do is go
| | 01:29 | to the Application menu and choose Save.
| | 01:32 | The Windows shortcut for that is
Ctrl+S, so that's another option.
| | 01:35 | Just press Ctrl key with the S,
and that will save it, as well.
| | 01:39 | And that's pretty much all there is to it.
| | 01:41 | Maybe I want to spin off a version of
this, create another copy of it, use this
| | 01:45 | file as the basis for some other project;
those would all be things that I would
| | 01:50 | do with the Save As command.
| | 01:51 | So we'll go ahead and choose that from the
Application menu > Save As, and then project.
| | 01:56 | This one does not have a Windows
shortcut, so we'll always choose that from
| | 01:59 | the Application menu.
| | 02:00 | And let's talk about a few things here.
| | 02:02 | Naturally, I could come in here, and
I could just simply change the name.
| | 02:06 | So we are doing Save As.
| | 02:07 | We can call this OpenSaveAs.
| | 02:10 | So I've made that change, and I go
ahead and click Save on the file, and I now
| | 02:14 | have a second copy of this
file with the name of the first.
| | 02:18 | Now, let's take another
quick look in that dialog.
| | 02:22 | You may have noticed these files that
are showing up in your Revit folders that
| | 02:26 | have these numbers after them. What are these?
| | 02:29 | These are actually backup files.
| | 02:31 | So when you make a save copy, when you
were in Open and Save, and you actually
| | 02:35 | chose Ctrl+S, or chose the Save command,
it took the original version, and it
| | 02:39 | actually numbered it, and then it took
the version you were saving, and it went
| | 02:43 | ahead and saved over it.
| | 02:44 | So it's always keeping previous versions.
| | 02:46 | How many of those versions does it keep?
| | 02:47 | Well, that's something you can
decide right here in the Options button.
| | 02:51 | So when you're in the Save As dialog,
you can click on Options, and you can set
| | 02:56 | the maximum number of
backups that Revit will create.
| | 02:59 | Now, the default is 3, as you can
see here, and I can change that number
| | 03:02 | to anything I like.
| | 03:03 | You can't make it fewer than one, so
you have to have at least one backup -
| | 03:07 | that's required - but you could
certainly increase the number or decrease the
| | 03:10 | number if you so choose.
| | 03:12 | This is not a substitute for a real,
sort of bona fide backup strategy, and you
| | 03:16 | can talk to your IT support personnel
if you have such a person in your office,
| | 03:20 | for what the actual backup strategy is.
| | 03:22 | It's pretty common that every evening an
automated backup will run of the entire
| | 03:25 | network server and back up all project files.
| | 03:27 | But these are a good interim measure to
have, these little backup files, as you
| | 03:31 | save, so that every time you save,
you've got anywhere from one to three
| | 03:34 | versions that you can roll back to,
should some problem occur and you need to
| | 03:38 | look at previous versions.
| | 03:39 | So it's definitely a handy thing to have,
and while you can change the quantity
| | 03:43 | and make it fewer than 3, I think for
now I'd probably just leave it at 3 -
| | 03:46 | that's a pretty good number - and go
ahead and see how that works for you.
| | 03:50 | So that's opening, saving, and saving as,
and again, that's all for stand-alone
| | 03:55 | projects, those procedures.
| | 03:57 | So let's talk about the procedure if
you're in a work-share environment,
| | 04:01 | what does that mean?
| | 04:02 | Well, if you have more than one Revit
user working in an environment, and they
| | 04:06 | need to share the same file, it's not
possible for two users to open the same
| | 04:10 | file at the same time.
| | 04:12 | So the solution is to use
something called Worksharing in Revit.
| | 04:15 | This is a system where you'll have a
central file, a master file that will
| | 04:19 | live up on the network server - nobody
works in that file - but then when we
| | 04:23 | open from that central file, what
actually happens is Revit creates what we
| | 04:27 | call a local file for us.
| | 04:29 | So let me go ahead and
demonstrate that process for you.
| | 04:32 | Now, I should point out that it's very
difficult for me to actually provide an
| | 04:36 | exercise file for you to simulate this
process for real, because the central
| | 04:40 | file relies on your network server.
| | 04:42 | So what I've done here is I have
simulated the process here on my computer, and
| | 04:48 | I am just going to simply demonstrate it
for you, so there is no file for you to
| | 04:51 | actually follow along in.
| | 04:52 | So this next couple of minutes,
just think of this as concepts.
| | 04:55 | Now, where I would like to direct your
attention in this dialog, I have got this
| | 04:58 | folder here called Your Office Network
that I just sort of set up to simulate
| | 05:02 | something that you might see.
Just pretend that's a network server.
| | 05:05 | And I have selected this
file here called Workshare.
| | 05:08 | And where I'd like to direct your
attention is down at the bottom of the screen
| | 05:11 | in the Worksharing area.
| | 05:12 | There is this little check box
right here called Create New Local.
| | 05:15 | Now, that's a critical setting.
| | 05:17 | It's on by default when
you select a central file.
| | 05:20 | So a Workshare file is actually a central file.
| | 05:22 | We don't ever want to open
that directly and work in it.
| | 05:24 | What we want to do instead is create a
local file, which Revit will offer to do
| | 05:27 | for us automatically.
| | 05:29 | So make sure that check box is selected,
and then go ahead and click Open, and
| | 05:33 | Revit will then go through the process
of actually creating a local copy of that
| | 05:39 | network central file on your local hard drive.
| | 05:42 | And if I drop my Window down here and
show you the title bar, you can kind
| | 05:47 | of see what it did.
| | 05:48 | Instead of opening the file called
Workshare, what Revit has actually done is
| | 05:53 | it created a new file called Workshare_,
and it added my name, Paul Aubin, to the end.
| | 05:57 | This is my Revit username, and
Revit does this for me automatically.
| | 06:01 | It adds that on the end.
| | 06:02 | So each of your colleagues will also
create their own local file with their
| | 06:05 | usernames tacked on the end.
| | 06:07 | I can go ahead and work as normal in this
file, make whatever changes I need to make.
| | 06:11 | There is a lot of process and
procedures in there that might vary slightly when
| | 06:14 | you're in Worksharing, but let's
keep focused on opening and saving.
| | 06:18 | So the only thing different about
opening a Workshare file is to make sure that
| | 06:21 | little check box is chosen.
| | 06:23 | The next step is when it comes time to save,
we actually have two save commands now.
| | 06:28 | We can still do Save or
Ctrl+S, like we've always done.
| | 06:32 | That will actually save the local file.
| | 06:34 | But right next to it is now available an
icon called Synchronize and Modify Settings.
| | 06:40 | This command will actually launch a
dialog box, where I am synchronizing my
| | 06:45 | changes with the central file.
| | 06:46 | So Synchronize is a
little different than saving.
| | 06:48 | What it's actually doing is taking any
changes I've made to the model, pushing
| | 06:51 | those up to the central file, and then
taking any changes that my colleagues
| | 06:55 | have made and pulling them down from
the central file and updating my local.
| | 06:59 | So both of those happen simultaneously
when I click OK in this dialog, but it's
| | 07:03 | definitely as important for me to
synchronize to central on a fairly regular
| | 07:08 | basis as it is for me to save with the
Save command or the Ctrl+S my local file.
| | 07:12 | So you really need to do both;
| | 07:13 | save your local file and synchronize
with the central file on a regular basis.
| | 07:17 | Let me just point out one
or two more things here,
| | 07:19 | should you want to load a
Workshare file a little bit more quickly.
| | 07:27 | So I am going to close that Worksharing
file, and I am going to go back to Open,
| | 07:31 | and I am going to select it again.
| | 07:33 | This is a very simple file that I
have onscreen, but let's just pretend for
| | 07:36 | the sake of argument that it's a
large file, thousands of square feet, many
| | 07:39 | users working on it.
| | 07:41 | Sometimes those files can have a
tendency to load rather slowly.
| | 07:44 | So what your CAD or BIM Manager might
do is set up multiple work sets in that
| | 07:48 | file, and what you're able to do then
is use this little dropdown arrow here,
| | 07:52 | choose Specify, and then click Open,
and what this will do is it will present
| | 07:57 | you with the Opening Worksets dialog
before you actually open the file, and then
| | 08:01 | you can go in and select any Worksets
that you're not interested in seeing and
| | 08:04 | close them before you go ahead and click Open.
| | 08:08 | One last thing to point out here is I
have gotten this dialog now that says,
| | 08:11 | hey, there is already a local file
called Workshare_Paul Aubin. What do you
| | 08:16 | want to do about that?
| | 08:17 | I can either overwrite that existing
file, or I can actually add a timestamp to
| | 08:21 | the existing one and create a
new version, which I like to do.
| | 08:24 | It's kind of like giving me an extra backup.
| | 08:27 | So go ahead and choose the Timestamp
option. Yesterday's local file will get
| | 08:32 | this timestamp, and today's will get
the default name of Workshare_Paul Aubin,
| | 08:37 | like we saw a moment ago.
| | 08:39 | So the process for opening and
saving is similar, but slightly different,
| | 08:43 | depending on whether you are working in
a stand-alone or whether you are working
| | 08:46 | in a Worksharing environment.
| | 08:47 | Most of you, when you're working in an
office environment with multiple users
| | 08:50 | will be working in a Worksharing
environment, so please just make note of the
| | 08:54 | procedures I showed you.
| | 08:55 | But bear in mind that for the remainder
of the training series, we are going to
| | 08:58 | be working in stand-alone files,
because it's more conducive to the way that we
| | 09:02 | have to deliver data sets, and the
fact that we're working asynchronously and
| | 09:06 | separately in our environment
here in the training series.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding levels| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are
going to talk about Levels.
| | 00:02 | Levels are horizontal planes or
horizontal datums that run through the building,
| | 00:06 | and they actually represent the
true floor levels of your building.
| | 00:10 | What I usually like to tell people is
if you've got a button on the elevator,
| | 00:13 | then you need a level for it.
| | 00:14 | So start with that guideline for the
levels that you need in your project.
| | 00:18 | You will certainly add other levels
for other meaningful horizontal datum
| | 00:21 | points, like the roof, or the
bottom of the footing, and so on.
| | 00:24 | You want at the very minimum the
levels where people actually walk around.
| | 00:27 | Now, I am in the Floor Plan view.
| | 00:29 | I can't add or modify my levels in the
Floor Plan view, so what I have to do is
| | 00:33 | actually switch to a view like an Elevation.
| | 00:36 | So I am going to go over here to the
East Elevation, and you can see that we
| | 00:39 | have some starting levels that
are already here in the project.
| | 00:43 | So we are going to begin with these and
make some modifications and then add to them.
| | 00:47 | So the first thing I would like to do
is just kind of talk about the level
| | 00:50 | itself, and I am going to just click on this
Roof Level here at the top to show you this.
| | 00:53 | When I click on it, and select it,
you'll see a series of icons appear
| | 00:58 | attached to that level.
| | 01:00 | On both ends you are going to
see a small, little lock icon.
| | 01:03 | You are going to see this
small, little 3D indicator.
| | 01:06 | You are going to see this small, little
open circle, and again, if I pause over
| | 01:10 | any one of these, a little tooltip
does appear, giving you some indication of
| | 01:14 | what these controls will do.
| | 01:17 | On this end, I have Parameters that I
can edit, like the height of the level,
| | 01:20 | the name of the level.
| | 01:22 | There is a little squiggly control
hidden away between those two parameters, and
| | 01:27 | the tooltip there says, Add elbow.
| | 01:29 | That's how this level here has the
little jog in it, and actually it's still not
| | 01:34 | terribly legible with the 5 feet, so I
can actually further adjust it, like so.
| | 01:39 | But the way that that was done was I
just clicked on the little squiggly, and
| | 01:43 | that gave them the little elbow there;
| | 01:46 | they being whoever built this
template that we started with.
| | 01:49 | If you want to remove an elbow, you
just drag it back to horizontal, and it
| | 01:54 | kind of snaps back and removes the
little elbow grips that were previously
| | 01:59 | there, here and here.
| | 02:01 | If you want to rename a level, you just
click on the text and you type in something else.
| | 02:09 | When you do that, Revit will offer to
also rename for you any Floor Plan views
| | 02:14 | that correspond to this level.
| | 02:16 | So if I answer yes here and scroll
over here in my Project browser, you'll
| | 02:21 | notice that what used to be called Roof is now
called Low Roof to match the name of the Level.
| | 02:25 | You're not required to do that, but it's
something that Revit offers to do for you.
| | 02:30 | We can change the height of the level
by just simply clicking on the text here,
| | 02:33 | and if I type in a number,
it will actually move it.
| | 02:37 | I am going to keep it at 12' 8"
actually, so I am going to do undo that
| | 02:41 | with Ctrl+Z. What I want to do is
actually add in two new levels here, for the
| | 02:46 | starting point of my office building project.
| | 02:49 | So I am going to go to the Level
tool, which is on the Home tab.
| | 02:53 | So if you look on your Home tab and you
look all the way over to the right, you
| | 02:56 | should find the Level tool.
| | 02:57 | You'll notice also from the tooltip
that LL is the shortcut for Level, so you
| | 03:02 | can type LL, if you prefer,
to execute that command.
| | 03:06 | Now, notice how when I move my cursor
nearby the endpoints of the other levels,
| | 03:12 | Rivet kind of offers to snap them to it.
| | 03:14 | You get that little dashed line there.
| | 03:17 | When I click, it will sort of snap
right to it, and the same thing will happen
| | 03:21 | at the other end, right here, like so.
| | 03:25 | That's a pretty good idea to do on
both ends, because when you do that, these
| | 03:29 | little lock icons appear, like we had before,
and now they're all constrained to one another.
| | 03:34 | And the reason that that's important is
if you grab the little open circle that
| | 03:38 | I pointed out a few minutes ago, and
you drag it, it will actually drag all of
| | 03:43 | the locked levels together in unison.
| | 03:45 | So that keeps everything much neater and
cleaner, and usually a pretty good idea.
| | 03:50 | Now, if for whatever reason, you don't want
this level to move with the others, you
| | 03:55 | can unlock it and drag it, and it will
drag independently. But as I said, most
| | 03:59 | of the time, folks like to
keep them nice and lined up.
| | 04:02 | I am going to adjust the height of my
Level 2 to 10', and then I am going to
| | 04:08 | pan down. I'm holding in my wheel and
dragging to do that. Pan down slightly,
| | 04:13 | and I'll add another level up above.
| | 04:17 | I am going to adjust the height to 20
feet, and I am going to click on the name
| | 04:25 | and call this High Roof, and I
might want to spell that correctly.
| | 04:33 | In this project, we are going to
actually - I have two roofs, so Low Roof and a
| | 04:37 | High Roof, so we are going to go
ahead and make that change there.
| | 04:40 | So that's a little bit about
adding levels and working with levels.
| | 04:44 | Again, that's an early setup task
that you are going to want to do.
| | 04:47 | You are going to want a Level for
every floor level on your building or every
| | 04:50 | button on the elevator, if you want to
think of it that way, and this gets you
| | 04:53 | started with the basic framework upon
which all of your building geometry will
| | 04:57 | be referenced in your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding grids| 00:00 | Like levels, grids provide
organization and structure to your project.
| | 00:03 | They typically serve to locate the
structural columns in a project and provide
| | 00:07 | key reference points for
dimensions and views and other things.
| | 00:10 | Unlike levels, not all buildings need grids.
| | 00:13 | For example, most residential
buildings wouldn't have any need for grids,
| | 00:16 | because they don't typically have
structural columns, but most commercial
| | 00:20 | projects probably would
have a structural column grid.
| | 00:23 | So depending on the kind of project
you're creating, will determine whether or
| | 00:26 | not you need to add grids or not.
| | 00:28 | So the Grid tool can be found on the Home tab.
| | 00:31 | I'm here in a file called Grids,
in the Chapter03, Exercise Files.
| | 00:36 | It has some simple walls in it,
just to give us a frame of reference.
| | 00:39 | Walls are not required to lay out
grids, but they'll certainly make it
| | 00:44 | helpful in this exercise.
| | 00:45 | So here on the Home tab, we can find
the Grid tool over here on the Datum
| | 00:49 | panel to the right.
| | 00:50 | I'm going to go ahead and click that tool.
| | 00:53 | The first thing I'd like to point out
is that there are a few different shapes
| | 00:55 | in which you can draw grid lines.
| | 00:57 | The default is a straight line, but
it's actually possible to draw them as
| | 01:00 | curved lines as well.
| | 01:01 | Now, for the first one I'm
going to just start off to the side.
| | 01:04 | Click a point down toward the bottom of
the screen, and then click another point
| | 01:08 | up toward the top of the screen.
| | 01:09 | Now, I chose my points on purpose,
from low to high, because I know from
| | 01:14 | experience that the second point you
click when you're placing a grid is the one
| | 01:18 | that will default to having a bubble turned on.
| | 01:21 | Now, it is possible to actually
change that behavior after the fact.
| | 01:26 | One of the reasons that I drew this
grid off to the side was to kind of point
| | 01:29 | out some of the controls. Similar to
what we had in levels in the Levels movie,
| | 01:34 | we have the little open circles that we
can use to change the length of the level.
| | 01:39 | Talking about the bubbles, we
have these little check boxes.
| | 01:42 | Now, the little check boxes
actually appear in levels, as well.
| | 01:45 | So you can do the same trick there.
| | 01:47 | If we want a bubble to appear at the
bottom, we can simply check the box, and
| | 01:51 | it will show a bubble.
| | 01:52 | Likewise, if we want to hide a bubble
that we previously showed, we can check
| | 01:55 | the box, and it will hide the bubble.
| | 01:57 | So if you want them at both ends, you can
have them at both ends, or at either end.
| | 02:01 | However, if you can anticipate ahead
of time where you want the bubbles to
| | 02:05 | occur, and just remember that the first
point you click has no bubble, and the
| | 02:08 | second point has the bubble, then that's
usually a little bit faster and easier.
| | 02:12 | Now, like our levels, we
also have the little squiggly.
| | 02:16 | So if we need to, we can add a
little elbow on the grid lines, as well.
| | 02:21 | Now, I'm going to delete this one.
| | 02:23 | I'm deleting it on purpose, because I
want to show you a behavior that you
| | 02:26 | need to be aware of.
| | 02:27 | I'm going to add the next grid
line here in the building footprint.
| | 02:33 | Then I'm going to click my Modify
tool to cancel out of the command.
| | 02:36 | That's the easiest way to cancel out of a
command, but there is a shortcut for that.
| | 02:40 | You can press the Escape key two times
if you like, as an alternative, but that
| | 02:44 | basically resets you to
ground zero, no command active.
| | 02:47 | Now, let me just do a little zoom in
over here and point out that even though
| | 02:52 | we deleted the previous grid, Revit
remembers where the numbering left off, and
| | 02:57 | it automatically goes to grid number 2.
| | 03:00 | Now, that may or may not be
the behavior you're after.
| | 03:02 | So if it's not, it's very important
that you stop what you're doing, click on
| | 03:07 | the bubble, and edit that value before
you continue, because otherwise the next
| | 03:12 | one will be 3, and the next one will be
4, and then you'll have compounded the
| | 03:15 | problem and you'll have a
lot more renumbering to do.
| | 03:17 | If you catch it right away, and in
this case I want to use letters across the
| | 03:21 | top instead of numbers, then the next
one would be B and C and so forth, and it
| | 03:26 | will make my job a lot easier.
| | 03:27 | So just kind of keep that in mind.
| | 03:28 | So I'm going to go back to the Grid tool.
| | 03:30 | I will add a second one.
| | 03:34 | Watch for the dashed alignments, because
when you click on them, like levels before,
| | 03:41 | they will now drag as a unit.
| | 03:44 | So when you stretch the endpoints, it
doesn't matter which endpoint you stretch,
| | 03:49 | they will all stretch together.
| | 03:50 | So as long as you snap them to one
another, you'll get that behavior.
| | 03:53 | So I'm going to go ahead
and just add a couple more,
| | 03:56 | again, making sure they line up, like so.
| | 04:03 | Now, I want to add grids in the other direction.
| | 04:07 | This is again where I need to stop.
| | 04:09 | The default, remember, I can press
Escape two times, or I can click the Modify
| | 04:14 | tool; either one is going to cancel the command.
| | 04:17 | I'm going to click on the letter F.
I'm going to change that to a number 1,
| | 04:20 | because I now want numbers in this direction.
| | 04:23 | And then when I return to the Home
tab and click my Grid tool and begin
| | 04:27 | adding additional grids,
| | 04:29 | they will now number instead of letter.
| | 04:35 | So I've gone ahead and just added some
basic grids where I want them to occur,
| | 04:39 | but it's kind of sloppy.
| | 04:40 | I've kind of laid
everything out, just sort of by eye.
| | 04:44 | I want to get a little bit more precision.
| | 04:45 | The reason that I started this file
with some walls in there is to give me some
| | 04:49 | context, so that I could facilitate
that precision, and the way we're going to
| | 04:52 | do this is with something
called Temporary Dimensions.
| | 04:55 | So you may be noticing that when you
select items in Revit, that in addition to
| | 05:00 | all these little controls that we've
been talking about, like the open circles
| | 05:03 | and the check boxes, we're
also seeing a lot of numbers.
| | 05:05 | These are called Temporary Dimensions.
| | 05:07 | Now, let me go ahead and click this
first one that we added a little bit earlier.
| | 05:12 | I'm going to zoom in on this area right here.
| | 05:16 | You'll see these numbers
appear across the screen.
| | 05:19 | So we have two dimensions:
| | 05:20 | We have a dimension going to the wall
on the left and another one going to
| | 05:23 | the wall on the right.
| | 05:24 | They also have these little square grip points
on them that are called Move the Witness lines.
| | 05:30 | The way these works is if you click
on them, they actually toggle among the
| | 05:34 | available points on the wall.
| | 05:36 | So it will go from center of the wall,
to face of the wall, to opposite face,
| | 05:41 | and then back to center.
| | 05:42 | So each time I click it,
it will shift its position.
| | 05:45 | So the grid line needs to be 2"
off the inside face of the wall.
| | 05:49 | So I want to click the little square
until the witness line gives me the inside
| | 05:53 | face of the wall, and then
I click right on the number.
| | 05:58 | That makes the text of the number editable.
| | 06:01 | I can type in whatever value I want.
| | 06:04 | Now, in Revit Architecture,
feet is the default unit.
| | 06:08 | So if I just type 2 and press Enter,
Revit is going to see that as 2'.
| | 06:14 | So if I want 2", I need to type 2".
| | 06:18 | I have to use the key right next to
the Enter key with the Shift held down, the
| | 06:22 | little double apostrophe.
| | 06:23 | That's the inch symbol,
and that will give me 2".
| | 06:26 | So very important that you remember that.
| | 06:29 | Again, not a big deal.
| | 06:30 | If you do it by mistake, you can just
edit it again, but it can get frustrating
| | 06:35 | if you put in feet
instead of inches continually.
| | 06:38 | So try and get in the habit of
remembering to type inches when you want inches.
| | 06:43 | So I'll just do a couple of these
just to give you an idea of how this
| | 06:47 | works, and, like so.
| | 06:50 | Now, that's if you have a wall nearby.
| | 06:53 | Let me do one more referencing a
grid line off of another grid line.
| | 06:59 | So let me start by taking grid line C here.
| | 07:02 | I'm just going to kind of move it
first to the inside of this wall and then
| | 07:09 | click the witness line to make it go
to the inside face, so that I can make
| | 07:15 | that one 2" as well.
| | 07:17 | Once I have that positioned correctly, I
want to put grid line D at 31' 8" away
| | 07:24 | from grid line C. So I don't want to
measure it from the nearby wall, which
| | 07:29 | is what Revit is trying to do; I want to
actually measure it from the other grid line.
| | 07:34 | If you click on the little square
until it highlights and then start dragging
| | 07:38 | it, so I've still got my mouse pushed
in, I've still got it held down, then
| | 07:43 | highlight the nearby grid line and
let go, it actually moves it to the grid
| | 07:48 | line, and then I can type this
number right here and put in 31' 8".
| | 07:54 | Now, the way that you do feet and
inches is to put 31 and then a space and then
| | 08:01 | the number of inches, 8 in this case.
| | 08:03 | Revit will see that as 31 feet 8 inches.
| | 08:06 | The alternative is to do 31' 8". Both
work, but I like the space 8, because it's
| | 08:13 | a little bit less typing, and so
both of those methods will work.
| | 08:16 | So of course you could go around and
fine-tune the placement of the remaining
| | 08:19 | grid lines, like so.
| | 08:21 | So if you're working in a commercial
building, or any building that has a
| | 08:23 | structural column grid, we can use the
Grid tool on the Home tab to lay out the
| | 08:28 | grid lines wherever they need to be.
| | 08:30 | We can reference those grid lines off
existing geometry, like walls, or we can
| | 08:34 | reference them off one another.
| | 08:35 | We can use the Temporary Dimensions
to give us precision and the locations
| | 08:39 | of those grids.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding columns| 00:00 | Most buildings have columns,
in at least some locations.
| | 00:02 | Even many houses have a column or two in
the basement, or on the exterior portico.
| | 00:07 | Whether your project has one column or
hundreds, the process to add them is fairly simple.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we'll look at adding
columns to a project that has column grids,
| | 00:13 | and we'll also look at how we can
add columns freestanding without grids.
| | 00:16 | There are actually two
kinds of columns in Revit.
| | 00:19 | There is an Architectural
column and a Structural column.
| | 00:23 | The process to add them is fairly similar.
| | 00:26 | The use case for each is slightly different.
| | 00:29 | The Architectural columns are
typically intended for an architect to use for
| | 00:33 | placement purposes and/or to be used
more like a column wrap, or a finished
| | 00:37 | column material, where the Structural
columns are typically used for the actual
| | 00:42 | structural material
that's holding up the building.
| | 00:44 | So do you need to use both?
| | 00:46 | No, you can use one or the other, but
you certainly can use both together in the
| | 00:50 | same project, if you want to.
| | 00:51 | Both would be found here with the Column tool.
| | 00:55 | If you click the dropdown portion of
the button, you can see them both clearly
| | 00:59 | listed: Structural Column
and Architectural Column.
| | 01:01 | Now I'm going to start this
lesson with the Architectural column.
| | 01:05 | Again, these tend to be graphically more simple.
| | 01:08 | They don't tend to evoke
material or structural capabilities;
| | 01:13 | rather, they just mean to show that there is
a post here, or a column here, and so forth.
| | 01:18 | Now, if you want add a freestanding
column, it's as simple as just clicking.
| | 01:22 | A column can go anywhere that it likes to go.
| | 01:24 | Now I'm going to zoom in slightly here.
| | 01:27 | If an Architectural column happens to
intersect a wall, you're going to see that
| | 01:31 | the column will actually
merge into the wall material.
| | 01:35 | So that's actually a really handy feature.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to undo the placement
of those previous two columns.
| | 01:42 | Since we have a column grid here that
was actually created in the Grids lesson,
| | 01:47 | and I have fleshed it out a little bit
and added a few of the missing grids,
| | 01:50 | we're going to go ahead and place
these columns relative to those gridlines.
| | 01:54 | Now let's talk about some of the
options that appear before we actually place
| | 01:58 | the real columns here.
| | 01:59 | The first thing I'd like to talk about
is this is our first command where we're
| | 02:03 | seeing the Options bar in Revit.
| | 02:06 | So that's this slot of space that appears
here horizontally across the top of the screen.
| | 02:11 | There are a few settings here: Rotate
after placement, the Height of the column,
| | 02:15 | Room Bounding, and so on.
| | 02:16 | We'll talk about Room
Bounding in a much later movie.
| | 02:19 | Let's talk about Height right now.
| | 02:22 | What this is going to show us is all the
levels that are available in our project.
| | 02:26 | So we talked about levels in a
previous movie, and we did talk about the
| | 02:29 | importance of levels as our sort of
horizontal datums running through the project.
| | 02:34 | We're working on Level 1 right now,
as you can see in the Project browser,
| | 02:38 | the Level 1 floor plan.
| | 02:39 | The default behavior for an
Architectural column is for it to go up to Level 2.
| | 02:44 | You can see grayed out next to it that
that makes a 9-foot tall column, in this case.
| | 02:49 | That behavior is what I want to accept.
| | 02:50 | So I'm going to go ahead and choose
that, but notice that I could take these
| | 02:54 | columns and put them all the way up to either
the Low Roof or the High Roof, if I wanted to.
| | 02:58 | I could even make them Unconnected,
which would allow me to type in any
| | 03:02 | height that I like.
| | 03:03 | So I could make the columns 15 feet tall,
20 feet tall, whatever I need it to be.
| | 03:08 | So pay attention to that setting right there.
| | 03:11 | Over here on the Properties
palette, we can do a couple of things.
| | 03:14 | We can choose the size of
column we're interested in.
| | 03:17 | The template that we began this
project with includes three different sizes: a
| | 03:21 | 24" x 24" and 18" x 20" and 18" x 18".
| | 03:25 | I'm going to go with the 24" x 24".
| | 03:27 | And then this setting right here is a
pretty nice setting. Because we're going to
| | 03:31 | place the columns relative to column grids,
| | 03:34 | this setting will actually keep
them attached to the column grids.
| | 03:38 | I'm going to go ahead and place a few
and show you how that setting behaves.
| | 03:41 | Now notice when I put my mouse nearby
the gridlines, Revit will automatically
| | 03:45 | sense those and highlight them for me.
| | 03:48 | So all I have to do is click, and that
column is now attached to that grid intersection.
| | 03:54 | So it's a pretty quick process of just
sort of moving around the building and
| | 03:58 | snapping to those column grid
intersections to get these columns placed
| | 04:03 | precisely at those locations and
attaching them directly to those gridlines.
| | 04:08 | Now, once I've done that, to complete
the command, like any command, I can click
| | 04:13 | the Modify tool, or press Escape twice,
and let's go ahead and see what that
| | 04:17 | behavior that was on the
Properties palette is all about.
| | 04:20 | If I were to move this grid line,
notice how that's going to take all the
| | 04:24 | columns along with it.
| | 04:25 | So that Attachment option that we had
there, if that box is unchecked, the
| | 04:30 | columns would stay behind.
| | 04:31 | But with it checked, the column grid
actually has control over the position
| | 04:35 | of all the columns.
| | 04:36 | And that's a first indication of
sort of a constraint system in Revit.
| | 04:40 | We're going to see tons of examples of
this throughout the software, but that's
| | 04:44 | just our first example of that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Modeling BasicsAdding walls| 00:00 | Walls are perhaps the most basic
building component in any project.
| | 00:03 | Certainly, they will be one of the
first objects you'll need to master in
| | 00:05 | your learning of Revit.
| | 00:07 | Walls have many settings that you
can change while you're drawing them.
| | 00:09 | You can edit many of those
settings after you draw them.
| | 00:12 | So the Wall tool can be found on the
Home tab, and I am in a file just simply
| | 00:15 | called Adding Walls.
| | 00:17 | I'm going to go ahead and click the
default Wall tool at the top of the screen.
| | 00:21 | Now this will take me to the
Modify/Place Wall context tab.
| | 00:25 | The Modify half of the tab on
the left-hand side never changes.
| | 00:28 | That's always going to be the same
set of tools that are available to any
| | 00:32 | object that we create.
| | 00:33 | The Place Wall side has a little
Draw toolbox that is tinted in green.
| | 00:39 | It shows us the different
shapes of walls we can draw.
| | 00:41 | So the most basic shape is
to just simply draw lines.
| | 00:45 | I could press Escape out of there.
| | 00:46 | We could switch to rectangles.
| | 00:48 | We could switch to polygon shapes, in
which case we would have the option to
| | 00:55 | change the number of sides and
draw different shaped polygons.
| | 00:59 | We could even draw circular-shaped walls.
| | 01:01 | So of course, all of this I just
sort of doodled, and I am going to press
| | 01:04 | Escape twice, use my Crossing Window
Selection, which if you've forgotten what
| | 01:09 | that is, you go from the right and
you drag to the left, and that selects
| | 01:13 | everything it touches, and
I'll just delete all that.
| | 01:16 | Let's go ahead and click the Wall tool again.
| | 01:18 | So that first set of tools over there
in the Draw toolbox is what you're going
| | 01:22 | to do to determine what
shape you want the wall to be.
| | 01:24 | Now beneath that, in the Columns movie,
we looked at the Options bar, and you
| | 01:28 | can see here that the Wall tool also
makes use of the Options bar, and there are
| | 01:32 | quite a few settings here.
| | 01:33 | Like columns, one of the options is
the Height of the wall: How tall do we
| | 01:37 | want this wall to be?
| | 01:38 | Now walls default to Unconnected
typically, and the Unconnected Height just
| | 01:43 | arbitrarily defaults to 20 feet tall.
| | 01:46 | Now we could certainly change that
height to anything we wanted and continue to
| | 01:49 | draw unconnected walls, but often you're
going to want to actually associate the
| | 01:54 | height of your walls to
one of your project levels.
| | 01:58 | So in this case, I might go up to say Level 3.
| | 02:01 | If I was doing the exterior wall of
the building, I might want to go all the
| | 02:04 | way up to the roof. Now let me just remind you,
on the Project browser, we are already in Level 1.
| | 02:10 | So that's where the wall begins; the
bottom edge of the wall will be at Level 1.
| | 02:14 | What you're saying here is
where the top edge of the wall goes.
| | 02:17 | So, let me just go ahead and draw a simple wall,
| | 02:20 | click my Modify tool, and then open
up one of my Elevation views to show
| | 02:25 | you what we just did.
| | 02:26 | So the bottom edge of the wall is down
here at Level 1, and the top edge of the
| | 02:30 | wall is up here at the roof.
| | 02:32 | If you were to come back here and move
the Roof level, that will have an impact
| | 02:38 | on the height of the wall.
| | 02:39 | So that's why choosing that
height is kind of important setting.
| | 02:43 | I'm going to undo that, and I'm
going to return to my Level 1 Floor Plan.
| | 02:49 | I'll go ahead and delete this wall.
| | 02:51 | So let's look at a few more of these settings.
| | 02:52 | So there is the Height, right?
| | 02:54 | The next setting over is the Location Line.
| | 02:57 | Now there are actually a lot of
choices in here, and we're only going to talk
| | 03:00 | about a few of them right now.
| | 03:01 | Let's talk about the most basic
ones, Wall Centerline, Finish Face:
| | 03:05 | Exterior and Finish Face: Interior.
| | 03:07 | Now to do that, I'm going to
actually zoom in a little bit closer.
| | 03:10 | So let me zoom in, like so, make sure
I'm still drawing straight lines, and I'll
| | 03:16 | start with the Wall Centerlined.
| | 03:18 | It should be fairly obvious now that the
dashed line is right down the center of the wall.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to press Escape one time,
and I'm going to change this to Finish Face:
| | 03:28 | Exterior and start drawing again.
| | 03:30 | You'll now notice that the dashed line
is on the outside face of the wall, but
| | 03:35 | how do we really know
it's the outside face, right?
| | 03:38 | I mean this is just a generic wall.
| | 03:40 | If I press Escape and we look over here
on the Properties palette, we're going
| | 03:44 | to see that this is just a Generic 8 inch wall.
| | 03:47 | Any of the walls that say Generic are
simply just two line walls that we don't
| | 03:53 | really know what they're made of.
| | 03:54 | They're not made of anything in particular.
| | 03:56 | They're just representing a simple
wall, and you can use these in early
| | 04:00 | schematic design before you
know what the wall is made out of.
| | 04:04 | Maybe you're not sure if you're going to
use a brick wall yet, or if you're going
| | 04:06 | to use CMU, or if you're going to use
Exterior Insulation Finish System, or what
| | 04:10 | you're going to use; you don't know yet.
| | 04:11 | So you just choose a Generic wall at
roughly the right size and then later you
| | 04:15 | come back and swap in the correct wall.
| | 04:18 | Even though you don't know yet exactly
what material, you still probably have a
| | 04:24 | pretty good idea of where the
exterior side is and the interior side is.
| | 04:27 | So, for example, if I switch to
the Rectangle, now Finish Face:
| | 04:31 | Exterior is going to make a lot more
sense because if I start to draw with this
| | 04:36 | wall, you'll notice where my cursor is.
| | 04:39 | You see how it's actually on
the outside of the rectangle.
| | 04:42 | So now that makes sense that
that's actually the exterior face of the
| | 04:46 | building that I'm drawing.
| | 04:47 | Now what would you do if you
were dragging the rectangle?
| | 04:51 | Let me go this way with it.
| | 04:52 | Okay, still exterior, okay, what would I
do if the cursor was on the wrong side?
| | 04:57 | Well, while you're drawing the wall,
you can press the Spacebar on your
| | 05:01 | keyboard, and that will actually flip the
walls dynamically as you're drawing them.
| | 05:05 | So if we later swap this out for brick
wall, the brick would be on the inside
| | 05:09 | face of the building.
| | 05:10 | That wouldn't make a whole lot of sense, right?
| | 05:11 | So this is an example where if you
start drawing it, you notice that the
| | 05:14 | exterior face isn't where you need it to be,
| | 05:17 | you can tap your Spacebar, and it will
flip the wall around for you on-the-fly,
| | 05:22 | as you're drawing it.
| | 05:23 | Okay, so try and pay
attention to those things as you draw.
| | 05:26 | And that's how this is going to
correspond to the Location Line as you're working.
| | 05:30 | Again, if you don't know exactly what
it is when you start, it's not that big
| | 05:35 | of a deal because later you can select
the wall, and you can always come over
| | 05:38 | here to the Properties
palette and make that change later.
| | 05:41 | So none of these changes are permanent.
| | 05:43 | It's just that if you know this
information going in, you might as well set it
| | 05:47 | correctly to get started.
| | 05:48 | Let me just add a few more and vary a
couple of the settings, just so you can
| | 05:53 | start to get a sense of how you might use
some of these settings together with one another.
| | 05:57 | We're currently still set to Roof.
| | 05:58 | So Revit is going to remember the
previous setting of anything that you choose.
| | 06:03 | The only one that it resets,
actually, is the Draw toolbox.
| | 06:06 | So you notice how it set
me back to the Line tool.
| | 06:08 | So if you want to draw another rectangle,
you will need to go in and choose the
| | 06:12 | Rectangle button again, but all of
the other settings like Finish Face:
| | 06:15 | Exterior and Height going up to
Roof, those were all remembered.
| | 06:18 | I'm going to change this. We're still on Level 1.
| | 06:20 | So I'm going to change this up to Level 2.
| | 06:23 | So it's appropriate for the exterior
walls to go all the way to the roof, because
| | 06:27 | those are full height exterior walls,
but for the interior walls, you probably
| | 06:29 | want those to go floor to floor.
| | 06:31 | So I'll go ahead and set that to Level 2.
| | 06:33 | In general, I tend to prefer a
centerline justification or a centerline location
| | 06:38 | line for interior walls.
| | 06:40 | So I typically choose Wall Centerline for that.
| | 06:42 | Now let's talk about this box right here.
| | 06:43 | It's on by default, Chain.
| | 06:45 | What this means is if I go ahead and
start drawing interior walls, a Chain wall
| | 06:51 | means that it will automatically start
drawing the next wall where the first one left off.
| | 06:56 | So you see how I'm able to just keep
drawing in a sequence, or in a chain, of
| | 07:01 | walls, one after another.
| | 07:03 | And then the final two settings
over here are Offset and Radius.
| | 07:07 | So let's say that I wanted to draw a
wall inside here, but I want it to be a
| | 07:12 | certain distance off of this existing wall.
| | 07:14 | I can come in here and put in
a distance, like maybe 10 feet,
| | 07:17 | and then actually start clicking
points on the neighboring wall.
| | 07:21 | Now you might be saying, "Yeah, but Paul,
| | 07:23 | That wall is floating outside instead of inside."
| | 07:26 | That's where I would tap the Spacebar.
| | 07:28 | Just like that would actually flip
the wall itself, it'll also flip the
| | 07:32 | location relative to the
two points I'm clicking.
| | 07:35 | So remember that shortcut
there of tapping the Spacebar.
| | 07:38 | Anytime something is oriented improperly,
for what you want, you can on-the-fly
| | 07:42 | tap the Spacebar, and it usually
will flip it around or rotate it.
| | 07:45 | So I'm going to go ahead
and click my second point.
| | 07:47 | This new wall just drew at a 10
foot offset off of the first wall.
| | 07:52 | I'm going to click Modify.
| | 07:53 | Go back to my Wall tool.
| | 07:55 | Again, you'll notice that
that resets me to the Line tool.
| | 07:58 | It remembered the Height of Level 2.
| | 08:00 | It remembered the Wall Centerline, but
it did reset the Offset, so some of these
| | 08:04 | you just get used to which things
reset and which things don't. Let's turn on
| | 08:07 | Radius. You'll notice that
can't operate with Offset.
| | 08:11 | So it's one or the other.
| | 08:12 | You could either do Radius, or you do Offset.
| | 08:13 | And the way this one works is when I
draw a corner, instead of drawing a square
| | 08:18 | corner, it actually puts a
little radius on that corner.
| | 08:21 | So those are a few basics for you just to
get you warmed up in using the Wall tool.
| | 08:25 | We're not going to save
any of this stuff right now.
| | 08:27 | I mainly want you to just kind of
practice and get used to working with the Wall
| | 08:31 | tool and try some of those settings.
| | 08:33 | In the next couple of movies, we're
going to go ahead and go in a little more
| | 08:36 | precision and actually
start laying out a floor plan.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using snaps| 00:00 | In this movie, we're
going to talk about snapping.
| | 00:02 | There are a couple of different
ways that Revit allows us to snap.
| | 00:04 | What snap means is basically a
predefined level of precision that Revit can
| | 00:10 | automatically associate geometry to.
| | 00:12 | So we have a few different ways to snap.
| | 00:14 | We have linear snaps, where Revit will
automatically associate the length of
| | 00:18 | geometry to length increments that we designate.
| | 00:20 | We have angular snapping where it will
snap to increments along a compass angle,
| | 00:25 | you know so many degrees, and we have
object snapping where we can actually snap
| | 00:30 | to key geometric points on
existing objects with other objects.
| | 00:34 | So let's take a look at a few examples.
| | 00:36 | I'm working in the Adding Walls file, which you
may already have opened from a previous lesson.
| | 00:42 | If you have some geometry in your version
of the file, just go ahead and delete it.
| | 00:45 | We don't really need the temporary
walls that we did in the previous movie.
| | 00:48 | We just want to start with a clean file here.
| | 00:50 | Be careful not to delete
these Elevation markers.
| | 00:54 | Okay, so if you make a selection, just
make sure that if you are unsure, that
| | 01:00 | you click the Filter tool
and you select only Walls.
| | 01:04 | Okay, we want to make
sure that's all we're doing.
| | 01:07 | Okay, so let's take a look at snapping.
| | 01:09 | First thing we've got to do is look
at the Manage tab and the Snaps dialog.
| | 01:14 | So I'm going to click
that tool on the Manage tab.
| | 01:16 | Let me just show you what
we're going to be working with.
| | 01:20 | We'll start with Length
Dimension Snap Increments.
| | 01:22 | These are user definable settings.
| | 01:24 | They are project-wide.
| | 01:26 | The default behavior is to snap first
to a 4' increment, then to jump down to a
| | 01:31 | 6" increment, then finally 1" and 1/4".
| | 01:34 | Now it's easiest to explain what
that means by just showing you.
| | 01:37 | So, let's go ahead to the Home tab.
| | 01:39 | We're going to click the Wall tool.
| | 01:40 | For this example, it doesn't matter
what settings we use in the Wall tool.
| | 01:44 | So I'm just going to leave
all the defaults. It's a Line.
| | 01:46 | I don't care about the Height or the
Location Line or any of the other settings.
| | 01:50 | I'm just going to click any point
onscreen and start moving my mouse.
| | 01:54 | Now notice the dimension that appears.
| | 01:56 | More importantly, notice the increment
in which the dimension is snapping to.
| | 02:00 | You'll notice that it's
snapping in a 4' multiple.
| | 02:03 | So if I were to click my mouse
right now, I'm guaranteed that that wall
| | 02:07 | is exactly 36' long.
| | 02:09 | If I were to go in this other
direction, I'm guaranteed it's now 48' long.
| | 02:13 | So that is the snapping behavior in action.
| | 02:17 | It doesn't matter where we started
drawing the wall from, but relative to that
| | 02:20 | first point, the length of that wall is exact.
| | 02:23 | We can even do it along an angle here.
| | 02:24 | So notice that the angle is 25 degrees, but
the length of this wall is exactly 48'.
| | 02:30 | So I'm going to undo a couple
of those walls and start again.
| | 02:34 | I just did Ctrl+Z to do that undoing.
| | 02:36 | This time, I'm going to click my first point.
| | 02:40 | Before I click my second point, I'm
going to roll my wheel mouse in a little bit.
| | 02:45 | That will zoom me in a little bit closer.
| | 02:47 | Now you'll notice that the snap
increment has suddenly gotten finer.
| | 02:50 | We're now snapping to the nearest
6" as opposed to the nearest 4'.
| | 02:54 | So it's as precise as the other one.
| | 02:56 | It's just using a more intricate
increment than it was a moment ago.
| | 03:00 | If I roll my wheel in further still
and then begin to move my mouse again,
| | 03:07 | you'll see that at some level of zoom, it
will begin snapping now to the 1" increment.
| | 03:12 | So now I'm getting 5" inches and 3".
| | 03:16 | It's no longer just every 6".
| | 03:17 | So again, 2'7", that's an exact number.
| | 03:20 | I can count on that number being
as accurate as I need it to be.
| | 03:24 | It's just within a 1" tolerance.
| | 03:26 | Then finally, if I zoom in further
still - and I might need to get a little
| | 03:33 | closer to my endpoint here.
There it goes, right there -
| | 03:36 | you can see that now we're
snapping to the nearest 1/4".
| | 03:40 | So this is a really handy
feature that we have built-in to Revit.
| | 03:43 | It's with us all the time.
| | 03:45 | Now I'm doing it in the context of
walls, but if we were drawing lines, or if
| | 03:48 | we were sketching floors, or whatever other
tool we were using, that method would still work.
| | 03:53 | Now I'm going to type ZF, which
is the shortcut for Zoom to Fit.
| | 03:56 | That's going to back me out.
| | 03:57 | I'm going to delete those objects.
| | 03:59 | Let's say that I wanted a different increment.
| | 04:02 | Perhaps I don't want to go
from 4' all the way to 6".
| | 04:05 | Maybe I want to go 2" in between that.
| | 04:07 | All I have to do is come in here and
type in 2" and separate it by a semicolon.
| | 04:13 | When I click OK, Revit will now jump
from 4' increments to 2' increments.
| | 04:21 | Actually, I got to be back out here.
| | 04:23 | There's 4' increments. Zoom in.
| | 04:27 | There is my 2', okay.
| | 04:30 | Then if I keep zooming in, I'm at 6",
and then 1", and so forth, and so on.
| | 04:34 | So you can customize the increment
that's being used to suit your needs.
| | 04:39 | You can do that on-the-fly.
| | 04:40 | I mean, it's not a one time thing.
| | 04:42 | Anytime you need to change the
increment, you can come in here and change it.
| | 04:45 | Now the same applies for angles.
| | 04:47 | You can see that there the increment goes from 90
degrees to 45 to 15, all the way down to 1.
| | 04:52 | So the same behavior applies there.
| | 04:54 | Then here is Object Snaps.
| | 04:55 | So I want to just talk about this a little bit.
| | 04:57 | If you've used other CAD software, this
concept is familiar to you, but if you
| | 05:00 | totally new to computer-aided design
software, then this concept would be new.
| | 05:04 | What this allows you to do is actually snap
geometry to key geometric points on other geometry.
| | 05:10 | So in the case of where I have a wall
here, that wall has an endpoint at this
| | 05:17 | end, an endpoint at this
end, and a midpoint right here.
| | 05:20 | If I were coming in and drawing
another wall, Revit will either snap to the
| | 05:24 | endpoint, and it will indicate that by
a little square ,or the other endpoint
| | 05:27 | over here, or the midpoint, which it
will indicate by a little triangle.
| | 05:31 | Now in both cases, a tooltip usually
appears onscreen to indicate that.
| | 05:35 | We can always override the behavior
we're getting by using a keyboard shortcut.
| | 05:40 | So in the dialog that we were just in,
all the keyboard shortcuts were listed,
| | 05:44 | and the one for midpoint, for
example, was SM, for snap to midpoint.
| | 05:48 | So if I type the letters SM, you'll
notice that it will ignore all the other
| | 05:52 | potential snaps, and wherever my mouse is
along the wall, it will be looking for midpoints.
| | 05:57 | Then when I click, it will snap to the midpoint.
| | 05:59 | As soon as you click, it
goes back to the default.
| | 06:02 | So I do highly encourage you to open
up the Snap dialog and pay attention to
| | 06:08 | each of these hotkeys and memorize
them, I guess, if you will, so that they
| | 06:12 | become easy for you to use.
| | 06:14 | So in summary, there are a few
different ways that we can snap to things
| | 06:19 | in Revit. This behavior works across the program.
| | 06:22 | I've demonstrated it here in the
context of walls, but it can be used for any
| | 06:26 | kind of geometry. But you have your
length snaps, which snap to certain length
| | 06:31 | increments depending on your zoom
level, your angular snaps, and your object
| | 06:35 | snaps, which snap to key
geometric points along the geometry.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding wall properties and wall types| 00:00 | Some of the behaviors that we witness
when placing objects like walls and other
| | 00:03 | elements in Revit are driven
by their instance properties;
| | 00:06 | in other words, the property applies
to each and every instance you place.
| | 00:09 | Other properties are determined by
the Type properties of the objects.
| | 00:13 | Types are collections of settings
that are shared in common by an entire
| | 00:16 | group of like objects,
| | 00:17 | in this case in a group of walls.
| | 00:19 | If you change a Type parameter, that
change will apply to all instances of that
| | 00:24 | wall throughout the project.
| | 00:25 | So if you change an Instance parameter, it only
applies to the actual object you have selected.
| | 00:30 | So in this movie here, I'm going to
look at both some Type and some Instance
| | 00:33 | properties with respect to walls.
| | 00:36 | I've got a simple data-set up onscreen
in order to illustrate these points.
| | 00:40 | The file is called Wall Properties,
and you can find it in Chapter04/Exercise
| | 00:43 | Files, and I'm in a view
right now called Location Lines.
| | 00:46 | The Location Lines, which we talked
about in the Adding Walls movie, there we
| | 00:50 | looked at Finish Face Exterior and
Finish Face Interior, and we also looked
| | 00:54 | at Wall Centerline.
| | 00:55 | And when we talked about that property,
that was actually an Instance property.
| | 00:58 | So what that means is each wall
could have its own Location Line setting.
| | 01:04 | Now, before I go ahead and start
changing any Location Line settings, or any
| | 01:07 | other settings, I just want to kind
of finish discussing all of the various
| | 01:11 | options that we have for Location Lines.
| | 01:12 | So if I select this wall, and I
look here at the choices under Location
| | 01:16 | Line, there are actually six options, and so
I've got them all illustrated here onscreen.
| | 01:21 | Finish Face Exterior, we already talked about.
| | 01:23 | That's the outermost face of
the exterior Side of the wall.
| | 01:26 | Finish Face Interior, the outermost
face of the interior Side of the wall.
| | 01:29 | Now, to illustrate that, I've got a
more complex wall here that has a CMU
| | 01:33 | backup, that's the structural core of the wall.
| | 01:35 | It's got an Exterior face that includes
rigid insulation and air gap and brick,
| | 01:40 | and it's got an interior face that
includes furring, with a layer of drywall.
| | 01:44 | So it becomes a little more clear which side
is the interior, which side is the exterior.
| | 01:48 | Now, the Wall Centerline is just
simply the geometric center between the
| | 01:51 | two faces of the wall.
| | 01:52 | Now, these other three points:
| | 01:54 | Core Face Exterior, Core Face
Interior, and Core Centerline, are all with
| | 02:00 | respect to just the core of the wall,
the structural part of the wall, the part
| | 02:04 | of the wall that's actually holding up the wall.
| | 02:06 | So you can use any one of those six Location
Lines when you draw your walls in your projects.
| | 02:11 | Now, when you apply a Location Line,
that's an Instance-based property.
| | 02:16 | So I'm going to switch over here to
a view called Wall Types, and here we
| | 02:20 | just have a simple floor plan view, which
is a very simple diagram of just four walls.
| | 02:25 | What we are going to notice right away
is there's a slight problem with the way
| | 02:29 | these walls are laid out.
| | 02:31 | So let's look at two Instance
properties, with respect to these walls.
| | 02:34 | Now, when I select any one of these four
walls, they all have Wall Centerline as
| | 02:39 | their Location Line.
| | 02:41 | I can change that Location Line of any
of the walls to be any of the settings
| | 02:46 | that I want, and each one of
the settings can be different.
| | 02:50 | So as you can see, I can go through here,
and I can make all of those four walls
| | 02:55 | four different settings.
| | 02:56 | So that's an Instance-based parameter.
| | 02:58 | It only affects the wall in question.
| | 03:00 | Now, another example of an Instance
base parameter is flipping the wall.
| | 03:04 | In this case, you can see that the
brick is all on the inside, and the drywall's
| | 03:07 | are all on the outside, and
that's just totally wrong.
| | 03:09 | So if you click on a wall, you'll see
this little flip grip, and we can click on
| | 03:14 | that, and that actually flips the wall.
| | 03:16 | Now, notice the effect that had.
It actually flips around the two little round
| | 03:22 | handles here, which indicate
where the Location Line is.
| | 03:25 | So as I flip each wall, you'll see that
it will flip very differently depending
| | 03:29 | on where I put that Location Line.
| | 03:32 | So the two behaviors work in unison
with one another, and it's important that
| | 03:36 | you understand that.
| | 03:37 | So that can be one of the indicators, or
one of the considerations that you have,
| | 03:43 | for where to place your Location Line.
| | 03:45 | So those are Instance-based parameters,
and you want to keep those in mind when
| | 03:47 | you're placing walls.
| | 03:48 | What about Type parameters?
| | 03:50 | Well, let's look at the
most basic Type parameters.
| | 03:52 | Let's compare these two walls.
| | 03:54 | This wall looks different from this wall.
| | 03:56 | What makes them look different?
| | 03:58 | Well, this wall is one type.
| | 03:59 | It's called Basic Wall:
| | 04:01 | Exterior - Brick on CMU, and
this is another type, Generic-12".
| | 04:05 | It's very easy to change one to
another by just simply choosing here off the
| | 04:09 | Properties palette and
picking another type of wall.
| | 04:12 | I can choose anything that I have off
the list, and it will actually change the
| | 04:16 | wall dramatically, and in some
cases even show many more components.
| | 04:21 | So if we make a change to
that wall type, what will happen?
| | 04:25 | Well, in this case I have four
walls that all share the same type.
| | 04:29 | If I make a change to even one of
them, that change will be impacted and
| | 04:33 | reflected on all four walls.
| | 04:35 | So let's take a look.
| | 04:36 | The way you get to the Type properties
is to click the Edit Type button over
| | 04:40 | here on the Properties palette.
| | 04:41 | So you can select any one of the four walls.
| | 04:43 | You do not have to select all four.
| | 04:45 | You click Edit Type, you'll get this
dialog that comes up, and any change you
| | 04:49 | make here is going to apply
to all four walls, in this case.
| | 04:53 | So I could make them, from Exterior walls,
I could change them to Interior walls.
| | 04:57 | I could change the Coarse Scale Fill
Pattern, or I could even edit the structures.
| | 05:01 | So let's do something pretty dramatic.
| | 05:02 | Let's go ahead and edit the structure, and I
am going to remove several of the components.
| | 05:06 | Before I do though, let's
talk about this briefly.
| | 05:09 | I have already outlined what the
components of the wall were, and you can now
| | 05:12 | see that, here in this dialog, this
is how you would actually modify and
| | 05:16 | change those settings.
| | 05:17 | So the Core Boundary is in gray.
| | 05:20 | Anything within that Core Boundary
is considered the core of the wall.
| | 05:23 | In this case, that's the
structural component, and it's CMU 7 5/8".
| | 05:27 | On the exterior side of the wall,
indicated right here, at the very top of
| | 05:31 | the window, we have a Membrane layer, we have
our Insulation, our Air Gap, and our Brick.
| | 05:36 | And then on the interior side of
the wall at the bottom, we have our
| | 05:39 | Metal-Furring and our Gypsum Wall.
| | 05:41 | What would happen if we went in here
and we decided we didn't want any kind of
| | 05:45 | furring on the inside?
| | 05:46 | So if I just simply delete those two
components and click OK, what you are going
| | 05:51 | to notice is when I click OK, that
that change applies across the board to all
| | 05:55 | four walls, and not only the four that
I have selected, but if I were to create
| | 06:00 | a new wall with that same type, it
would not have any furring, as well.
| | 06:08 | So that's a good example of a Type-based
parameter that applies across the board.
| | 06:11 | Let's look at one more.
| | 06:12 | If I Edit this Type, we have this
really interesting setting here called
| | 06:16 | Coarse Scale Fill Pattern.
| | 06:18 | So what this allows me to do is to edit
any fill pattern that I want, apply any
| | 06:23 | kind of fill pattern.
| | 06:24 | So I could put crosshatching, or a solid
fill even, and then I can change the color.
| | 06:30 | Let's do a nice, bright blue, and we'll click OK.
| | 06:34 | When I click OK out of here, it will
look as though nothing has happened.
| | 06:37 | Well, that setting only applies when
Coarse Scale is assigned to the view.
| | 06:42 | What does that mean?
| | 06:43 | Down here at the bottom of the view,
we actually have three levels of detail
| | 06:46 | that can be applied to
any view in a Revit project.
| | 06:49 | We are currently looking at Medium detail,
and that's why we're seeing the brick
| | 06:53 | and the block and the drywall and so forth.
| | 06:55 | If I change this to Coarse, it's
going to change the view to only show the
| | 06:58 | outline of the wall, and it will now
display that bright blue in fill color.
| | 07:03 | Again, you can see that that applies across
the entire project to all walls of that type.
| | 07:09 | So that gives you a little bit of a
sense of what the difference is between
| | 07:13 | Instance-based parameters
and Type-based parameters.
| | 07:15 | You are going to manipulate both of
these regularly in your Revit projects.
| | 07:19 | It's a pretty good idea to
understand the power and the flexibility of
| | 07:22 | both types of settings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locating walls| 00:00 | In this, and the next few lessons, we'll
continue working with walls, with more of
| | 00:04 | a focus on the layout of
an actual building space.
| | 00:06 | Using various wall techniques
and options, we'll lay out a simple
| | 00:09 | two-bedroom condominium unit.
| | 00:10 | In this movie, we'll focus on
sketching out basic wall locations and then
| | 00:14 | adjusting those locations with accuracy.
| | 00:15 | So to get started, I have a
really simple file here onscreen.
| | 00:19 | This is called Locating Walls.
| | 00:21 | So there is also a PDF illustration in
the folder that shows the completed floor
| | 00:25 | plan layout that you can use as a
reference for working as we are going along.
| | 00:29 | Let's start with the Wall tool on the Home tab.
| | 00:32 | Now, this time we want to actually
choose a more specific type of wall.
| | 00:36 | So for the interior partitions of this
space, we are going to use a wall type
| | 00:40 | called Interior 4 7/8" Partition.
| | 00:44 | Now, we're choosing that off the
Properties palette from the dropdown at the
| | 00:47 | top, and the dropdown at the top is
actually referred to as the Type selector.
| | 00:50 | So just for future reference, when I refer to
the Type selector, that's what I'm talking about.
| | 00:54 | We are going to go ahead and
click Interior 4 7/8" Partition.
| | 00:59 | We are going to leave the Location
Line set to Wall Centerline, and the Basic
| | 01:03 | Constraint of course is Level 1,
because we are working on that level.
| | 01:06 | In this case, we want to make sure that
the Top Constraint is going up to Level
| | 01:11 | 2, so we just want it to
be a one storey tall wall.
| | 01:14 | And then we are going to come over
here in the File, and we are going to
| | 01:17 | keep this fairly simple.
| | 01:19 | If you move your mouse around onscreen,
it will pre-highlight existing walls,
| | 01:23 | and in this case it pre-highlighted the
centerline of the existing wall, and it
| | 01:27 | will give you a little temporary dimension.
| | 01:28 | So you can get it close.
| | 01:30 | I mean the size of this dining room is
supposed to be about 8' 1", but don't try
| | 01:35 | to be super-precise yet.
| | 01:37 | That's really not the point of the exercise.
| | 01:39 | What we actually want to do is just
get it close, and then we just kind of
| | 01:44 | eyeball our two locations.
| | 01:46 | Now, again, that may seem
a little strange, eyeball.
| | 01:49 | I mean I thought we were using
precision computer software here, and we are
| | 01:52 | supposed to be very accurate.
| | 01:53 | Well, we are going to be very accurate,
but we're going to do it in the Revit way.
| | 01:57 | What I mean by that is we generally come
in here and we just lay out the overall
| | 02:03 | layout that we are after.
| | 02:05 | You can see that I can do this
fairly quickly, if I'm not being overly
| | 02:09 | concerned about precision.
| | 02:13 | I've just laid out this entire half of the
Floor Plan by just doing a few simple clicks.
| | 02:20 | Now, I am going to click the Modify
tool, or press Escape twice, to reset and
| | 02:25 | to cancel out of the command.
| | 02:26 | And then I'm going to go in and
select the walls that I have drawn, and I'm
| | 02:30 | going to use the temporary
dimensions to move them with accuracy.
| | 02:34 | So the "Revit" way of laying out
geometry is you typically lay it out
| | 02:39 | generically first, and then you
come back and you modify it using the
| | 02:42 | temporary dimensions.
| | 02:44 | Now, we saw an example of this with
grids in the Grids movie, but let's go
| | 02:47 | ahead and repeat it now.
| | 02:48 | If you don't know the center to center
distance that you want those two walls to
| | 02:53 | be, and it will be a little difficult
to calculate at this point, given the 7/8
| | 02:56 | of an inch, because that would make
the math a little more challenging.
| | 02:59 | Really, it would be easier if we
had the face-to-face dimension.
| | 03:03 | Well, remember that we can click the
small little grips, and each time you click
| | 03:08 | it, it will toggle from face
to center to face of the wall.
| | 03:12 | So I can do that on both sides, and
that will give me a dimension across here,
| | 03:17 | from this face to this face.
| | 03:20 | I want to point something out here.
| | 03:21 | If you've used any version of Revit
before and you clicked away right now from
| | 03:26 | the wall, it would forget that
you had made that modification.
| | 03:29 | But here in 2011, if I select the wall,
you'll see that it remembers that I've
| | 03:34 | moved those witness lines to the inside faces.
| | 03:36 | So that's definitely a
welcome change in this release.
| | 03:39 | I am going to go ahead here and click on
that dimension, and I am going to type in 8' 1".
| | 03:43 | Now, remember, if you want both feet
and inches, simply type the feet followed
| | 03:49 | by a space, and then the inches,
and I am going to press Enter.
| | 03:52 | Notice that the wall will move to the
new location, and it's now exactly at the
| | 03:57 | precise dimension that I need it to be.
| | 03:59 | Now, this wall, I need a face-
to-face dimension of 10 feet.
| | 04:03 | So again, I could repeat the same
process and get the dimension to the inside
| | 04:08 | faces, click on here, and then here
I just simply need to type 10, and it
| | 04:12 | will move that wall.
| | 04:13 | Now, very important: Always
select the item that you want to move.
| | 04:18 | A lot of people make this next mistake.
| | 04:21 | They now look at the walk in closet
over here in this location and they say,
| | 04:25 | well, this wall is not the
right location. I want to move it.
| | 04:29 | So they come over here to this dimension,
and they begin typing in the number.
| | 04:33 | The problem with doing that is notice
how that moves the previous wall again.
| | 04:37 | So the wall that's selected is the
wall that's going to move, and that can be
| | 04:41 | very frustrating until you get the hang of it.
| | 04:44 | So remember: You need to select the
item first, then edit the dimensions.
| | 04:48 | So if I select this wall and I edit the
witness lines and then click the number,
| | 04:54 | it will move the wall.
| | 04:55 | Now, as easy as that is to do, you're
probably feeling like it's getting a
| | 04:59 | little tedious to do all
this clicking of witness lines.
| | 05:02 | So let me actually speed that up a
little bit for you by talking about Temporary
| | 05:06 | Dimensions and Temporary Dimensions settings.
| | 05:08 | So let's go over to the Manage tab,
and on the Additional Settings dropdown
| | 05:13 | button, we are going to go all the way
down to the bottom here and choose the
| | 05:17 | Temporary Dimensions dialog.
| | 05:19 | The Temporary Dimensions dialog will appear,
and it has a variety of settings in here.
| | 05:23 | To actually illustrate what each of
these does, I have another file that I have
| | 05:27 | open in the background.
| | 05:28 | So what I am going to do is cancel out
of here temporarily, and I want to show
| | 05:31 | you how you can switch between open files.
| | 05:33 | So if you have more than one file open,
this little icon here on the QAT, or the
| | 05:37 | Quick Access Toolbar, will be available.
| | 05:39 | If you click on it, it will show you the
other open documents that you have onscreen.
| | 05:44 | I have another one called
Temporary Dimensions, which is in the
| | 05:47 | Chapter04/Exercise Files.
| | 05:48 | And here is an illustration that pretty
much shows all of the options that are
| | 05:52 | available in Temporary Dimensions.
| | 05:54 | So we can either set it to its default,
which is over here on the left, where
| | 05:58 | it goes to the centers of the walls, or we
can tell it to go to the faces of the walls.
| | 06:02 | We can also tell it to go to the face of
the core on the Interior or the face of
| | 06:06 | the core on the Exterior.
| | 06:07 | Now, when it comes to doors and
windows, we also have a setting there;
| | 06:11 | the default is this one over here,
where it goes to the centerline of the door.
| | 06:15 | On this side, we have my preferred
option, where it actually goes to the
| | 06:19 | opening of the door.
| | 06:20 | I find that I more often want to
click on my door and edit this value
| | 06:26 | to relocate the door.
| | 06:29 | Then I do, clicking over here, and knowing
what it is to the Centerline of the door.
| | 06:34 | So either method will work, but if you
want to actually place the dimensions of
| | 06:39 | the walls like we are doing in the
other file - so if I switch back over here -
| | 06:44 | really, the optimal settings for
Temporary Dimensions ought to be this: We are
| | 06:48 | going to go to the Faces of the walls,
and we are going to go to the Openings
| | 06:51 | of Doors and Windows.
| | 06:53 | When we choose that, it's going to make
it much easier now for us to be able to
| | 06:57 | select walls and come in here and
click and actually change the dimension to
| | 07:04 | the size that it ought to be.
| | 07:06 | So again, I can click on here.
| | 07:07 | You could see it already
goes to face-to-face now.
| | 07:10 | So now it's very easy for me to come
in here and type in the exact size that
| | 07:15 | that closet ought to be.
| | 07:17 | So this is going to move much more
quickly than what we were doing a moment ago,
| | 07:20 | because I don't have to stop and
edit the witness lines after each click.
| | 07:24 | So I highly recommend that you make
those changes to your Temporary Dimensions
| | 07:29 | settings, and you can see how much
more quickly your work will progress here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the modify tools| 00:00 | Continuing with the layout of our two-
bedroom condominium unit, in this movie
| | 00:03 | we'll look at many basic
modification tools like Move, Copy and Trim.
| | 00:07 | So, let's go ahead and take a look
at a few of these modification tools.
| | 00:10 | We're going to go to the Modify tab, and
many of the tools we're going to look at
| | 00:13 | are right here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:15 | If you need to move a wall, for
example, perhaps this wall is not in
| | 00:19 | the correct location,
| | 00:20 | we've already seen how we can do that
in the temporary dimensions, but that's
| | 00:24 | not the only way that we can do it.
| | 00:25 | We can click on the Move
tool, keyboard shortcut MV.
| | 00:29 | What is different about this approach
to doing it is it allows you to select a
| | 00:34 | base point for your move and then
move along and reference to a new point.
| | 00:39 | So, for example, if we know we wanted
to move exactly the distance along this
| | 00:43 | wall, we can use those reference
points to indicate how far we want to move,
| | 00:48 | rather than having to type in numbers.
| | 00:49 | So, I could click here at this endpoint,
and I could move along that wall to
| | 00:54 | this other endpoint and what you'll
notice there is Revit's pretty clever about
| | 00:58 | the way it makes such a move, because
it continues to cleanup the intersections
| | 01:02 | at both ends of the wall,
which is certainly very handy.
| | 01:05 | Now, if I want to move a specific amount,
I can also use the Move tool to do that.
| | 01:12 | So, I can click the Move tool, pick
any point, begin moving in the direction
| | 01:18 | that I'd like to move, and you can
move it in any direction, but in this case
| | 01:21 | I'm going to move back horizontally,
and then you'd simply type in the distance
| | 01:26 | that you would like to move, in this
case, I'm going to move 2 foot 8 inches
| | 01:29 | and you press Enter.
| | 01:31 | When you do that, the same thing will
occur. The object will move back, and in
| | 01:35 | the case of walls, it will clean itself up.
| | 01:37 | So, pretty straightforward, but the
two methods that you would use there is
| | 01:41 | either type in a number, or you
would use to reference points.
| | 01:44 | Now, you can copy in the same fashion.
| | 01:46 | It's almost an identical approach.
| | 01:48 | Copy tool is right next to Move, and in
this case, you select any old base point
| | 01:53 | and you move to a new location and you
pick and you'll, in this case instead of
| | 01:58 | moving the existing wall, it makes a
copy of it, and then we could take that
| | 02:01 | wall, and we could use its grips, and we
could start making modifications to it.
| | 02:06 | So, if you knew what the dimension
was of this wall to the next one over
| | 02:11 | here, that might be an approach you take.
You might copy at first and then just reorient it.
| | 02:16 | Now, another really handy
tool is the Trim/Extend tool.
| | 02:21 | So, were going to find that one
over here on the toolbox, as well.
| | 02:24 | Now, it's actually broken down into
three separate tools here in the toolbox.
| | 02:28 | We've got the Trim and Extend to a Corner,
| | 02:30 | we have got Trim and Extend to a Single
Element, and we have Trim and Extend
| | 02:34 | Multiple Elements and so, let's take a
look at each one of these, if we can, here.
| | 02:38 | So, Trim and Extend to a corner
basically allows you - in fact if I pause for a
| | 02:42 | minute here, you can see the
little movie running on the tooltip -
| | 02:46 | it allows you to select two
objects and join them up at a corner.
| | 02:50 | So, for example, in this location
right here, I need to create a little coat
| | 02:55 | closet, and actually the easiest way for
me to do that is to simply select this
| | 02:59 | wall and join it up with this wall,
and you'll see the little virtual dashed line
| | 03:04 | appear, as it extends out and
connects those two walls together.
| | 03:08 | We'll talk about the really sharp
corner there a little bit later.
| | 03:12 | Again, if we want to look at a similar
approach, perhaps we want this wall to
| | 03:18 | come up to the virtual location here.
| | 03:20 | Now if I were to just use Trim and
Extend to a Corner, I'm actually going to get
| | 03:24 | a real corner there.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to undo that.
| | 03:26 | If I want this wall to come up and stop
here without the other one extending, I
| | 03:30 | want to switch to one of
these other Trim and Extend tools.
| | 03:33 | So in this case, the first click is
which object do I want to extend to and in
| | 03:39 | the next case it's what do I want to extend?
| | 03:41 | Now, I should point out with this tool,
if I do it again this way, this tool can
| | 03:47 | be either a Trim or Extend.
| | 03:49 | So in that case, it was an Extend.
| | 03:51 | It made the wall longer.
| | 03:52 | But if I choose this as a boundary
edge and click here, it becomes more of a
| | 03:56 | Trim command, and it makes the wall shorter.
| | 03:59 | How does Revit know that you wanted the
condition I just had versus this condition?
| | 04:05 | Okay, well, it knows because when you
select, you pick the side of the wall
| | 04:10 | that you want to keep.
| | 04:11 | So if I select here and then here,
it will extend out to that location.
| | 04:16 | If I select here and click here, it's
going to keep the part on the right.
| | 04:21 | If I click here, it's going to
keep the part on the left, like so.
| | 04:25 | So, depending on how you select
your object, that's going to determine
| | 04:30 | which condition you get.
| | 04:32 | So pay attention to that when
you use the Trim/Extend tool.
| | 04:34 | Okay, let's look at one more
modification tool here in the Modify toolbox;
| | 04:39 | let's look at this one right here, called Offset.
| | 04:42 | It's another kind of a Copy tool.
| | 04:43 | It's going to allow us to create a copy
of one of our existing walls, but we're
| | 04:47 | going to be able to say what the
parallel copy distance is, like how far we want
| | 04:52 | this wall to copy next to itself.
| | 04:54 | So, I'm going to type in a dimension of
5 feet here, and then I'm able to come
| | 05:00 | over here and highlight an existing
wall, and I can thereby create the other
| | 05:05 | side of my corridor here by just simply
clicking on the first wall, and you'll
| | 05:10 | see that Revit will automatically copy
the neighboring wall next door to it.
| | 05:14 | I use my Trim and Extend to a Corner, and
let's do this again, very carefully here.
| | 05:19 | I'm going to pick this one as the first
one, but notice that I'll get something
| | 05:24 | different if I click here than if I click
here. I'm going to do it and then undo it.
| | 05:28 | So, I'm going to click here, and you'll
see how I get that, versus if I click here.
| | 05:33 | So you can see it's very different
depending on which location you pick on the
| | 05:37 | wall to get started with.
| | 05:38 | I'm going to go ahead and make
a few quick modifications here.
| | 05:43 | I'm going to use the temporary dimension
method to change the size of the living room.
| | 05:50 | Notice that Revit will keep all
the walls cleaned up if it's able to;
| | 05:54 | in this case it certainly was able to.
Then I'm going to go ahead and add a
| | 06:00 | small, little closet in here, and I can
fine-tune the dimensions of that later,
| | 06:05 | and another small utility room in this
location. And what I want to do now is I
| | 06:12 | actually don't want one continuous wall here;
| | 06:15 | what I want to do is get rid of
this piece of the wall right in here.
| | 06:19 | So, Revit has a tool for that, called Split.
| | 06:22 | So let's go to Modify, and we'll look
over here at the Split tool - keyboard
| | 06:26 | shortcut for that is SL.
| | 06:27 | So, I'm going to go ahead and click on
that, and I'm going to check this box
| | 06:31 | here in the Options bar.
| | 06:32 | This will Delete the Inner Segment.
| | 06:34 | If you forget to check that, you'll
end up with three separate walls there.
| | 06:38 | So you'll split it at this location,
and then you'll split it again at this
| | 06:42 | location, and you'll have a wall,
another wall and another wall, and you can
| | 06:45 | just come and delete the one in between.
But if you remember to click Delete
| | 06:48 | Inner Segment, Revit will do it for you.
| | 06:50 | So, I'm going to go ahead and select in
the center of that wall right there and
| | 06:57 | then come over here, and it's a
little difficult to see, but there's a tiny,
| | 07:01 | gray line right there.
| | 07:02 | I'm going to pause for a minute so that
you can look for it, but there's a tiny
| | 07:05 | gray line right there at my mouse
showing me where it's going to split, and you'll
| | 07:09 | see how it will delete the segment in between.
| | 07:12 | So, that's the Split tool, and that's a
couple of different modification tools.
| | 07:17 | So you're certainly going to want to
play with each one of the modification
| | 07:20 | tools in this toolbox.
| | 07:22 | You will use them not just for walls;
| | 07:23 | you use them for any number of cases
within your Revit environment, while
| | 07:27 | you're making modifications to geometry,
and they really are stable tools for
| | 07:31 | your modeling efforts.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding doors and windows| 00:00 | So once we have our basic layout of
walls completed, the next logical components
| | 00:03 | that we need to add are doors and windows.
| | 00:05 | Adding doors and windows in Revit is
nearly the same process, so we're going to
| | 00:09 | look at both of these object types together.
| | 00:10 | You find both of these tools on the Door tab;
| | 00:12 | The Door tool is here. The Window tool is
here, and we'll go ahead and start with Doors.
| | 00:16 | So I'm in a file called Adding Doors
and Windows in the Chapter04 of the
| | 00:19 | Exercise Files, and it
has a completed wall layout.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to go ahead and click the Door tool;
| | 00:23 | the shortcut for that is DR, if
you'd rather use the shortcut.
| | 00:26 | And like many of the other tools, the
Ribbon will change to show us a tinted
| | 00:30 | green context Ribbon, Modify/Place
Door. The Options bar will appear with
| | 00:34 | some options, and the Properties
palette will also appear to show us Door-
| | 00:37 | specific options as well.
| | 00:39 | Now, the first option I want to talk
about is the one here on the Properties
| | 00:42 | palette, which is already chosen
by default called Tag on Placement.
| | 00:46 | Now, the way this works is if I were to
just place the door anywhere, it's going
| | 00:49 | to give me that big pillbox tag there,
indicating that this is door number 1.
| | 00:53 | Now, I don't actually want the tags right now.
| | 00:55 | We're going to talk about tags in another movie.
| | 00:57 | So what I'm going to do is undo that, and
I'm just going to turn off that behavior.
| | 01:00 | Now, when I do, you'll notice that all
of the options in the Options bar gray
| | 01:04 | out, because they were all related to tags.
| | 01:06 | So when we tell Revit we don't want
tags, then it doesn't bother to give us
| | 01:10 | those options anymore.
| | 01:11 | Next, let's focus our
attention to the Properties palette.
| | 01:13 | Now, at the top of the Properties palette,
on the Type selector, we can see that
| | 01:17 | the family name that we have to choose
from here is called Single-Flush, and
| | 01:21 | beneath that family, we have
several variations called types.
| | 01:24 | So the family name is tinted here in
gray, Single-Flush, and then each of these
| | 01:28 | is considered a type.
| | 01:29 | Now, the types are named by default in
Revit based on the sizes of that object.
| | 01:34 | So in this case, this is a 36
inch wide door by 84 inches tall.
| | 01:38 | Now, I'm going to start with that one, and
I'll use that as the front door to the condo unit.
| | 01:43 | And if you look carefully at the
Temporary Dimensions as they appear onscreen,
| | 01:47 | you'll notice that Revit is trying
to find logical relationships for us.
| | 01:51 | So in this case, it's centering it on
the hallway, which is a pretty good idea,
| | 01:54 | so I'm just going to go
ahead and click for that.
| | 01:57 | And then I'm going to change my size to
30x84, and I'll place the next series of doors.
| | 02:03 | So I need one here in my utility room,
and notice the Temporary Dimension is
| | 02:08 | currently reading 1 foot.
| | 02:09 | That's a pretty good location.
| | 02:10 | So I'm going to go ahead and click there.
| | 02:12 | Then I'll go ahead and add one to this bedroom.
| | 02:14 | So because of the way we set the
Temporary Dimensions in the Adding Walls movie,
| | 02:17 | you can see that the dimensions are
measuring to the outside edges of the door,
| | 02:21 | which is very handy here to allow
us to set the jamb size of the door.
| | 02:24 | So in this case, we have a 4-inch jamb.
| | 02:27 | If I come over here in this bedroom,
we have a 6-inch jamb, and so on.
| | 02:30 | Now, when you're placing your doors,
you can control exactly the way they're
| | 02:35 | placed by simply subtly moving your mouse.
| | 02:38 | And you can see I can flip it from the
inside of the wall to the outside of the wall.
| | 02:41 | I can also change the way the door
swings, from left to right, or up to down,
| | 02:47 | depending on the orientation,
by tapping the Spacebar.
| | 02:50 | So again, if we use the Spacebar, like
we've seen in other movies, it changes
| | 02:54 | the orientation of the object we're placing.
| | 02:56 | So between those two techniques, you
can go in and place your doors exactly
| | 03:02 | where you need them to be and orient
them exactly the way they need to go.
| | 03:05 | So I'm going to go ahead and place all
my Single-Flush doors, and that's pretty
| | 03:09 | much all the Single-Flush doors I need.
| | 03:11 | And at this point, I need another
kind of door, I need some bifolds for the
| | 03:15 | closets, and I need a double door for the patio.
| | 03:18 | Unfortunately, I don't have either of those
kinds of doors currently loaded in my project.
| | 03:23 | So what I need to do next is to load a
new family, and we can do that right here
| | 03:29 | on the fly, while we'll working in the
Door command, by clicking the Load Family
| | 03:32 | button on the Ribbon.
| | 03:33 | So I'm going to go ahead and do that,
and this will launch the Imperial Library,
| | 03:38 | which was installed for me out-of-the-box.
| | 03:40 | This is the out-of-the-box Library
that comes with Revit, in the Imperial
| | 03:43 | installation, and it has
several different folders.
| | 03:46 | And I'm going to go ahead and go into
the Doors folder. What I'd like to do
| | 03:49 | is click the first door, and I'll
just kind of quickly arrow through.
| | 03:53 | Good idea to kind of do this, you can
watch the preview, and that gives you a
| | 03:56 | sense of what you have
available in your Library.
| | 03:58 | Now, I can load them one at a time by
clicking Open, or I can use Windows
| | 04:03 | techniques, like Shift and
Ctrl keys to select multiples.
| | 04:07 | So in this case, I want the
Bifold-2 panel, the Bifold-4 panel -
| | 04:11 | I'm holding down the Ctrl
key - and the Double-Glass door.
| | 04:14 | So I'm going to select those three, and
I'm going to click Open, and Revit will
| | 04:18 | load those three families into my project.
| | 04:21 | Now, once they're loaded, they'll
appear over here on the Properties palette,
| | 04:24 | and just like the Single-Flush door,
the family name will appear at the top,
| | 04:27 | followed by its types below that.
| | 04:29 | So for the Single Bifold Door, I need a
30x80, so I'm going to go ahead and place
| | 04:33 | one right here, and I'll place another
one right here, and again, we can change
| | 04:39 | the way it swings, and another one right here.
| | 04:42 | Now, notice, in this case, I kind
of got it a little bit off, right?
| | 04:46 | I did that on purpose, because I wanted
to remind you that Temporary Dimensions
| | 04:50 | are not limited to just wall layouts.
| | 04:52 | We can use them for any modification.
| | 04:55 | So I can come in here and input a
number and shift the location of that door
| | 04:59 | relative to its wall.
| | 05:00 | Furthermore, I accidentally swung the
door into the closet, instead of out, so I
| | 05:04 | have these little flip grips that I
can click on, after the fact, to change the
| | 05:08 | orientation of that door,
and that works on any door.
| | 05:10 | So you can always make such modifications later.
| | 05:13 | Let me go ahead and finish out the layout.
| | 05:15 | We'll add a Double Bifold Door right here,
and we'll add a Double-Glass Door right here.
| | 05:26 | The process of adding windows is
exactly the same as adding doors.
| | 05:29 | So all of the same techniques apply.
| | 05:31 | I'm going to click the Window tool.
| | 05:32 | Notice that it also has Tag on
Placement, notice it also has Load Family,
| | 05:37 | Options bar, Properties
palette, all of the same behaviors.
| | 05:40 | Now, the only family I have loaded
right now is a Fixed Window - pretty good
| | 05:44 | chance that we want to have some
sort of an operable window on our condo,
| | 05:47 | so I'm going to go ahead and click
Load Family, scroll down to the Windows
| | 05:50 | folder, and I'll do a Casement Double with Trim.
| | 05:52 | I'm going to go ahead and
Open that up, choose a size,
| | 05:56 | I'll do a 48x48, and begin
placing them in the condo.
| | 06:04 | And it's really that simple, and we
see that they cut holes in the walls and
| | 06:08 | work the same way as doors do.
| | 06:10 | As a finishing touch, let's go up here to
the QAT and click the Default 3D view icon.
| | 06:15 | It has been a while since we've
looked at 3D, so let's take a look now.
| | 06:18 | Remember that we can hold down the
Shift key and press the middle wheel
| | 06:22 | button, drag with the middle wheel
button, and we can orbit this thing around
| | 06:26 | and spin it around, and this will give
you a sense of how everything is faring
| | 06:30 | in your third dimension.
| | 06:31 | So you can notice that the sill heights
of the windows are correct, and the way
| | 06:34 | the doors cut through the walls, and so forth.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using constraints| 00:00 | So I'm here in the Constraints file
from the Chapter 4/Exercise Files, and
| | 00:03 | I'm going to add a little bit more
smarts to the position of some of the
| | 00:06 | objects in the model.
| | 00:08 | Let's start with this closet right over here.
| | 00:10 | So I'm going to zoom in on this area,
and you'll notice that that closet door is
| | 00:15 | not quite centered very well.
| | 00:17 | If the builder built it that way,
we'd all be a little bit upset, right?
| | 00:19 | So, I'm going to go to the
Annotate Tab, and I'm going to add a
| | 00:22 | Permanent Dimension.
| | 00:23 | Now so far, we've seen Temporary
Dimensions, but what a Permanent Dimension
| | 00:28 | is is a dimension that actually stays
onscreen even after we deselect all the objects.
| | 00:32 | So let me go ahead and add this one.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to use Tab Key to highlight
the inside face of the wall. Then I'm
| | 00:38 | going to move over here and highlight
the door, and you'll see how it will
| | 00:42 | actually find the center the door, and
then I'll click that, and then I'm going
| | 00:46 | to Tab again to find the inside face of
the wall, click one more time, and then
| | 00:51 | just pull the dimension out here somewhere,
and click one last time to place the dimension.
| | 00:56 | So you click on each of the items you
want a dimension, and then your final
| | 01:00 | click is where you want that dimension to go.
| | 01:02 | Now you can see, those dimensions are at
very strange fractional numbers, and so
| | 01:06 | we want to take care of that.
| | 01:07 | If I were to deselect everything, that
dimension stays onscreen, so this is why
| | 01:12 | we refer to this as a Permanent Dimension.
| | 01:14 | When I click on it, you'll see that
there is this little control over here, EQ
| | 01:18 | with a slash through it.
| | 01:19 | This is the Toggle Dimension Equality Setting.
| | 01:21 | And if I click that, it'll
actually change the dimension to an Equal
| | 01:25 | dimension, and it will move the door
to actually be centered between the two
| | 01:30 | walls that I started with.
| | 01:32 | Now what's really powerful about this
is it's not just a one-time modification.
| | 01:36 | This is an ongoing constraint that
Revit now has applied to that condition.
| | 01:42 | So if I were to come in here and
select this wall and move it, you'll notice
| | 01:46 | that the Equality dimension stays
applied, and the door adjust just stays
| | 01:52 | centered within the closet.
| | 01:53 | That's pretty handy.
| | 01:55 | So anytime we go in here and make a
change, it will keep that change live.
| | 01:59 | So let's look at another example.
| | 02:01 | Suppose I wanted to simply control
the position of this door off of the
| | 02:07 | position of this wall.
| | 02:08 | I can do the same basic process.
| | 02:11 | I'll Tab into the inside face of the wall.
| | 02:14 | This time, I'll highlight the face of
the door, rather than the center the door,
| | 02:19 | and I'm going to place the dimension over here.
| | 02:21 | So I'm only going to
place one dimension this time.
| | 02:23 | I'm not going to dimension multiple objects.
| | 02:25 | Now right below the dimension,
you'll see this little icon.
| | 02:29 | It looks like an open padlock, and if I
click that, it closes the padlock, and
| | 02:32 | I've now applied a lock
constraint to the door's position.
| | 02:37 | And the way that one works is if
this wall were to move, it will take the
| | 02:41 | door along for the ride.
| | 02:43 | I'm going to ahead and undo that
because I don't really want to actually make
| | 02:46 | that modification, but now we've
built that constraint into the model.
| | 02:49 | I'll type ZF here to zoom in my window to fit.
| | 02:52 | What's really handy about the
constraints is if you have a certain design
| | 02:56 | condition that you're trying to
maintain and you want to make sure that that
| | 02:59 | relationship gets maintained, you can
build that design intent into the model by
| | 03:03 | applying these constraints.
| | 03:05 | Now I would be remiss here if I didn't
caution you just a little bit: Don't go
| | 03:09 | crazy and add constraints
everywhere just because you can.
| | 03:12 | Just because you see a little lock
icon, doesn't mean you have to click it.
| | 03:16 | You want to reserve these
modifications for the places where they really have
| | 03:21 | meaning and value, and when they
really add something to your project.
| | 03:24 | I have one more example to show you,
and I'm going to do that in a file here
| | 03:28 | called Equality Toggle in
the Exercise Files folder.
| | 03:32 | So we did it here with a few doors.
Constraints work equally well on any kind of geometry.
| | 03:38 | So in this case, I have these four
offices over here on the side of the plan,
| | 03:42 | and they're all over the place,
the dimensions are all random.
| | 03:45 | So what I'm going to do is go to the
Annotate Tab one more time, click on my
| | 03:49 | Align dimension tool, and I'm going to
pick this wall, then this wall, then this
| | 03:55 | one, this one, and I will end up over here.
| | 03:57 | I'm going to pull the dimension out
here, and if you look at those numbers, you
| | 04:01 | can see that not a single one
of those numbers is the same.
| | 04:03 | Now, here is my EQ Toggle.
| | 04:05 | I'll just simply click on that
and watch the offices when I do.
| | 04:09 | You see how they all instantly snap to
equal sizes, and an extra little benefit
| | 04:14 | that you can do here is if you select
the dimension and right-click it, you can
| | 04:18 | actually toggle off the Display of EQ.
| | 04:21 | That's just the default.
| | 04:23 | Now that doesn't turn off the constraint.
| | 04:25 | So in this case, each office is a
little larger than 11 and five inches.
| | 04:29 | They are still equally spaced.
| | 04:32 | So again, if this wall were to move, it
will move all of the walls with it and
| | 04:37 | keep them equally spaced.
| | 04:39 | So once again, I'm going to undo that
change, but you can see the power of these
| | 04:44 | various constraints that we can toggle on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding plumbing fixtures and other components| 00:00 | It takes more than just walls, doors
and windows to create a building layout.
| | 00:03 | There are many other items visible on
the typical floor plan, such as plumbing
| | 00:06 | fixtures, appliances,
conveying systems and other equipment.
| | 00:10 | Most Component families are added to your
model in a similar fashion of doors and windows.
| | 00:13 | You simply click the Component tool and
choose the item that you want to place
| | 00:16 | wherever you need it to go.
| | 00:18 | So let's go ahead and take a look at
some of the items that we have available.
| | 00:22 | I'm in a file called Adding Components,
in the Exercise Folder for Chapter
| | 00:27 | 4, and I'm going to go to the Home Tab,
and I'm going to click on the Component tool.
| | 00:31 | Now unfortunately there's not a whole
lot of good components available to us in
| | 00:35 | the template we use to start this project.
| | 00:37 | We have a few desks, a couple of parking
spaces and a few trees - not exactly the
| | 00:42 | kind of items that I'm hoping to
add to my condominium floor plan.
| | 00:45 | So, I'm going to close out of that
Type selector, and I'm going to come over
| | 00:48 | here to Load family, just like we did
in the Doors and Windows movie, and see
| | 00:52 | what's available in the Library.
| | 00:54 | So why don't we work in the Utility room first?
| | 00:56 | So I'm going to come over here
and scroll down and look in the
| | 01:00 | Mechanical Equipment folder.
| | 01:01 | In the Mechanical Equipment folder, I'm
going to find a really simple furnace,
| | 01:05 | so I'm going to go ahead and load that one in.
| | 01:06 | And what happens is, like doors and
windows, Revit defaults to tagging almost
| | 01:12 | every kind of component that you add.
| | 01:14 | So it's telling me that there's no
tag loaded for Mechanical Equipment and
| | 01:17 | asking me, do I want to load one now?
| | 01:19 | I don't really want to tag any of my
equipment right now, so I'm going to go
| | 01:23 | ahead and just say no here, and that
will turn off the Tag on Placement feature,
| | 01:27 | just like we saw with
doors and windows previously.
| | 01:30 | Now I'm going to come in here, and
just like we saw before, if I tap the
| | 01:34 | Spacebar, I can rotate this furnace around.
| | 01:37 | Now, let me show you
another little tip with rotating.
| | 01:39 | If your mouse happens to be hovering
over something other than a 90-degree angle
| | 01:46 | like the open space I was in, and you
tap the Spacebar, it will actually match
| | 01:50 | the rotation of the item underneath your cursor.
| | 01:53 | And then, if you move away from that
and you tap again, it can still pick
| | 01:57 | that up if it's nearby or if I move somewhere
else, it will snap back to a default rotation.
| | 02:03 | So, I want this to be maybe oriented about
like this, and I'll just place it over here.
| | 02:08 | And as before, I can always fine-tune
the position with my Temporary Dimensions.
| | 02:13 | So that's the basic process.
| | 02:15 | You load in the family you want,
you choose any options, like the Tag on
| | 02:20 | Placement and the Type Selector, and
then you go ahead and place it in and
| | 02:22 | fine-tune placement.
| | 02:24 | So, let's load a few more.
| | 02:25 | So let's go in the Specialty Equipment
folder, and then we'll go in the Domestic
| | 02:28 | folder, and there is a variety of items in here.
| | 02:31 | We have our dryer, we have a washer, we
have a refrigerator, and we have a range.
| | 02:37 | So, let's go ahead and load in all of
these items, and then again we can simply
| | 02:41 | tap our Spacebar to rotate, place the
item where it needs to go, change to the
| | 02:47 | next item, tap our Spacebar,
place the item, and so on.
| | 02:59 | So let's load one more example.
| | 03:01 | I'm going to Load Family, and this
time I am going to look at the Plumbing
| | 03:04 | Fixtures folder, and we'll come down here,
and we'll find ourselves a toilet fixture.
| | 03:12 | Now again, it's going to ask me if I
want to load a tag for Toilet Fixtures, and
| | 03:15 | again, I don't want to tag my toilets.
| | 03:17 | So I'm going to go ahead and cancel that,
and say no there. Press my Spacebar.
| | 03:21 | And you may be noticing that Revit is
trying to be pretty smart about placement,
| | 03:25 | and even though this is not a hosted
element, and it doesn't require a Wall
| | 03:27 | Host, it will try and align itself to
the face of the wall wherever possible.
| | 03:32 | And it has the flip grips, if necessary.
| | 03:34 | So if you place it by mistake simply
some place you don't want it, you can
| | 03:38 | always flip it later.
| | 03:40 | Now this one here, you can see I'm having
a little trouble getting in on the face.
| | 03:43 | So I just simply zoom in, and that usually
allows me to highlight the face that I need.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to go ahead and press the
Escape twice to cancel out here, do a ZF
| | 03:52 | zoom to fit, and basically the
process would be more of the same.
| | 03:55 | We can add countertops, we can add
the refrigerator, and there are other
| | 03:58 | plumbing fixtures that we're going to
need, but in the next movie, we're going
| | 04:01 | to look at how to get some of those
other fixtures from libraries other than the
| | 04:06 | provided out-of-the-box library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Autodesk Seek| 00:00 | Revit Architecture ships with a fairly
substantial library of family content
| | 00:04 | that you can access quickly
and easily, as we've already seen.
| | 00:06 | However, even with this resource, you
will quickly find there are items lacking
| | 00:10 | from the out-of-the-box offerings.
| | 00:12 | You could of course build these items
yourself, but doing so would require
| | 00:15 | knowledge of the Family Editor and a
decent investment in time and effort.
| | 00:18 | Fortunately, alternatives do exist.
| | 00:20 | There are many web sites available
that offer Revit content for download, and
| | 00:23 | many such items are free of charge.
| | 00:25 | The most accessible choice is Autodesk
own Seek web site, available directly
| | 00:29 | from within the Revit software.
| | 00:31 | All we have to do is go to the Insert
tab and type in a search in the field, and
| | 00:35 | we are taken directly to Seek and
presented with the results of our query.
| | 00:37 | So, let's go ahead and give it a look.
| | 00:39 | Here, I am in a file called
Using Seek from the Exercise Files.
| | 00:43 | I am going to go over here to the Insert
tab, and if we look at our floor plan, we
| | 00:47 | are kind missing off a few plumbing fixtures.
| | 00:49 | So, let's go ahead and type in
bathtub, and press Enter, and that will
| | 00:54 | execute the search.
| | 00:55 | It will launch my web browser
and take me to Autodesk Seek.
| | 00:58 | Now, you'll see that there's two
main categories listed over here:
| | 01:01 | Generic and Manufacturer.
| | 01:03 | Autodesk Seek is actually designed
to be repository for all sorts of
| | 01:07 | manufacturer content.
| | 01:09 | So, what Autodesk is intending to do
is get various manufacturers on board
| | 01:12 | creating their items, the various items
they sell, and they want us to specify
| | 01:16 | as architects, and
making them available in Seek.
| | 01:19 | In this case, I am going to keep it
fairly generic, and I am just going to
| | 01:21 | go with the Generic library that's offered
by Autodesk, and that gives me eight choices.
| | 01:26 | When I scroll down, I am going
to stick with a pretty simple, boxy-
| | 01:30 | looking bathtub here;
| | 01:31 | I don't need anything terribly fancy.
| | 01:33 | Now, in some cases, like this one,
you'll be presented with several versions of
| | 01:37 | the same family in different file formats.
| | 01:39 | Well, we are in Revit 2011, so I
naturally want to choose the most recent one if
| | 01:43 | I can, and I am going to click the
Download Selected button right here.
| | 01:47 | Now, if you've never used Seek before,
if this is your first time, you'll
| | 01:51 | probably be going to be presented with
a screen that's going to ask you to
| | 01:54 | read the usage statement and agree to the terms.
| | 01:57 | So you should definitely do that the
first time, and then you can click Accept,
| | 02:00 | and then from then on, it will just
allow you to download, as I am doing here.
| | 02:04 | We have two choices:
| | 02:05 | We can Open it directly in
Revit, or we can Save the file.
| | 02:07 | I am going to go ahead and open it
directly in Revit, and that takes me into the
| | 02:10 | file, directly in the Family Editor.
| | 02:13 | Now, we have a whole chapter
coming up on the Family Editor later in
| | 02:16 | the training series.
| | 02:17 | So, we are not going to really talk
about any of the details of being in the
| | 02:19 | Family Editor right now.
| | 02:20 | The only command we need to know about
is this button right over here on the
| | 02:23 | menu, and we are going to click on that,
and that will load this family directly
| | 02:27 | into the project I have open onscreen.
| | 02:30 | Not only that, it will actually start
placing that component directly in my model.
| | 02:34 | But as you can see, it's a rather
smallish tub that I have in my cursor right now.
| | 02:38 | So, let's jump over here to the Type
Selector, open up the list and look
| | 02:42 | for another choice.
| | 02:43 | Our bathrooms are 5 feet wide, so a 60
inch choice will probably be a better option.
| | 02:50 | So, I'll choose the 60x32 and move into
this general location here, zoom in on
| | 02:57 | the toilet room, tap my Spacebar a
couple of times. And like other pieces of
| | 03:02 | content, this particular one will try
and snap itself to the nearby walls,
| | 03:06 | which is very handy.
| | 03:07 | Hold down my wheel, drag over here, place
another one in this restroom right here.
| | 03:13 | I'll go ahead and press the Escape
twice to get out of the command. ZF to zoom
| | 03:17 | to fit and basically more at the same,
if you want to search for vanity, if you
| | 03:21 | want to search for closet, pulls and shelves,
| | 03:23 | some of these items are available in
the out-of-the-box library and others you
| | 03:27 | could go out to seek for.
| | 03:29 | So, between the two, you ought to
be able to find everything you need.
| | 03:32 | Now, one last thing that I want to
look at before we close out of this file.
| | 03:36 | We are pretty much complete with our layout.
| | 03:38 | But a couple of movies ago I promised
you that we would deal with these very
| | 03:43 | sharp corners right over
here at the wall intersections.
| | 03:46 | It's actually a fairly easy thing to remedy.
| | 03:49 | Let's take a quick look.
| | 03:50 | I'll go over here to the Modify tab, and
on the Geometry panel, there is a button
| | 03:55 | here called Wall Joins.
| | 03:56 | Revit often has a few different
options of ways that it can join your walls.
| | 04:01 | In this case, it's doing a nice, sharp corner,
which may or may not be appropriate.
| | 04:05 | What you do is you get this little
square here and you just kind of move it over
| | 04:09 | the intersection that you want to adjust,
and click, and that will put you in the
| | 04:15 | Wall Join mode, and on the
Options bar, you'll have various options.
| | 04:19 | So, we can do a Butt condition or a
Miter condition, or we can square it off.
| | 04:23 | Now, you've get Next and Previous,
because in some cases there might be more
| | 04:28 | than one Butt option, or
more than one Miter option.
| | 04:30 | So, you can click Next, Next and
you see how it toggles between them.
| | 04:34 | Well, actually the Square off is what we
want in this case, and that will make a
| | 04:38 | nicer, more logical join at that condition.
| | 04:42 | Click over here, do the same thing,
and that will take care of that one.
| | 04:46 | Again, if you want to consider other options,
we could square it off that way or this way.
| | 04:51 | You can choose whichever one you prefer.
| | 04:53 | Then when you're done, you click the
Modify tool, or again press Escape twice, to
| | 04:57 | complete the operation,
Save the file and call it done.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Links, Imports, and GroupsWorking with DWG files| 00:00 | Revit Architecture is a robust
architectural design and documentation software package.
| | 00:05 | It requires no other software to function.
| | 00:07 | However, the building industry
utilizes many software packages and tools.
| | 00:11 | Fortunately, Revit can read and
write most of the popular file formats.
| | 00:15 | The most common file format that
you're likely to encounter is Autodesk's own
| | 00:19 | DWG file format, native to the AutoCAD program.
| | 00:23 | If you need to share files with other
architects and engineers, there is a
| | 00:26 | really good chance that somebody on the team
is going to be sending you data in DWG format.
| | 00:31 | So, fortunately, working with
these files in Revit is easy.
| | 00:35 | So, I'm here in a blank, empty file,
started with the default template. I am going
| | 00:39 | to click the LinkCAD
button here on the Insert tab.
| | 00:43 | Now, there actually are two
ways to bring CAD data in:
| | 00:45 | LinkCAD and ImportCAD.
| | 00:48 | We are really going to want to
choose LinkCAD if we are sharing data with
| | 00:52 | somebody else in the project team, and
we have any suspicion that that person is
| | 00:56 | going to send us an updated file
at some later date in the project.
| | 01:01 | When we do a Link, we'll later be able
to go into the Link dialog and actually
| | 01:07 | reload the file, should
there be a change to the file.
| | 01:10 | If you do Import, there is no link and
you would have to delete the file and
| | 01:14 | import it all over again.
| | 01:16 | So, Link is usually a little bit more
flexible when you're working with an
| | 01:19 | extended project team.
| | 01:20 | So, I am going to go
ahead and click that button.
| | 01:22 | I am going to browse out to the
Chapter05 folder, and there are a few AutoCAD
| | 01:26 | files provided in this folder.
| | 01:28 | I am going to select this
one here, called AutoCAD Floorplan.
| | 01:31 | There are a variety of settings down
at the bottom of the dialog, and I'd
| | 01:34 | like to kind of walk through a couple of them
here, and let's start with the Current view only.
| | 01:38 | If you uncheck this, the file will
show up everywhere throughout the model.
| | 01:42 | In other words, Revit will treat
that like any other model data, and it
| | 01:46 | will show in every view.
| | 01:48 | If you check the box, it will only show the
CAD file in the view to which you import it.
| | 01:55 | So, in my case if I kind of move this
out of the way and look in the background
| | 01:59 | here, we are currently in Level 1 floor plan.
| | 02:02 | So, this file that I'm importing with
this check box chosen, will only come in
| | 02:08 | to Level 1 floor plan.
| | 02:10 | Chances are if you're bringing in a
floor plan, it's because somebody on the
| | 02:13 | project team did some early design
work in AutoCAD. They won't familiar with
| | 02:18 | Revit, or they didn't want to use
Revit for whatever reason, or it was an old
| | 02:21 | file from years ago.
| | 02:24 | You probably don't want the first
floor plan to show and the second floor and
| | 02:27 | the third floor and the fourth floor.
| | 02:29 | So, checking this box is usually a pretty
good option when you're bringing in floor plans.
| | 02:33 | So, let's move over to some of
the other settings here: Colors.
| | 02:37 | AutoCAD is typically on a black background.
| | 02:40 | Revit, as we've seen throughout the training
series, is typically on a white background.
| | 02:44 | So the color choices that an AutoCAD
user typically relies on are often very
| | 02:50 | bright primary colors and don't
look so good on a white background.
| | 02:53 | So, we have an option here to invert
the colors, to make them a little easier
| | 02:57 | to read on a white background, or we can
even force the colors to black and white only.
| | 03:02 | Now, again depending on the kind of
data, I choose different things here.
| | 03:05 | I almost never choose Preserve.
| | 03:07 | I usually choose between
either Invert or Black and White.
| | 03:10 | If it's a plan, and I am planning to
trace over it, which is what I am going to
| | 03:14 | do in this exercise,
| | 03:15 | I am going to use Invert.
| | 03:16 | If it's detail, and adding it to the
file and I am going to just print it
| | 03:20 | right along with my set,
| | 03:21 | I am going to choose Black and White.
| | 03:23 | I'll have an example of that later.
| | 03:25 | Layers, All CAD files are organized into layers.
| | 03:28 | So, this just simply tells Revit which
layers you are interested in bringing in,
| | 03:32 | and you do have some choices where you
could bring in only the visible ones, or
| | 03:35 | you can load up a dialog and
specify which layers you want.
| | 03:38 | I am not sure which layers I want, so I am
going to bring them all in just to play it safe.
| | 03:43 | Positioning, there are lots of choices here.
| | 03:48 | The way that AutoCAD files are
situated in space and in the world environment
| | 03:54 | often means that the origin can be
hundreds of feet away or sometimes miles away
| | 04:00 | from where the action is
actually taking place in the drawing.
| | 04:03 | So, this doesn't always
mesh well in a Revit world.
| | 04:05 | So, you can try Origin to Origin and see if
things are going to line up the way you want.
| | 04:10 | But more often than not, you are going to
find yourself having to go to Center to
| | 04:13 | Center, just to kind of get it
onscreen and then move it around.
| | 04:17 | In a later movie in this training
series we'll talk about Shared Coordinates.
| | 04:21 | Manual options are probably not a
good choice for a floor plan, but when we
| | 04:26 | bring in the detail, those
might be better choices.
| | 04:28 | So, I am going to try Origin to
Origin, see what that gives me.
| | 04:32 | Sometimes, even when I choose that, Revit will
complain and say, ah, sorry! I can't do that.
| | 04:36 | I am going to give you Center to Center.
| | 04:37 | So, let's just see what we get.
| | 04:39 | I am going to go ahead here and
click Open, and there is the file.
| | 04:44 | Now, in this case, Origin to Origin
worked pretty well, because the file
| | 04:48 | was pretty compact.
| | 04:49 | If I go ahead and zoom a region right
around here, you can actually see that
| | 04:55 | this file is just another version of the
condo layout that we've been working on.
| | 05:01 | I brought it in color on purpose,
because, again, the scenario that I'm assuming
| | 05:06 | here is that a designer worked in
AutoCAD, because they weren't familiar with
| | 05:10 | Revit, so they did the quick layout in
AutoCAD, and they gave the file to me.
| | 05:13 | Now, my job is to "Revit-ise" this AutoCAD file.
| | 05:19 | So, the easiest way to do that is going
to be to trace over it with Revit tools.
| | 05:23 | Now, if I go to the Home tab and click
on the Wall tool, and for this example I
| | 05:28 | am going to stick with
just simple generic walls,
| | 05:32 | I'll just do a Generic-12" wall,
| | 05:35 | Revit does a really neat
thing when it comes to CAD files.
| | 05:39 | If we were to open that CAD file in
AutoCAD, we would find that those two blue
| | 05:44 | lines are just two parallel
lines; they are not walls at all.
| | 05:46 | AutoCAD doesn't have walls. It just has lines.
| | 05:49 | But here in Revit, Revit can actually
find the center between those two walls,
| | 05:54 | and I can snap directly to those points.
| | 05:58 | Now, the reason I like doing the
colors is because, as you can see, as I trace
| | 06:04 | over this, it starts to
cover up the CAD file underneath.
| | 06:09 | So, I kind of know where I've been,
and how much work I still need to do.
| | 06:13 | I am a little off right there, so I
probably should zoom in just a touch to get
| | 06:20 | a little bit more accurate.
| | 06:23 | But again, if I pay attention and I
get the center line, I am going to get a
| | 06:27 | much cleaner trace.
| | 06:29 | I am going to have a lot less rework to do.
| | 06:32 | Now, you can notice how I am kind of
being a little sloppy at the ends here.
| | 06:36 | If you recall the Modifying Walls
movie, we looked at tools like Trim and
| | 06:40 | Extend and so forth.
| | 06:42 | That's really going to be a much easier
way to kind of clean up things like this.
| | 06:46 | So, basically at that
point, it's more of the same.
| | 06:50 | So, I won't go through the whole
process of tracing over the whole plan.
| | 06:53 | But you can start to see what's
happening here as I begin to trace over the
| | 06:58 | colored walls, the color will slowly
disappear and the black-and-white Revit
| | 07:03 | stuff will stay on top.
| | 07:04 | Then at that point, when I'm done
tracing over the file, I can go to the Insert
| | 07:11 | tab again, click on the Manage Links
tools, and the AutoCAD file will show here
| | 07:17 | on the CAD Formats tab.
| | 07:19 | I can to simply unload the CAD file,
and that will leave me with just the Revit
| | 07:24 | geometry that's on top.
| | 07:25 | Later, if my designer gives me an
update, I can reload the CAD file, make
| | 07:29 | adjustments and then unload it again.
| | 07:31 | In a simple nutshell, that's basically
the process of bringing in a CAD file.
| | 07:36 | There is a variety of reasons
why you might want to do that.
| | 07:38 | I've painted a scenario here where you're
bringing in something from a designer
| | 07:41 | and you are tracing over it, but there are other
reasons why you might bring in CAD files, as well.
| | 07:46 | But the process remains essentially
the same, regardless of what the end goal is.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating topography from a DWG link| 00:00 | When you receive information from a
civil engineer, it will always be in
| | 00:03 | either DGN or DWG format.
| | 00:05 | There is no Revit civil package, so
these folks are always going to be working
| | 00:09 | in either AutoCAD or MicroStation.
| | 00:11 | Revit does, however, have some simple
topography tools, which are going to allow
| | 00:14 | us to build a terrain model based
on that CAD data that we bring in.
| | 00:19 | So let's look at the process.
| | 00:20 | Once again, I am in a blank, empty file
just created from the default template
| | 00:25 | for the purposes of this exercise.
| | 00:26 | I have provided a civil engineering
file that actually is shipped with, and
| | 00:31 | installed with, the default AutoCAD installation.
| | 00:34 | So this file actually comes from
Autodesk and is in the sample files with
| | 00:37 | AutoCAD, and I am just using it here as
an example to show you how we can bring
| | 00:41 | that file in and make topography from it.
| | 00:43 | So I am going to go to the Insert tab,
click on the LinkCAD, and I've got
| | 00:48 | this AutoCAD Siteplan file right here that
I've copied over from the AutoCAD application.
| | 00:53 | It was in the sample file, shipped with AutoCAD.
| | 00:56 | The most important setting that we want
to do differently here from the Import
| | 01:00 | Floorplan movie is we want to make sure
that we do not choose Current View only
| | 01:06 | when we are bringing in Siteplan data.
| | 01:08 | This is critical because when we uncheck
this box, we are basically telling Revit
| | 01:12 | to treat this imported CAD data
as three-dimensional geometry.
| | 01:16 | If we don't use it as three-
dimensional geometry, then the topography cannot
| | 01:21 | be generated from it.
| | 01:22 | So, we want to make sure
that that box is unchecked.
| | 01:26 | The rest of the settings are less important,
but we'll just run through them any way.
| | 01:29 | I am going to go ahead and invert the colors.
| | 01:31 | I am going to bring in all the
layers, auto-detect the units.
| | 01:33 | Now, here probably a pretty good idea
to go ahead and try the Origin to Origin
| | 01:38 | option and see what happens.
| | 01:40 | But 9 times out of 10 what's going to
happen is Siteplan data, civil engineers
| | 01:45 | are notorious for they've drawn the
contours here that you can see, and the
| | 01:49 | origin is 300 miles away at
some state benchmark marker.
| | 01:53 | So, Revit doesn't have an easy time
reconciling such large distances, especially
| | 01:59 | when they are miles away.
| | 02:00 | They have expanded this in
2011 to a 20-mile radius.
| | 02:04 | It used to be limited at 2 miles,
which was more limiting, so 20 miles is
| | 02:07 | better, but still,
sometimes it runs into problems.
| | 02:12 | So there is a pretty good chance we are
going to see some sort of an error about this.
| | 02:14 | Let me go ahead and click OK, and
the error looks something like that.
| | 02:20 | So, it's telling me that the object
was a large distance from the origin, and
| | 02:24 | so they chose Center to Center for me anyway,
even though I asked for Origin to Origin.
| | 02:28 | This is not the end of the world
because Revit has a feature called Shared
| | 02:33 | Coordinates, which we are
going to look at in a future movie.
| | 02:36 | Share Coordinates allows us to
reconcile the differences between two
| | 02:39 | different coordinate systems.
| | 02:40 | So at first, you might be concerned
about that and say, well, that was not very
| | 02:45 | good of it to arbitrarily move my file.
| | 02:47 | But it's pretty easy for us to
reconcile it back and get it coordinated.
| | 02:51 | So for now we are not going to concern
ourselves too much with that warning.
| | 02:54 | One last thing I want to say about the
warning is when you get a warning down
| | 02:59 | here in the bottom corner, that's what
Revit likes to refer to as a warning that
| | 03:04 | you can ignore, or believe it or not, if
you looked it up in the Help file, it's
| | 03:06 | actually called an Ignorable Warning, okay.
| | 03:09 | This means that I can to simply click
anywhere onscreen, and the warning will go
| | 03:12 | away, and it doesn't
require immediate attention, okay.
| | 03:15 | So some warnings will not be ignorable.
| | 03:19 | You'll have to click some sort of
button in the dialog box, and usually it's a
| | 03:23 | distasteful button like Cancel or Delete
Stuff, and we'll see those maybe later.
| | 03:29 | Anyhow, I'm looking at this file, and
the next thing that I want to do is I want
| | 03:34 | to kind of assess the file.
| | 03:35 | I want to figure out what I've got here.
| | 03:37 | So, I am going to go to an Elevation
view first and just kind of show you that
| | 03:41 | the engineer who built this file
actually created a series of contour lines set
| | 03:47 | at their explicit three-dimensional heights.
| | 03:49 | So each of those contour lines is set at
a certain Z height, and that's going to
| | 03:53 | be critical to our success in
creating a topo surface from this.
| | 03:57 | If everything is flat, we are
not going to get a topo surface.
| | 04:00 | We're just going to get a flat plane.
| | 04:01 | So we need this sort of three
-dimensional characteristic.
| | 04:05 | The next thing we need is we need to
know which layers in the CAD file are
| | 04:11 | actually contours, so that Revit doesn't
try to create contours from these plot
| | 04:16 | lines, or from these roads, or other
things in here which would just distort the
| | 04:20 | surface and cause a lot of problems.
| | 04:22 | We are only interested in the actual
lines that are really contour lines.
| | 04:26 | So if I kind of look in this area right
here, that's probably a pretty good place
| | 04:30 | for me to do this query.
| | 04:31 | So I am going to zoom in right here,
and what I want to know is what layer this
| | 04:36 | bluish color line is, and what
layer this darker purple line is?
| | 04:41 | I can do that by simply selecting the
CAD file, the whole thing will highlight, and
| | 04:46 | then over here on the
Ribbon, I have a Query button.
| | 04:49 | When I click on that, it allows me to
select the lines inside the CAD file, and
| | 04:55 | it will tell me the names of those layers.
| | 04:58 | So this one is called CF-DEP_INDX,
and this other one over here is called
| | 05:04 | CF-DEP_INT, which I assume is intermediate.
| | 05:07 | So we are going to take those two
layers, and we are going to generate
| | 05:11 | topography from just those two layers.
| | 05:15 | So we are going to go to
Massing & Site for that.
| | 05:17 | Click on the Toposurface button,
and we have a few options here.
| | 05:21 | Place Point is the default option.
| | 05:23 | In order to use Place Point, you would
literally have to specify the Elevation
| | 05:27 | and literally click point-by-point-by-
point, every single point you wanted to
| | 05:31 | create the surface from.
| | 05:32 | Very tedious process if you were doing a
site of this magnitude. Not recommended.
| | 05:37 | Instead, we are going to use the button
next to it, where it's going to allow us
| | 05:40 | to create from the Imported CAD file.
| | 05:43 | I am going to select the Import
Instance and when I do, it will give me a list
| | 05:48 | of all the layers in that CAD file.
| | 05:50 | I am going to click Check None, and
then I am going to select those two layers
| | 05:54 | that I just previously queried.
| | 05:56 | So that was why it was important for me
to do that query, so I know which layers
| | 05:59 | to choose, and then I am going to click OK.
| | 06:01 | What you are going to see is Revit will
go through and analyze all of those CAD
| | 06:07 | layers and generate points at the correct three-
dimensional locations for all of those contours.
| | 06:13 | So I think you'll agree that that's
going to happen much more quickly than you
| | 06:17 | and I could go in and
place those points manually.
| | 06:20 | So if we zoom out, you can see
there is a whole lot of points there.
| | 06:23 | So all I need to do is click Finish,
and let's go ahead and click the 3D tool
| | 06:29 | and a little tough to see.
| | 06:31 | So I am going to do two things.
I am going to take the CAD file, select it.
| | 06:36 | I can tell it's the CAD file because
it highlights with this big box around
| | 06:39 | it, and if I wait long enough, I'll get a
tooltip that tells me that's an AutoCAD file.
| | 06:43 | I am going to select it, and I am
going to hide that object, okay.
| | 06:49 | I want to just turn it
off and make it invisible.
| | 06:51 | In this case, I am going to do that
temporarily, and I can do that down here
| | 06:55 | on the View Control bar, with this little
Sunglass icon and just choose Hide Element.
| | 07:00 | That's going to make that CAD
file just go away, just temporarily.
| | 07:04 | We are just kind of hiding it.
| | 07:05 | And then the next thing I want to do is
click this little white cube over here,
| | 07:09 | which is different shading
modes. The default is Hidden Line.
| | 07:13 | We can do Shaded, Shaded with Edges.
| | 07:15 | Shaded with Edges usually gives a little
more contrast, so I am going to go ahead
| | 07:18 | and choose that, hold down my Shift key,
spin my mouse, and you can see that
| | 07:24 | there is a surface here, and it's a
little subtle, but it's actually picking up
| | 07:29 | the 3D contours that were in the CAD file.
| | 07:34 | So very easy to take a CAD file and
convert it into a 3D surface, and then we
| | 07:40 | can start actually placing
our building on the site.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding CAD inserts| 00:00 | While linking CAD data is a powerful way
to incorporate outside files into your
| | 00:05 | project, linking isn't always the best option.
| | 00:08 | For example, sometimes you might just
have a legacy detail from a standard office
| | 00:11 | library, or you might have a file
that you have no intention of updating
| | 00:15 | throughout the course of the project.
| | 00:16 | So you might choose to just embed
that file directly into your Revit project.
| | 00:20 | So let's go ahead and
look at the process for that.
| | 00:22 | In this case, I am going to do it in
the context of a standard CAD detail.
| | 00:25 | So the assumption is we have a
library of CAD details from legacy files,
| | 00:30 | and we are going to bring some of
those details over because we want to use
| | 00:32 | them in a Revit Project.
| | 00:33 | So I am looking at a project here called
Office Building in the Exercise Files for Chapter05.
| | 00:37 | And I want to add this AutoCAD Detail,
but I don't really have an appropriate
| | 00:42 | view in my Project browser to add it to
| | 00:46 | at the moment. I have my Schedules and
my Floor Plans and my Elevations, but I
| | 00:51 | don't have a detail view.
| | 00:52 | So what we can do is
actually go to the View tab.
| | 00:56 | And there is a special kind of view for
this purpose called the Drafting View.
| | 00:59 | And you use a Drafting View for
creating any kind of a disconnected detail view
| | 01:05 | that goes along with your project.
| | 01:06 | This is an unlinked view.
| | 01:08 | It's like a blank sheet of paper.
| | 01:10 | So I am going to call this AutoCAD Details.
| | 01:14 | And I am going to leave the
Scale at 1 1/2" = 1'.
| | 01:17 | You can change that anytime.
| | 01:19 | And what this will do is just
give me a blank sheet of paper.
| | 01:22 | Now where else you'll see this is if I
scroll down on the Project browser, we
| | 01:26 | now have a Drafting Views category.
| | 01:29 | And if I expand that, beneath that we
have our AutoCAD Details view name, and it
| | 01:33 | is in bold because I have that current.
| | 01:35 | So the next step is for me to go to Insert.
| | 01:37 | And we used LinkCAD in a
few of the previous movies.
| | 01:41 | This time, we are going to
use the Import CAD button.
| | 01:43 | And the difference is that when we do
link it actually maintains a link to the
| | 01:47 | file. If the file changes, we can update it.
| | 01:49 | Import will not maintain the link.
| | 01:50 | So if we need it to update the file, we
would have to delete the one we have
| | 01:54 | and re-import it in.
| | 01:55 | So I am going to select AutoCAD Detail,
when the dialog comes up. If you have
| | 02:00 | access to the Exercise Files,
it's in the Chapter05 folder.
| | 02:03 | And last time we brought in
files, when we were linking them,
| | 02:06 | we inverted the colors because we wanted
to trace over them and use that CAD data.
| | 02:10 | This time I'm actually going to print the
CAD data along with my Revit project,
| | 02:14 | so I am going to force all
the colors to black and white.
| | 02:17 | I am going to bring in all layers
and let it autodetect the units.
| | 02:20 | I don't really want to use Auto
Positioning for this, because it doesn't make a
| | 02:23 | whole lot of sense for detail.
| | 02:24 | I want to just place it myself on the
sheet of paper that I have here onscreen.
| | 02:28 | So the best way to do that is for me to
place it manually and to put my cursor
| | 02:31 | at the center of the detail.
| | 02:33 | So I am going to choose Manual Center.
| | 02:34 | And when I click Open, you'll see the
detail is now attached to my cursor, and I
| | 02:40 | can put it anywhere I want onscreen.
| | 02:42 | And I'm going to zoom in a little bit on it.
| | 02:45 | And what I want you to
see is it's pretty lifeless.
| | 02:48 | There's not a whole lot of
oomph to it. It's kind of flat.
| | 02:52 | And this is because of the
different way that AutoCAD and Revit
| | 02:57 | treats line weights.
| | 02:58 | In AutoCAD it's pretty common for
folks to use the color system to determine
| | 03:04 | what line weight is what.
| | 03:05 | And in Revit, it's done in a different way.
| | 03:07 | We actually have a
line weight property that we use.
| | 03:08 | Now AutoCAD actually has a
line weight property as well;
| | 03:11 | it's just that it's more
common to see the colors used.
| | 03:14 | So what I'm going to do is bring the
same detail in again, but before I do, I
| | 03:18 | am going to change a few settings and
show you the difference of how you can
| | 03:21 | actually import it and map the AutoCAD
line weight colors over to Revit line weights.
| | 03:27 | So to do that, here on the Import panel,
there is a small little icon right here.
| | 03:32 | And if you remember back in User
Interface movies, we talked about
| | 03:35 | Dialogue Launchers.
| | 03:36 | That's the technical name for this little icon.
| | 03:38 | This is a Dialogue Launcher.
| | 03:39 | So when I click it, it will launch a dialog.
| | 03:42 | And this dialog is called the
Import Line Weights dialogue.
| | 03:46 | And what it will do is it has this big
long list of the 255 colors that AutoCAD uses.
| | 03:53 | And you could manually go through here,
if you were familiar with the colors in
| | 03:57 | the AutoCAD file, and simply type in.
| | 03:59 | If your knew color eight was
supposed to be a pen weight 3, you could
| | 04:02 | type in pen weight 3.
| | 04:04 | Now that's a pretty long and tedious
process, so what we are going to do instead
| | 04:07 | is I've prepared a file that we can load in.
| | 04:09 | Now if you have an office standard
setup here, what I recommend you do first is
| | 04:15 | click Save As and give that a
name, like backup or something.
| | 04:19 | And then that way you can restore your
original settings when we're done, but
| | 04:22 | for now, I am going to click Load.
| | 04:23 | In the Chapter05 folder, I've
provided this file called Detail line weights.
| | 04:27 | Now these are just text files.
| | 04:29 | You could literally open them in
Windows Notepad and type them there.
| | 04:32 | So there is nothing fancy about this file.
| | 04:34 | I am going to go ahead and open it up,
and you'll see something happened over here.
| | 04:38 | And if I kind of scroll down, I
believe color 31 is a little different.
| | 04:42 | So yeah, there we go. Color 31 is a pen
weight 3 and then down toward the bottom
| | 04:47 | here there is a pen weight 6 right there.
| | 04:49 | So you can see it definitely made some changes.
| | 04:51 | So when I click OK - and let me
point out one more thing here.
| | 04:54 | Down at the bottom it says, Note:
| | 04:55 | these values only apply to
layers that are set by default.
| | 04:58 | So if your AutoCAD file actually
uses line weights, then Revit completely
| | 05:03 | ignores this dialog.
| | 05:04 | So this dialog only applies to those
legacy files that don't use the line weight
| | 05:08 | feature, that use colors instead,
and then it will look at these colors;
| | 05:12 | otherwise, it just uses the line
weight that's assigned in AutoCAD.
| | 05:14 | I think that's pretty logical, right?
| | 05:16 | Why would it bother to look at the
colors if there was already line weights there
| | 05:18 | for it to choose from?
| | 05:20 | I don't need to change any of the settings here.
| | 05:23 | I'll just it Open it up again, place
it over here, and if I zoom in, you can
| | 05:27 | see that it definitely
looks different this time.
| | 05:29 | We have a bold edge around the outline.
| | 05:32 | The flashing is a little bit more bold,
as is this head frame of the doors.
| | 05:37 | So quite a few things look a little different,
and has a little bit more of a punch to it.
| | 05:41 | So I can just simply select the old
version and delete it, and then I am good to go.
| | 05:45 | Let me just do some housekeeping here.
| | 05:47 | If you want to clean up and kind of get
back to the default, you can click the
| | 05:51 | Dialog Launcher again, Load,
| | 05:52 | and load this file that
I've provided called Reset.
| | 05:55 | That will set everything back to the
default values of one, just in case you
| | 05:58 | want to have everything back the way it was.
| | 06:00 | So this detail is now available for us to use.
| | 06:04 | We could print it, put it with our
set, and it would just be part of our
| | 06:07 | Revit project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using import tips| 00:01 | When working with CAD files, either
Inserts or at Links, there's a couple of key
| | 00:05 | things you want to keep in mind.
| | 00:06 | I have a file called Import Tips onscreen here.
| | 00:08 | And it has a Drafting View,
visible onscreen, called AutoCAD Details,
| | 00:14 | and a single AutoCAD Detail file, which came
originally from an AutoCAD file imported in.
| | 00:20 | This is not a link.
| | 00:21 | This is actually an AutoCAD insert.
| | 00:23 | Now when I select this AutoCAD
insert, it highlights as you would expect.
| | 00:28 | And we have a few tools over here on the
context Ribbon that I want to point out to you.
| | 00:33 | The first is Query, which we've
looked at in a previous movie,
| | 00:36 | but this is a tool where you can
reach into the CAD file and select
| | 00:41 | individual parts of it,
| | 00:42 | and that will indicate for you what
layer that particular item was on.
| | 00:46 | So in this case you could
see that that's A-Deti-Bold.
| | 00:50 | You can actually use these buttons over here
to either delete the layer or hide the layer.
| | 00:55 | So if I choose Hide, that
layer gets hidden in this view.
| | 00:58 | Now to get the layer back,
you would go to the View tab.
| | 01:01 | So you would go to Visibility/Graphics dialog,
| | 01:04 | click the Import Categories tab,
| | 01:06 | And you will see each of the CAD files
that you have imported or linked into
| | 01:11 | your project listed here, with
each of its layers listed beneath it.
| | 01:15 | So I can see that A-Deti-Bold has been
unchecked, and I can simply check it,
| | 01:20 | click OK, and that will
restore that part of the file.
| | 01:23 | If I want to permanently delete a layer -
so not turn if off, not hide it - I can
| | 01:29 | actually use the Delete layers button,
if I want to permanently delete a layer.
| | 01:33 | And I could select the same layer and click OK.
| | 01:36 | And the difference here is that layer
is now deleted permanently from the file.
| | 01:40 | So even if I went to Visibility/
Graphics, Import Categories you would now see
| | 01:46 | that A-Deti-Bold is no longer on the list.
| | 01:48 | It cannot be restored.
| | 01:49 | So make sure, before you delete a layer,
that that's in fact what you want to do.
| | 01:53 | I am going to go ahead and undo that.
| | 01:55 | Now sometimes it might be tempting when
you select the file you see this button
| | 01:58 | right here called Explode.
| | 02:00 | And if you read the explanation of that,
it tells you it disassembles this import
| | 02:04 | into its constituent pieces.
| | 02:06 | That might be tempting to do,
particularly if you want to just make a quick,
| | 02:08 | little modification and move something around.
| | 02:11 | Let me go ahead and choose Explode
here, and show you what would happen.
| | 02:15 | You can see that these
are now individual lines.
| | 02:18 | These are individual pieces of text.
| | 02:20 | And you know, again, it might be tempting
because I could say, oh, well, now I can click
| | 02:23 | in here, and I can edit that text,
| | 02:24 | or I can select this
line and do something to it.
| | 02:27 | In general we really discourage
CAD files from being exploded.
| | 02:31 | It's not considered best practice.
| | 02:33 | What this tends to do it is
balloon the size of your Revit project
| | 02:37 | quite substantially.
| | 02:38 | It may not be so bad with one small
detail like this, but if this practice is
| | 02:42 | used quite a bit, it can actually prove
to be quite a detriment to the overall
| | 02:45 | performance of your Revit file.
| | 02:47 | Furthermore, what you're going to end
up with is a bunch of extra symbols and
| | 02:52 | styles and other things that get
created from the CAD file that you may or may
| | 02:57 | not want in your file.
| | 02:57 | For example, if I select this line and
I open up the list, all of my previous
| | 03:02 | AutoCAD layers have now been turned
into Line Styles in my Revit file.
| | 03:07 | Now that may seem logical, but that
also might be distracting to folks doing
| | 03:11 | other work in Revit.
| | 03:12 | Furthermore, if I click the Manage tab and
I go take a look at the Materials dialog,
| | 03:17 | you are going to find some things that
suddenly start appearing in your file
| | 03:19 | that you may not expect at all,
like these Render Materials down here.
| | 03:24 | Now these are not really useful materials.
| | 03:26 | They simply took all of your CAD layers
and looked at the color of those layers
| | 03:30 | and created a Render
Material for each of those colors.
| | 03:33 | So again, not a very useful thing that
it did there, so what I generally like to
| | 03:37 | refer to that as is when you Explode a
detail, it basically pollutes your Revit
| | 03:41 | file with all sorts of extra stuff
that you really don't want to have there.
| | 03:45 | It is possible to delete and purge
those things out, but it's much better
| | 03:49 | practice to just not have
them there in the first place.
| | 03:51 | So if you're tempted to explode an
AutoCAD file in a Revit project, my
| | 03:55 | recommendation would be: bring it into a
temporary Revit project first, explode
| | 03:59 | it there and then copy and paste only
over the geometry that you actually need,
| | 04:03 | rather than exploding it in your main project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a group| 00:00 | Sometimes as you work on your projects,
you will develop a part of your design
| | 00:04 | that can be reused elsewhere in the project.
| | 00:05 | You could, of course, simply use copy and
paste for such items, but often a better
| | 00:09 | choice is to make a Group.
| | 00:10 | A group gives you a way
to manage repetitive items.
| | 00:12 | You make a selection of any objects in
your project, you group them, and then
| | 00:16 | anytime, if you edit one instance of
the group, the change applies to all
| | 00:20 | instances of the group throughout the project.
| | 00:22 | You can use this for common stair
towers, common furniture groupings, or even
| | 00:26 | entire room layouts, like
the one I have here onscreen.
| | 00:29 | So I have a version of the
condo plan here onscreen.
| | 00:33 | If you did the lessons in Chapter 4,
then you're familiar with this layout.
| | 00:38 | I've taken it a little further than what
we did back in those previous chapters.
| | 00:41 | I have added some annotation
to it and a few other items.
| | 00:45 | All the items you see here that we
haven't talked about yet, we'll talk about in
| | 00:47 | future lessons. For now, we are
just going to focus on the grouping.
| | 00:51 | This file is called adding groups,
and it's in the Chapter 5 folder.
| | 00:54 | To create a group is very simple.
You just make a window selection around the
| | 01:00 | entire area that you wish to group.
| | 01:02 | In this case I kept it pretty simple.
| | 01:04 | We can just select everything.
| | 01:06 | So we just drag a window across the whole file.
| | 01:09 | And up on the Ribbon, it will say Multi-Select.
| | 01:12 | And this is because we have multiple
objects selected, so it can't tell us about
| | 01:16 | any particular type of object.
| | 01:18 | If you wanted to exclude anything from
the selection, you could go to Filter,
| | 01:23 | and all the items that we
have selected here are listed.
| | 01:26 | In this case, I am going to
leave everything selected.
| | 01:28 | And I am going to click
on the Create Group button.
| | 01:31 | Now the shortcut for that is GP,
if you prefer to do the shortcut.
| | 01:35 | Now when I click that, I'll get a dialog that
asks me to name the group that I am creating.
| | 01:41 | And in fact, there are really
two groups being created here.
| | 01:44 | What happens is in Revit as we've
talked about previously, Revit makes a very
| | 01:48 | clear distinction between things that
are part of your model and things that are
| | 01:51 | part of the view, or that are annotative.
| | 01:53 | So in this case it's recognizing that my
selection includes both types of items.
| | 01:57 | And so it's offering to make a Model
Group from the elements that are part of
| | 02:01 | the model, and then an Attached Detail
Group from the elements that are not part
| | 02:06 | of the model, the elements that are annotation.
| | 02:07 | And those elements are things like the
room tags and the door tags that I have
| | 02:12 | that you can see there in the background.
| | 02:13 | So what I'm going to do is name
the group itself: Two Bedroom Unit.
| | 02:20 | And I'm going to name the
Attached Detail Group just simply Tags.
| | 02:25 | So again, you can call these things
anything you want, but I am going to go
| | 02:27 | ahead and click okay there.
| | 02:29 | Now I am going to deselect everything, and I
want to show you how you know you have a group.
| | 02:32 | Basically, if you pre-highlight an item
that's a group, you'll get this dashed
| | 02:37 | line that will appear when it pre-
highlights a rectangular boundary.
| | 02:41 | And that lets you know you have a group.
| | 02:42 | And if I select, I want you to notice
that all that selects is the model elements.
| | 02:46 | Notice how the room tags and the
door tags are not part of that selection.
| | 02:51 | If I move my mouse around, kind of over
some of those tags, you'll actually see
| | 02:55 | those highlight as a group as well.
| | 02:57 | And the tooltip tells me that
it's an Attached Detail Group.
| | 03:01 | And if I were to click, that would select
only the tags and not any of the model geometry.
| | 03:07 | Furthermore, you'd see this little
pushpin icon right here, which is grayed out,
| | 03:12 | and it's really just Revit's way of
letting us know that this group is actually
| | 03:16 | attached to the model.
| | 03:18 | Okay, so that's its sort of indicator.
| | 03:20 | It's a clue that we've got it attached.
| | 03:22 | Now there is another place where we
can see that we have groups in our model,
| | 03:25 | and that's here on the Project browser.
| | 03:27 | So I'm going to scroll all the way down.
| | 03:28 | There is an item here called Groups.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to expand that.
| | 03:33 | There are two categories. I'm going to expand Model.
| | 03:36 | It's possible to create a Detail
group all by itself, stand-alone, a
| | 03:39 | nonattached detail group.
| | 03:41 | If that were the case, then it would appear here.
| | 03:44 | In our case, because our Detail group
is attached, it actually appears here,
| | 03:49 | indented beneath the Two Bedroom Unit.
| | 03:51 | So you can see that under model
Groups we have a Two Bedroom Unit and then
| | 03:55 | beneath that Floor Plan Tags.
| | 03:58 | So not only does it recognize that
it's an Attached Group, but it actually is
| | 04:01 | specific to floor plans.
| | 04:02 | If we went into an elevation or section
view, we could create another Attached
| | 04:05 | Detail Group for that view, as well.
| | 04:07 | So now what do we do with
the group once we have it?
| | 04:10 | Well, I am going to zoom out a little bit.
| | 04:11 | I'll use my wheel to do this.
| | 04:13 | And the most obvious thing
that we can do is copy it around.
| | 04:17 | So perhaps I want this same layout four
times on this Floor Plan. So I'm going
| | 04:22 | to give myself a little bit of room here.
| | 04:23 | I am going to select the group.
| | 04:26 | And here is a tool that we
haven't looked at previously;
| | 04:28 | it's called the Mirror tool.
| | 04:30 | I am going to go ahead and
select this on the Modify tab.
| | 04:32 | And there are actually two kinds of Mirror.
| | 04:34 | We are going to use both of them in this lesson.
| | 04:36 | So I'll start with this one, the Pick
Axis, and the shortcut for that is MM.
| | 04:40 | What this allows you to do is just
simply pick on any edge of any existing
| | 04:44 | object, and that edge actually
becomes kind of like a plane of glass.
| | 04:48 | If you imagine placing a mirror along
that edge, like a literal mirror glass, it
| | 04:53 | would reflect the object along that plane.
| | 04:55 | So if I highlight this wall right here,
imagine you are looking down on that
| | 04:59 | plane of glass, and then it kind of becomes
clear what's going on, and I just click it,
| | 05:03 | you are going to see the object
actually mirror up, so get a flipped version of
| | 05:08 | it in the other direction.
| | 05:09 | Now we also got a message that's saying that
we have highlighting walls that overlapped.
| | 05:13 | And if I do a zoom region, they are
talking about this area right here, because
| | 05:20 | there are actually two
walls now in the same spot.
| | 05:22 | And we are going to
remedy that in just a moment.
| | 05:24 | But let me go back to Zoom Previous.
| | 05:27 | And again, let's talk
about what we've just done.
| | 05:30 | So we've mirrored this
object up to the other side.
| | 05:32 | It's still a group.
| | 05:33 | It's an instance of the two bedroom condo unit.
| | 05:36 | But we've just sort of made
another instance of it up above there.
| | 05:40 | Now let's go ahead and take a
look at this wall situation here.
| | 05:45 | If you recall from the previous movies,
the Tab key is a very powerful tool in Revit.
| | 05:50 | And we are going to use that
anytime we are having a hard time getting a
| | 05:52 | selection that we want.
| | 05:54 | In this case, we can use the Tab key
to cycle between all the various objects
| | 05:59 | that are in the same spot.
| | 06:01 | So obviously, if I just Tab here, we
expect to see it flip between the two groups.
| | 06:06 | But it turns out if you Tab one more
time, it actually is capable of reaching
| | 06:11 | right into the group and allowing us to
select items that are inside the group.
| | 06:16 | Now if I click this item right here,
you'll get a small, little icon right there.
| | 06:22 | That icon actually allows me to exclude
one instance of this double wall, so that
| | 06:29 | everything cleans up nicely, and I
don't have a redundant wall there.
| | 06:32 | So from the point of view of
creating a nice, clean floor plan, everything
| | 06:36 | makes a lot more sense.
| | 06:37 | We don't have this double wall, but
yet we still get the benefit of managing
| | 06:40 | this condo layout with the group.
| | 06:42 | Now what do I mean by that?
| | 06:43 | Well, suppose I want to actually make
a change to the condo unit after I've
| | 06:48 | already done the mirroring.
| | 06:49 | If I had just simply done copy and paste,
then it would be difficult, because it
| | 06:52 | have to go and make the
same change in two locations.
| | 06:55 | But by doing this with the group, I
can actually make the change, and it will
| | 06:59 | apply across all instances of the group.
| | 07:01 | So I am going to do a really simple change.
| | 07:03 | I am going to select this group, and I
am going to choose the Edit Group button
| | 07:07 | here on the ribbon, or you can
type EG if you want the shortcut.
| | 07:10 | And let's do something really, really
simple here that will be noticeable.
| | 07:14 | I'll just add another window.
| | 07:16 | Now, I am going to go ahead from
my list here, and I'll choose this
| | 07:19 | Casement Double with Trim.
| | 07:21 | And I'll put a window
right here in this bedroom.
| | 07:24 | I am going to go ahead and click Modify.
| | 07:27 | And there is this floating toolbar right
here that you use to get out of Edit Group mode.
| | 07:32 | So I am going to go ahead and finish that.
| | 07:33 | And as soon as I do, you'll see that
change applies across the way to the other
| | 07:38 | instance of the group.
| | 07:39 | So that's a pretty quick and easy
example, but it gives you an idea of what the
| | 07:44 | benefit of using groups is.
| | 07:45 | So let's go ahead and Mirror one more time.
| | 07:48 | I am going to select this guy, and this guy.
| | 07:52 | And this time, because I don't want these
to be butted right up against each other,
| | 07:55 | I need to allow room over here for an
elevator lobby and some stairs and so forth,
| | 07:59 | I am going to use this icon instead.
| | 08:02 | The shortcut is DM, and
its Draw the Mirror Axis.
| | 08:05 | So rather than selecting an object that
uses an axis, I'm actually going to pick
| | 08:08 | two points to show it where the axis is.
| | 08:10 | So I am going to do that by coming
over here and kind of just moving my mouse
| | 08:15 | using the Temporary Dimension.
| | 08:17 | 8 feet will give me a total of a 16 foot
corridor, so I want to actually drop that
| | 08:21 | back to about 7' 6", and you just
kind of pull it down straight.
| | 08:25 | As long as I've got a 90 degree there, I
should be good, and I'll click again.
| | 08:30 | And there you have it.
| | 08:32 | Now of course, I will need to come in and
add some walls, and some stairs, and so forth.
| | 08:36 | And we'll do that in future movies, but
pretty much that gives me the total layout here.
| | 08:40 | Now one last finishing touch.
| | 08:42 | This is the only one that
has the Attached Detail Group.
| | 08:46 | So what about the rest?
| | 08:47 | Well, it turns out that you can
actually select these other groups,
| | 08:50 | and I'll do those two with a crossing
window and this one with my Ctrl key,
| | 08:54 | and on the Ribbon you have this
Attached Detail Groups button, and if I click
| | 09:00 | that, I can simply check the
Floor Plan Tags check box, click OK.
| | 09:06 | And it will add all of those tags that
are in the other group to all instances
| | 09:10 | of the group that I had selected.
| | 09:12 | And more importantly, they
will even be right-reading.
| | 09:17 | So there you have it.
| | 09:17 | There are a few examples of
using groups in your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with Revit links| 00:00 | Let's talk about linking
Revit files to other Revit files.
| | 00:03 | In this example, I have the Office
Building Exercise File onscreen, and I'm
| | 00:08 | going to go to the Site Plan view.
| | 00:09 | I'll zoom out a little bit and get a
better look at what we're going to have
| | 00:14 | available to us, and I'm going to
link in a Revit file for the Site Plan.
| | 00:19 | So, I'm going to go to the Insert tab,
click the Link Revit button, and I'll
| | 00:24 | select this file right here: Building Site.
| | 00:26 | Now, there are several positioning
options, fewer options than we had when we
| | 00:31 | were doing AutoCAD links, but
the same positioning options.
| | 00:34 | You can of course, place it
manually if you would like to.
| | 00:36 | You can try to do Origin to Origin, if you're
sure this files share the same origin point.
| | 00:41 | The preferred method is actually By
Shared Coordinates, and we're going to talk
| | 00:44 | about that at the end of this movie.
| | 00:46 | But for right now I'm going to choose
Center to Center, because we haven't
| | 00:48 | established the Shared Coordinates yet, and so,
Shared Coordinates wouldn't yet be an option.
| | 00:53 | So, we first do Center to Center, and
then we will save a Shared Coordinates
| | 00:57 | system after that's complete.
| | 01:01 | Now, here's the file.
| | 01:02 | You can see it's a simple site plan
file with a couple of roads and a parking
| | 01:06 | lot and a little property line.
| | 01:07 | What we're going to do next is move the
file into position relative to the building.
| | 01:11 | Now, we don't want to move the building
relative to the file, because we might
| | 01:15 | leave some geometry behind, or we might
disrupt some relationships between some
| | 01:19 | of our geometry, your walls and your
roofs, and your grids. They're all kind of
| | 01:22 | attached to one another, and we
don't work at that funny angle anyhow.
| | 01:26 | So, what we want to do is we actually
want to take this file, and we want to
| | 01:28 | move it and position it
relative to our building file.
| | 01:32 | So, I'm going to go to Move, and I'll
pick a point right here at the end of this
| | 01:36 | walkway, and I will move that into
position, roughly where the entrance of the
| | 01:43 | building needs to go.
| | 01:45 | Now, if you look carefully, you'll
notice that the Site Plan has actually
| | 01:48 | covered up the building, so it makes a
little difficult to see what we're doing,
| | 01:51 | and we're also zoomed out kind of far.
| | 01:53 | So, let me go ahead and zoom in a
little, and then as far as showing the
| | 01:58 | building through, we're going to
temporarily change this view to Wireframe, and
| | 02:01 | we can do this down here on the View
Control bar. The default behavior is Hidden
| | 02:05 | Line, which is what you typically want
in a Floor Plan view, but Wireframe will
| | 02:09 | reveal the model through.
| | 02:11 | It allows you to see through all the 3D
geometry and allows us to get a better
| | 02:14 | look at what we're doing.
| | 02:14 | Now, I'm going to take this and actually
move it slightly, so we can see there's
| | 02:19 | actually a green line right here that
we're going to use for lining things up.
| | 02:24 | So, the first thing I'll do is select on this,
and I'd like to show you the Rotate tool.
| | 02:29 | So, here's Rotate right here, on the Modify tab.
| | 02:33 | You can type RO, which is the shortcut
for Rotate, and what you'll see is this
| | 02:38 | little rotation control appears onscreen.
| | 02:41 | This is the center of your rotation.
It kind of looks like a radar screen, if you
| | 02:44 | spin it around here.
| | 02:46 | Now, you can simply type in a rotation:
20 degrees, press Enter, and it would
| | 02:50 | rotate the file, but of course, it
rotates around that little rotation symbol,
| | 02:56 | so that probably wasn't
the best choice in this case.
| | 02:59 | So I'm going to undo that.
| | 03:00 | What I want to do instead is select the
file, click on Rotate again, and you can
| | 03:07 | actually click on this little
symbol and drag it. Now don't let go.
| | 03:11 | If you let go, you're just
moving it to wherever you let go.
| | 03:13 | So you want to click and drag in all one motion,
and then notice that we'll even object snap,
| | 03:19 | so we're going to object snap to the
end of the green line and then let go.
| | 03:23 | So now I can type in a rotation, if I
know exactly how much I want to rotate by,
| | 03:30 | or I can use my Object Snap to indicate
the starting angle of the rotation and
| | 03:36 | then rotate my mouse, and you see how it
will kind of snap to a horizontal here. See how
| | 03:41 | the mouse wants to snap in there?
| | 03:43 | I can click that, and that will actually
rotate it horizontal, and then of course,
| | 03:47 | I could move it into its final
position there at the front door.
| | 03:51 | That's one option, and a good one, but
I'm going to undo, and I want to show
| | 03:55 | you another method that we can use to get the
orientation correct, and that's the Align tool.
| | 04:01 | So, it's really a 6 of one/half a
dozen of the other proposition.
| | 04:05 | If you prefer you to Rotate, feel free.
| | 04:07 | If you prefer to use Align, feel free.
| | 04:09 | But I do want to show you both methods.
| | 04:11 | Now to show you Align, I'm actually
going to zoom in a little bit closer still,
| | 04:15 | and what I want to do is align
this green line in the Site Plan.
| | 04:22 | It's green if it's not selected.
| | 04:25 | I want to align to the
front wall here of the building.
| | 04:28 | So, I select the Site Plan file, and I
click on the Align tool, and if you look
| | 04:34 | down on your status bar, it says, Please
select the line or point reference for alignment.
| | 04:39 | So the point of reference is what you
want to align to, and I could highlight
| | 04:44 | and select this wall.
| | 04:45 | Now, if I select this wall, it's going
to actually align to the center of the
| | 04:47 | wall, and I want the face of the wall.
| | 04:50 | So, I'm going to press my Tab key
until the face of the wall highlights,
| | 04:53 | and then I'll click.
| | 04:55 | That gives me my alignment reference
there on the front face of the wall, and
| | 04:59 | then all I have to do is click
on the green line, and that will
| | 05:04 | simultaneously rotate and move the
Site file to match the alignment of the
| | 05:09 | edge that I selected.
| | 05:10 | I'm going to select the Site Plan
again, click on my Move tool, pick up the
| | 05:14 | midpoint here and drag it over to snap
to about the middle of the door there.
| | 05:20 | Let me go ahead and type ZF for Zoom to
Fit, zoom in a region a little bit
| | 05:25 | closer, and you can see the result of
the positioning here in Plan view, but
| | 05:31 | we're not quite done yet.
| | 05:32 | Let's turn back on Hidden Line, and
you'll notice we've still got our building
| | 05:35 | hidden by the Site Plan.
| | 05:37 | This tells me that the Site
Plan is actually too high.
| | 05:39 | And how can I verify that?
| | 05:41 | I can go to the Elevation view and
confirm that in fact my trees and site itself
| | 05:46 | are floating up in the air, and they're
completely burying the building, which
| | 05:49 | is down in this region here.
| | 05:50 | So what I want to do is zoom in just a
little bit closer, and I'm going to use
| | 05:55 | my Align tool again, and I'm going to
use Level1 as the Reference, and that
| | 06:02 | will stay highlighted. And then I'll
come up here to the Level1 in the Link
| | 06:08 | file, and if you highlight it and read
the tooltip, you can see that's Level1 in
| | 06:11 | the Linked file, and click it, and that
will pull the Site Plan file down and
| | 06:17 | match up the two Level1s. And finally,
if we go to a 3D view, zoom in a little,
| | 06:23 | you can see the end result.
| | 06:25 | Press Escape to get out of the Align tool.
| | 06:27 | So, our building is now
positioned properly relative to the site.
| | 06:30 | The last thing I want to do is I want
to save this positioning as a Shared
| | 06:34 | Coordinate system, so that I can use
that Shared Coordinate system to link
| | 06:37 | other files within the site.
| | 06:39 | So, I'm going to select my Site Plan
once again, and over here on the Properties
| | 06:44 | palette, it will tell me I have a
Linked Revit model, and its Shared Site is
| | 06:49 | currently Not Shared.
| | 06:50 | Now to share it, all I have to do is
click this button, and I get two choices
| | 06:54 | when you set up Shared Coordinates:
| | 06:56 | The first choice is to publish the
coordinate system, and the second choice is
| | 06:59 | to acquire the coordinate system.
| | 07:02 | Both methods work equally well;
| | 07:04 | it's really a matter of choice.
| | 07:05 | If we publish the Coordinate system,
what we're doing is taking the positioning
| | 07:09 | from the current file, and we're
pushing it to the Site Plan file.
| | 07:12 | If we do acquire, we're doing the opposite.
| | 07:14 | We're taking the Coordinate system from
the Site Plan file, and we're pulling it
| | 07:17 | into the current file.
| | 07:19 | In either case, we're going to have a
reconciliation between the coordinates in
| | 07:25 | one file with the coordinates in the
other file, so it really doesn't matter.
| | 07:28 | I usually go from biggest to smallest.
| | 07:30 | So what I mean by that is the Site
Plan is larger than the building,
| | 07:34 | so I'm going to acquire from the
Site Plan and apply it to the building.
| | 07:38 | If I were in the Site Plan file linking
in the building, I would go the other way;
| | 07:41 | I would publish to the building.
| | 07:43 | I'm going to save this.
| | 07:44 | You can see down here it says,
Record selected instance as being at
| | 07:48 | Position, Building Site: Internal.
| | 07:51 | That's the default position,
and I'm going to save it there.
| | 07:54 | However, you might want to choose to
rename that, or duplicate it in some other
| | 07:57 | cases, and in a future movie we're
going to actually look at that in a
| | 08:00 | little more detail.
| | 08:01 | So for now, I'm just going to go ahead
and save it as Internal, click Reconcile
| | 08:06 | and then to finalize all
this, I need to save my project.
| | 08:09 | So I've clicked in the white
space to deselect my model.
| | 08:13 | I'm going to click on the Save icon
here on the QAT, and that saves my project.
| | 08:19 | So, I've got everything saved and ready
to go, and what I want to do now is Close
| | 08:24 | out of this project, go to
Open and select the Building Site.
| | 08:31 | Now, we're looking at the Building Site,
and the building is not actually in
| | 08:35 | this file. Because we've
set up Shared Coordinates -
| | 08:37 | I'm going to look at this in a 3D view -
| | 08:39 | we go to Insert, we go to Link Revit,
and we select the Office Building,
| | 08:45 | this time I'm able to choose By Shared
Coordinates, and the building should come
| | 08:50 | in in exactly the right location.
| | 08:52 | So that's the beauty of
setting up the Shared Coordinates.
| | 08:54 | So once you've set them up, one time for
each pair of files - in this case, the
| | 08:58 | building and the site - that's all you
need to do, and it will take care of
| | 09:01 | itself from that point on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing links| 00:00 | An important aspect of working with linked
files in Revit is managing existing links.
| | 00:05 | This is true both Revit and DWG links.
| | 00:07 | Sometimes the connection to a
link file can become disruptive.
| | 00:10 | You may wish to point the link file to
another file, open a different version, or
| | 00:14 | sometimes you just simply want to check
the files you have and reload the ones
| | 00:17 | that you know have changed
since the last time you loaded them.
| | 00:19 | All of these actions take
place in the Manage Links dialog.
| | 00:22 | So, let's go ahead and take a look.
| | 00:24 | I'm going to open a file, so I'm going
to use the shortcut on the QAT, and in the
| | 00:31 | Chapter5 folder of the Exercise Files
| | 00:33 | I'm going to open this file
here called Managing Links.
| | 00:37 | Now, the first thing that I'm going to
see when this file opens is a warning
| | 00:42 | that Revit is telling me that it
can't find one of my linked files.
| | 00:45 | So this may be something you'll see
in your own projects, and who knows what
| | 00:49 | could have happened? Somehow the
location to the file has changed or maybe
| | 00:52 | somebody renamed the file, and
it's offering me two choices.
| | 00:55 | I can either open the Manage Links
dialog to correct the problem, or I could
| | 00:59 | just simply ignore the problem
altogether and continue opening the project.
| | 01:02 | Now, either one would be fine, but in this
movie we want to talk about managing links,
| | 01:07 | so why don't we go ahead and open the
Manage Links dialog to see what we can do
| | 01:11 | about correcting the problem.
| | 01:12 | So when Manage Links opens, you can
see that there's actually three tabs.
| | 01:15 | We have CAD Formats -
| | 01:16 | there aren't any CAD links
in this particular project,
| | 01:19 | we have a Revit tab where we have two
links, and then a DWF Markups tab which we
| | 01:23 | also don't have any in this project.
| | 01:25 | Now, Building Site you can see is
listed as the first Revit link, and I will go
| | 01:29 | ahead and highlight it.
| | 01:30 | Its current Status says it's Loaded,
its Reference Type is Overlay, and there
| | 01:35 | are actually two choices there:
| | 01:36 | Overlay and Attachment.
| | 01:38 | The way this works is Overlay is a one-
level deep link, meaning that the file
| | 01:44 | the we're currently in is called Managing Links.
| | 01:46 | If I were to create another Revit file
and load in Managing Links as a link in
| | 01:51 | that file, it would leave behind
Building Site, because Building Site is an
| | 01:55 | Overlay, so it would only go forward one level.
| | 01:58 | If I change Building Site to an
attachment, then Managing Links would pull
| | 02:03 | Building Site along with it, and you
would actually get what we call a nested
| | 02:07 | link, meaning one link inside of another.
| | 02:09 | So, in your projects, if you need a
link to follow through, even if the host
| | 02:14 | file gets linked yet again, in other words
a nested link, you can switch to Attachment.
| | 02:20 | The Saved Path is listed over here, and
if it only lists the file name, what that
| | 02:25 | means is Revit is finding the file in
the same folder as the current project,
| | 02:30 | which is the case here.
| | 02:31 | So the current project is called
Managing Links, and the linked file is called
| | 02:35 | Building Site, and they both live in
the same chapter5 folder. And the Path is
| | 02:39 | set to Relative, which just simply
means it's not writing the Path all the way
| | 02:43 | back to the hard drive letter, like C,
or D, or whatever your drive letter is.
| | 02:47 | It's simply showing only as much path as
it needs to to find the file, which in
| | 02:52 | this case is just the name of the file.
| | 02:53 | Now, Shed is another Revit file that's
currently listed as Not found in the Status.
| | 02:59 | It's also an Overlay and so on, and
the reason it's not found is because its
| | 03:03 | saved path is at a folder called Links
and then Shed, and this folder called
| | 03:09 | Links doesn't exist in the Exercise File folder.
| | 03:12 | So, it's looking for a folder that
doesn't exist, and when it gets there, it
| | 03:16 | generates an error because
there's no folder to be found.
| | 03:19 | So let's deal with that problem.
| | 03:20 | All we have to do is select Shed, and down
here we can click the Reload From button.
| | 03:26 | This will open up our dialog box and
show us the current folder we're in,
| | 03:31 | chapter5 in this case, and it turns out that
Shed is located right there in that folder.
| | 03:35 | If you weren't in that folder, we could
certainly use the Look in dropdown here,
| | 03:39 | and we could browse out to other
locations to locate the file. And when we select
| | 03:43 | the file and we click Open, it will
now show its Status as being Loaded.
| | 03:48 | It will update the Path to reflect its
new location, so it eliminates the Links
| | 03:53 | part of the Path and just
simply lists the name of the file.
| | 03:56 | Let's go ahead and click OK, and you
can see that now the Shed file appears
| | 04:01 | linked over here, off in
the side of the building.
| | 04:03 | So, all the Shed file is is really
just a simple outbuilding over here.
| | 04:07 | So, let's just go ahead and zoom in a
little, and you could see that we've got
| | 04:13 | the Shed building over
here at the edge of our site.
| | 04:16 | So that's what happens when you open
a file, and the link cannot be found.
| | 04:20 | Now, if you need to do any work in
Managing Links after the fact, the dialog
| | 04:25 | is not open, you can find it on the Insert
tab, and here's Managing Links right here.
| | 04:29 | That will reopen the same dialog and
go to your Revit tab, and you can choose
| | 04:33 | whatever you'd like.
| | 04:34 | For example, maybe I don't
want to see the Shed right now.
| | 04:36 | I could select it, and I could Remove it.
| | 04:39 | If I Remove it, that actually deletes it
from the list. It's gone, and that file
| | 04:43 | will no longer be part of this file and
if you ever wanted it back, you'd have
| | 04:46 | to re-link it all over again.
| | 04:48 | I could Unload it, which
is a little less permanent.
| | 04:50 | Unload will warn me that I can't undo
this, and I'm going to go ahead and say
| | 04:54 | Yes, and you'll see the Status is
listed as Not Loaded; however, it's not
| | 04:58 | listed in red because it's not
seeing that as an error, because it was a
| | 05:02 | choice that I made.
| | 05:03 | I wanted to unload it. And when I
click OK, the Shed file will disappear.
| | 05:08 | So, sometimes you don't
need to load a linked file,
| | 05:10 | you want to speed upload times, and
you're not working on that portion of the
| | 05:13 | project, so you can simply unload it,
and then anytime you need to get it back,
| | 05:17 | you simply go back to Manage Links,
click the Revit tab, select the Shed, and I
| | 05:21 | don't need to do Reload From this time.
| | 05:23 | This time all I need to do is click
Reload, because I'm reloading it from its
| | 05:27 | current location, so I don't need to
tell Revit where to reload it from.
| | 05:30 | I just simply need to say, hey go grab
it at its last known location and I click
| | 05:34 | OK, and the file will appear.
| | 05:36 | And so that's all there is to it.
| | 05:38 | So, Manage Links gives you access to all
of your CAD and Revit links in your project.
| | 05:42 | You can use this tool to load, unload,
change the path, and even remove links
| | 05:45 | permanently from your project.
| | 05:46 | This is an important tool to acquaint
yourself with if you plan to use links
| | 05:49 | in your workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding file formats| 00:00 | So I should mention: It's pretty
important that if you're working with an
| | 00:03 | extended Revit project team, that
everybody on the project team be on the same
| | 00:08 | file format of Revit.
| | 00:09 | Now I'm not saying the same version.
| | 00:11 | You can work with engineers who are
using Revit Structure and other engineers
| | 00:15 | who are using Revit MEP, but
everybody has got to be on 2011.
| | 00:19 | And the reason for this is each new
release of Revit is a new file format.
| | 00:23 | So if you try to share data between the
team that has some of the folks who are
| | 00:28 | using 2010, for example, and some
are using 2011, it's not going to work,
| | 00:32 | because Revit will try and upgrade the
file whenever you open it or link
| | 00:35 | it, and then the next time you send
it back to the person that's on lower
| | 00:38 | version, they won't be able to open it at all.
| | 00:41 | So you've got to have a meeting at the
early stages of the project and just decide
| | 00:45 | what version everybody on the
team is going to be working on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Sketch-Based Modeling ComponentsWorking with floors| 00:00 | Let's move on to sketch-based elements.
| | 00:02 | A sketch-based element is an element
that requires a user-defined sketch to show
| | 00:05 | Revit the shape of the
element you wish to create.
| | 00:08 | In other words, there's no reasonable
way that Revit can assume the default
| | 00:11 | shape of objects like floors, roofs, or stairs;
| | 00:14 | we must give Revit some guidance when
creating such elements, by sketching out
| | 00:19 | the overall shape of the element.
| | 00:20 | Sketches are two-dimensional, simplified
renditions of the element you're creating.
| | 00:24 | And in this movie we're going to look at
the Floor Element as our first example.
| | 00:28 | So I'm here in a simple office building layout.
| | 00:30 | The name of this file is Adding
Floors, and I'm looking at Level 1.
| | 00:34 | On the Home Tab, I click the Floor tool,
and this takes me into Sketch mode.
| | 00:41 | Now, how do I know I'm in Sketch mode?
| | 00:42 | The most obvious way that I know
is that the entire model grays out.
| | 00:46 | Now, I can't modify any of the
other objects in Sketch mode.
| | 00:50 | You'll see that some of
the tools have grayed out.
| | 00:52 | If you went over to the Home tab, you
wouldn't be able to add walls or doors or windows.
| | 00:56 | So really the only active tab is your
Modify/Create Boundary tab, and you're
| | 01:01 | limited to creating things that have
to do with the floor's boundary shape.
| | 01:05 | So let's go ahead and
begin laying out our boundary.
| | 01:09 | The default behavior puts the Boundary
Line active as the active tool, and also
| | 01:14 | in the toolbox over here, has
Pick Walls as an active tool.
| | 01:18 | Now, we can draw our floor with any of
these other shapes, and we've see those
| | 01:21 | shapes before in other commands, but
Pick Walls is probably our most convenient
| | 01:26 | way to create our floor sketch, because
most of the time you want your floors to
| | 01:30 | match the shape of the existing walls.
| | 01:32 | So it works pretty simply:
| | 01:34 | I just click on an existing wall, and
this purple sketch line will appear.
| | 01:38 | Now, I can click on several walls if I
like, and each one will add a new Sketch Line.
| | 01:44 | Before I get too far though, I'd like
to point out to you this check box right
| | 01:48 | here on the Options bar,
Extend into wall (to core).
| | 01:52 | Now, what this does -
| | 01:53 | let me go ahead and zoom in down here -
| | 01:57 | this places the sketch line on either
the inside or outside face of the core
| | 02:02 | boundary of the wall,
rather than the wall itself.
| | 02:04 | Now, if you had that unchecked, I'm
going to uncheck this box, and I'm going to
| | 02:09 | click this wall over here,
| | 02:11 | you can see that the boundary line
would actually go to either the outside face
| | 02:15 | of the wall, or I could flip it
to the inside face of the wall.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to press Ctrl+Z to undo that.
| | 02:20 | I'm going to click the Modify tool
and I'll select this sketch Line.
| | 02:25 | It's on the inside face of the core.
| | 02:27 | I have a little flip grip, and I could
flip it to the outside face of the core,
| | 02:31 | and if I zoom in really close, you can
kind of see that there's still a little
| | 02:35 | bit of space here at the top of the wall.
| | 02:37 | That's actually the thickness of the drywall.
| | 02:40 | So this sketch line is either on the
inside or the outside face of the core, and
| | 02:44 | you can do that to get the floor to
interact with the structure of the wall.
| | 02:50 | So I'm going to go ahead and zoom back out.
| | 02:53 | I'm going to make sure that Extend
into core is still selected, turn on my
| | 02:57 | Boundary Line again, Pick Walls,
and I'm going to keep going.
| | 03:00 | Now, I'm going to stop here for a second,
because this wall is actually in two
| | 03:05 | pieces, here and here, and this
sketch line does not go all the way across.
| | 03:09 | Rather than give myself a second sketch
line here, I'm going to skip over that
| | 03:12 | segment, complete the sketch around here,
and then I'll just simply use my Trim
| | 03:17 | tool to clean this up.
| | 03:19 | Now, we saw trim before in the context of walls.
| | 03:21 | It works exactly the same way here.
| | 03:23 | Now, one last thing to point out
about the sketch before we move on is
| | 03:27 | this symbol right here.
| | 03:29 | The very first sketch line we
drew had that symbol, and that's the
| | 03:33 | Span Direction symbol.
| | 03:34 | That just indicates the direction of
the floor joists for this particular floor
| | 03:38 | slab we're building.
| | 03:39 | If I wanted the span direction to go in
some other direction, I could click the
| | 03:43 | Span Direction tool and I could pick a
different line, and that would put the
| | 03:47 | floor joist over on that line.
| | 03:49 | This is a new feature in Revit 2011.
| | 03:51 | It's a handy way to indicate to your
structural engineers which way you want the
| | 03:54 | structure to go, if that's
important to you in your design.
| | 03:57 | Next, we're going to click the
big green check box over here.
| | 04:01 | That's your Finish Mode button,
and that will complete the floor.
| | 04:05 | And before it can complete,
Revit has a question for us.
| | 04:09 | So the question it's asking us is, any
walls that go up to the bottom surface
| | 04:15 | of this floor, would we like those walls to
actually stop there and attach to the bottom?
| | 04:19 | Now, sometimes that's a very desirable
thing to do, and in fact, in the next
| | 04:23 | floor we draw, we are going to do that,
but in this one I'm going to actually say no,
| | 04:27 | because the walls they were talking
about were actually the perimeter foundation
| | 04:32 | walls that go around the building, and
I don't want those to stop at the floor.
| | 04:35 | I want them to continue
doing what they were doing.
| | 04:37 | Now, verify over here,
| | 04:39 | I've set this file up so that we're
creating just a simple Generic 12" Floor Structure.
| | 04:44 | There are other choices in here, just
like we have with walls, and so you could
| | 04:49 | do just a Concrete Slab or a Slab the
has finished material, like VCT on it.
| | 04:54 | For now, we're going to stick with
just the Generic 12" floor. Just wanted
| | 04:58 | to point out to you that you can use some
of those other styles in your own projects.
| | 05:01 | Now, I'm going to jump up to Level 2,
and I'm going to go back to the Home tab,
| | 05:06 | click the floor again, and
back to Boundary Line, Pick Walls.
| | 05:11 | It all does it by default.
| | 05:12 | Here's the Extend into core, select
that one, and it looks like it went to the
| | 05:20 | inside of the core, so I'm going to
flip that to the outside before I continue.
| | 05:28 | I don't want to do this wall and this
wall because we actually have a double
| | 05:31 | height space in here.
| | 05:32 | So I'm just going to go to Trim for that,
and kind of get those two sketch lines
| | 05:37 | to complete one another.
| | 05:38 | And then I'll notice here that I got a
little problem getting over to the stairs.
| | 05:43 | So what I want to point out to you here
is I'm going to go back to Boundary Line.
| | 05:47 | This is where you might use
some of these other shapes.
| | 05:49 | So you're not required to use Pick Walls.
| | 05:51 | It's just that that's a convenient way to work.
| | 05:53 | But when you have a custom shaped floor,
that you can't really base on existing
| | 05:57 | walls, then you simply go in and sketch it.
| | 05:59 | So I'll just sketch it here, with a
couple of extra lines, click my Modify tool
| | 06:05 | to complete that, and
use my trim to clean it up.
| | 06:09 | Now, you have to clean up the whole sketch.
| | 06:11 | If you leave any gaps, or if you have
any overlapping lines like I have right
| | 06:15 | here, and you try and click Finish,
Revit will complain, it will throw an error
| | 06:20 | message, and you'll have to do
something about it before you can continue.
| | 06:23 | So I'm going to click Continue here,
dismiss that error message, finish
| | 06:28 | trimming, go ahead and click
Modify, and then I'll click Finish.
| | 06:33 | Now, I'm going to see the same
message again that I saw a moment ago.
| | 06:37 | This time the walls that go up to the
floor's bottom are these walls here.
| | 06:44 | So the same layout of offices that I
see here on the second floor occurs on
| | 06:48 | the first floor, and so it's asking me
about the version of those on the first floor;
| | 06:52 | do I want those to attach
to the bottom of the floor?
| | 06:54 | This time I'm going to say Yes.
| | 06:56 | And then, this next message is a
little easier to understand, because it's
| | 06:59 | actually highlighting the geometry in question.
| | 07:02 | And so what it's saying here is the
horizontal floor is intersecting the
| | 07:06 | vertical walls, and would I like the
horizontal floor to actually come in and
| | 07:10 | carve out the geometry of the walls that
they intersect? And I'm also going to say Yes.
| | 07:16 | Now, how would I see the effect of
both of these changes that I've made?
| | 07:21 | I'm going to go up to my Quick Access
Toolbar, and I'm going to click on the
| | 07:25 | Section tool, and I'm just
going to simply cut a section.
| | 07:28 | Anytime you want to get a better look
at your model, cutting a section is a
| | 07:31 | great way to do that.
| | 07:32 | It's just two simple clicks;
| | 07:34 | you deselect it by clicking anywhere
and then double-click it, and you've
| | 07:37 | opened the section.
| | 07:38 | And just like that, you've got
instant feedback about what that object in
| | 07:43 | question is actually doing,
in this case the floor.
| | 07:45 | So, let me zoom in, in this area right
here, and let's talk about what those
| | 07:50 | settings were that we were just looking at.
| | 07:52 | Here we told it no, we don't
want the wall to stop at the floor.
| | 07:57 | If we did, this wall would actually
have come down and stopped right here, and
| | 08:01 | we'd have a gap in there.
| | 08:03 | Here, we told it yes, we want it to carve
out, and yes, we want this wall to stop here.
| | 08:08 | So depending on the situation you have,
you can either choose yes or no to
| | 08:13 | either of those questions.
| | 08:15 | I'm going to go ahead and zoom back out.
| | 08:18 | So that gives you a quick
overview of how you can create floors,
| | 08:22 | but keep in mind some of the
techniques we use there, in terms of picking
| | 08:25 | objects and sketching objects and the
different things in Sketch mode, because
| | 08:29 | we're going to see that theme
running again and again throughout all the
| | 08:32 | movies in this chapter, because all
the movies in this chapter deal with
| | 08:35 | sketch-based objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with footprint roofs| 00:00 | What building could be called
complete without a roof over its head.
| | 00:03 | Revit gives us a few ways
to approach building roofs.
| | 00:06 | In this movie, we're going to look at
the footprint roof, which is probably the
| | 00:09 | most common approach to creating a roof.
| | 00:11 | And in many ways, the procedure is
nearly identical to creating floors, which we
| | 00:15 | looked at in the Adding Floors movie.
| | 00:17 | Roofs are also sketch-based objects,
so let's go ahead and get started.
| | 00:20 | I am in a file called Adding Roofs.
| | 00:23 | It's the same small office building
that we used when we were adding floors.
| | 00:27 | And I'm on a floor plan called High Roof.
| | 00:29 | This particular building actually has two
roof levels, and this is the higher one.
| | 00:35 | So we're going to go to the Roof tool
on the Home tab, and this is, again, a
| | 00:42 | sketch-based object, so you're going
to see the model gray out and these
| | 00:47 | familiar sketch-based tools appear.
Like our floors before,
| | 00:51 | we get a Boundary Line.
| | 00:53 | We get Pick Walls as the default behaviors.
| | 00:55 | We're not obligated to use those.
| | 00:57 | We certainly could sketch our roof in
any shape using any tool that we like, but
| | 01:01 | usually it's most convenient to
start with the existing walls.
| | 01:04 | Now before we start clicking onscreen,
I want to take a quick look at the
| | 01:09 | Options bar as well, because here
we're going to see that we can tell each of
| | 01:14 | our sketch lines whether or
not they should define slope.
| | 01:17 | Now many roofs are actually sloping
roofs and so by checking this box, the
| | 01:22 | sketch we draw will actually behave
kind of like a hinge, so that sketch line
| | 01:26 | will actually define a plane that's sloping.
| | 01:29 | We also can define overhangs, so
often there are overhangs associated with
| | 01:34 | pitched roofs, and finally we have the
same extend into wall core that you may
| | 01:39 | have seen if you did the Adding Floors movie.
| | 01:41 | So this just makes the sketch line
interact with the core of the wall.
| | 01:45 | So what I want to do for the
first example is go ahead and leave
| | 01:48 | Defines slope turned on.
| | 01:50 | I'm going to leave the overhang
set to 2 feet, as you see it here,
| | 01:53 | make sure the Boundary Line is chosen,
make sure the Pick Walls is chosen, and
| | 01:57 | I'm going to select this wall over here.
| | 01:59 | Now be careful when you pick;
because of the overhang, the sketch line is
| | 02:04 | actually going to be drawn outside of
the wall, naturally at 2 feet away, like
| | 02:08 | the overhang indicates.
| | 02:10 | And if you move the mouse slightly,
you're going to see that dashed line appear
| | 02:14 | on either the left or right.
| | 02:15 | So I want to make sure that that
dashed line is actually appearing on the
| | 02:18 | outside of the wall, because I
want the overhang to be outside.
| | 02:22 | Now when I do that, I get a sketch line,
| | 02:24 | I get the familiar flip grip - which if
I accidentally pick on the wrong side,
| | 02:28 | you can see it's pretty easy to flip it over
to the other side, so not too big of a deal -
| | 02:33 | and we get this little triangular
indicator, which lets us know that this
| | 02:37 | line is defining slope.
| | 02:39 | And in fact, we can even click on the
Temporary Dimension, and we can see that
| | 02:43 | this is a 6 119, it's nearly 7.
| | 02:46 | It was defaulting to 7 a minute
ago, but it's a 7 and 12 pitch.
| | 02:51 | So we can change that to anything we like.
| | 02:54 | For instance, if I made that 4, it
would be a 4 and 12 pitch, so I can drop the
| | 02:57 | pitch down slightly.
| | 02:59 | I'm going to click over here and
do the same thing, make that 4.
| | 03:04 | And then if I want to create a hip
roof, I could keep making sloping
| | 03:10 | edges around the space.
| | 03:12 | In other words, if I click right here,
and also make that 4, what I am basically
| | 03:17 | defining is a hip roof.
| | 03:19 | Let me just go ahead and do that
on all four sides. Click Modify.
| | 03:25 | I don't want a lot of redundant edges
over here. I want to keep this one
| | 03:28 | really simple, clean it up
like so with my Trim tool.
| | 03:33 | And what I've really got is
these four slope-defining edges.
| | 03:38 | Think of this as a hinge: So you
are going to have a plane hinging at
| | 03:41 | this point, sloping up;
| | 03:43 | hinging at this point, sloping up.
| | 03:45 | Where they intersect, you'll get a
bridge line running along the diagonal.
| | 03:49 | So let's go ahead and see what this looks like.
| | 03:51 | Let me click the Finish, and you can
see here in Roof Plan view very clearly,
| | 03:57 | what we were just talking about;
| | 03:58 | here is our ridge lines,
here's our top peak up here.
| | 04:02 | But it's probably a little bit easier to
see this in either Section or Elevation.
| | 04:06 | So what I'm going to do is scroll down,
and take a look at the South Elevation,
| | 04:11 | and you can see the pitch right there.
| | 04:14 | If you look at this in either the East
or West elevation, you can see it there.
| | 04:19 | And of course if we look at
in 3D, we can see it, like so.
| | 04:22 | Now of course, this hip roof doesn't
really match the layout of the building, so
| | 04:26 | what we're going to do is actually modify it.
| | 04:29 | So we can select it in any view, and
you'll get this Edit Footprint button.
| | 04:35 | Now in the Adding Floors movie, I
didn't show this, but it works exactly
| | 04:38 | the same with floors:
| | 04:39 | So if you select an existing floor or
roof, you can choose Edit Footprint, and
| | 04:44 | that takes you back to the sketch.
| | 04:46 | Now, I could work right here in 3D and
continue to make changes to this, or I
| | 04:52 | could go back to the Roof Plan view,
whatever view is convenient for you.
| | 04:55 | Now, what I'm going to do is go back
to Boundary Line, back to Pick Walls,
| | 05:00 | and I'm going to turn off Defines slope
this time, and I'm going to pick here and here.
| | 05:07 | So you notice how that
automatically trimmed up the corners for me.
| | 05:12 | Now I'd get a sort of odd roof if I
were to finish right now, because I have
| | 05:16 | slope-defining lines intersecting non-
slope-defining lines in strange ways.
| | 05:20 | What I'm actually going to do is select
this one, hold down the Ctrl key, which
| | 05:24 | allows me to add to the selection, and
I'm going to pick the other one across
| | 05:28 | the way, and I'm going to uncheck Defines slope.
| | 05:32 | When you do that, that's going to
make this line and this line a gable end.
| | 05:38 | So when I click Finish, I get quite a
different roof out of the final sketch.
| | 05:43 | So a footprint roof can
actually do a variety of things.
| | 05:47 | Let's go ahead and do one more example.
| | 05:50 | This one, I'll do a totally new roof.
| | 05:53 | Now because I'm in 3D, Revit will ask me,
well, at what level do you want this
| | 05:58 | roof to be associated with?
| | 05:59 | Now, it's suggesting the highest level,
which is logical of course, but because
| | 06:04 | I actually have two roof levels, I'm
going to drop that down one level, and I'm
| | 06:08 | going to say I really want this one to be
on the low roof level, not the high one.
| | 06:12 | So I'm going to say Yes,
| | 06:14 | Boundary Line, Pick Walls, I'll make a
slope-defining line here, and then I'll
| | 06:20 | turn off Defines slope and pick here and
here, and then finally I'll draw just a
| | 06:28 | plain old line from here to here.
| | 06:31 | So I've created just sort of a simple
rectangle with only one slope-defining edge.
| | 06:36 | Now it's pretty steep at 7 and 12, so
I'm going to click on that, and let's make
| | 06:40 | it 2 and 12, click Finish, and looks like
I've got a little gap there. Let's fix that.
| | 06:45 | Just use the Trim tool.
| | 06:47 | That's going to happen sometimes when
you're working in 3D, so to remedy that,
| | 06:51 | you might want work in Floor Plan, and
then you'll get a better look at things.
| | 06:54 | But that's a simple shed roof.
| | 06:56 | So the same footprint roof can give us
a hip roof, it can give us a gable roof,
| | 07:00 | it can give us a shed roof, it can even
give us a totally flat roof, but we will
| | 07:03 | look at that in another movie.
| | 07:05 | So there is a couple of different
shapes and modifications we can make, but
| | 07:08 | this gives you a little bit of an
idea of how you can get started using a
| | 07:12 | footprint roof.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with extrusion roofs| 00:00 | A Footprint roof is often the easiest way
to create the most common forms of roofs
| | 00:03 | and offer the simplicity of
being to draw them in Plan view.
| | 00:06 | Extrusion roofs allow us to sketch the
profile of a roof rather than its footprint.
| | 00:11 | So these are more suitable for more
complex forms, like barrel vaults or
| | 00:15 | undulating forms and so on.
| | 00:16 | So let's take a look at a simple
extrusion roof here in this dataset.
| | 00:21 | To create an Extrusion roof, we
actually work in a plane other than Plan view.
| | 00:27 | So I'm looking at a three-dimensional
view, and I'm going to hold down my Shift
| | 00:30 | key and just kind of drag with my
wheel to spin this thing around.
| | 00:34 | And I have this little exit way over here.
| | 00:37 | Now let's assume that the designer
wanted to not only put a little covering
| | 00:40 | over that, but they wanted to have a
little bit of fun with it and make it
| | 00:42 | something freeform.
| | 00:43 | So this is where we might to
choose to do an Extrusion roof.
| | 00:47 | To draw this Extrusion roof, we're
actually going to work on the surface of the wall.
| | 00:53 | So the wall that I have pre-
highlighted right there, we need to work on that
| | 00:56 | surface, rather than a Floor Plan view.
| | 00:59 | Now I could work directly in 3D, but
it's actually going to be a lot more
| | 01:02 | convenient to work in Elevation.
| | 01:04 | So this is the West elevation, and
I'll zoom in on the wall in question.
| | 01:12 | So let's go ahead and start an Extrusion roof.
| | 01:16 | To get there, we need to use the
dropdown portion of the Roof button and then
| | 01:21 | do Roof by Extrusion.
| | 01:25 | And the first thing that Revit
will say is, well, it'll recognize that we
| | 01:29 | are not working in a floor plan anymore and
so it will say, well, you need to do a sketch.
| | 01:33 | This is a sketch-based object.
| | 01:35 | What plane do you want to do your sketching in?
| | 01:37 | Because remember, they are just two-dimensional.
| | 01:39 | So they just work on 2D planes.
| | 01:41 | So we need to indicate a plane
somewhere that we want to do our sketching.
| | 01:45 | Now, if we had a plane predefined, we
could choose off the list, but there are no
| | 01:49 | choices there so that's not going to work.
| | 01:51 | So why don't we just go with what it's
offering us here and choose Pick a plane.
| | 01:56 | When you do that, you can move your
mouse around onscreen, and you'll see how
| | 01:59 | it will highlight pretty much any geometry.
| | 02:02 | And what I want to do is just
highlight that wall right there.
| | 02:06 | So basically I'm just telling Revit, I'm
going to work on that surface of that wall.
| | 02:10 | Now, the next question it'll
say, all right, great. I got that.
| | 02:14 | That's the surface you want to draw on,
but what about the height of the roof?
| | 02:16 | What level should I associate it with?
| | 02:19 | And it automatically suggests your top
level, and in this particular project
| | 02:22 | there is only Level 1 and Level 2.
| | 02:24 | So that ought to do the
trick. I'll go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:26 | So next, I'm in Sketch mode.
| | 02:29 | So again, everything grays out, and
unlike our Footprint roof that we saw in the
| | 02:34 | Adding Roofs movie, we don't have any
Pick Walls in this case, because we're not
| | 02:38 | working in Plan view, we're doing an extrusion.
| | 02:40 | So we just draw the shape.
| | 02:42 | Now, we can draw any shape we like.
| | 02:43 | Let's have a little fun with this.
| | 02:45 | And let's let this also be our first
time that we actually look at an arc in Revit.
| | 02:50 | Drawing arcs works pretty the same way,
no matter what tool we're working in, so
| | 02:54 | we're doing it here in the context of a roof,
but you can use the same technique to
| | 02:57 | draw any kind of arc shapes.
| | 02:59 | So basically what you do is you click
anywhere for your starting point of your
| | 03:03 | arc, and then anywhere for
your ending point of your arc.
| | 03:07 | And then you can see the arc will
appear, and your next click is determining
| | 03:12 | essentially the radius. So it's somewhere along
the curvature of the arc itself and you pick a point,
| | 03:19 | and that gives you the radius.
| | 03:20 | Now, you could stop here and just do
that single curve, or we could go in and
| | 03:26 | create a second curve.
| | 03:27 | And notice when you do, Revit will
even look for things like tangential
| | 03:31 | relationships and so on.
| | 03:33 | You could switch to Lines, and you
could draw additional shapes, starting at
| | 03:40 | that end point, maybe going out
horizontal, and whatever you want to do.
| | 03:43 | So just to show you that it doesn't
have to be just one shape; it can actually
| | 03:48 | be multiple shapes.
| | 03:50 | The thing that's very different about
this sketch versus either the floor sketch
| | 03:54 | or the footprint roof sketch that we've
looked at previously is that this sketch
| | 03:58 | is not a close sketch.
| | 04:01 | Do not come and draw it
around and make the total form.
| | 04:05 | That will actually generate an error.
| | 04:06 | So in this case you want to
leave it open-ended like it is now.
| | 04:10 | And when I click Finish, the reason for
that is, you see how the thickness gets
| | 04:14 | applied anyway? That's because in this
case I'm using the Generic 12'' roof.
| | 04:19 | And so the 12 inches gets determined
by the thickness of the roof material.
| | 04:23 | That's why we didn't need to sketch that.
| | 04:25 | Now, it looks a little odd here what
happened, and it's a little easier to
| | 04:29 | understand in 3D view.
| | 04:30 | I'm not really sure why Revit always does this,
but it always goes the depth of your building.
| | 04:36 | It just sort of has to assume something,
so rather than ask us another question,
| | 04:39 | they just make an assumption.
| | 04:41 | And in my opinion, they always assume
poorly, because I always have to come over
| | 04:44 | here and select this and make adjustments.
| | 04:47 | Now, I can do this manually with
these little control handles at the end.
| | 04:51 | I can type in numbers, make that 55 feet.
| | 04:55 | I can pull this one all the
way out here, make that 10 feet.
| | 05:03 | I guess that's not a good value.
| | 05:08 | Let me spin this around.
| | 05:16 | If I can get it to a good angle, what I
can show you is this may actually be
| | 05:20 | the design you want where it sits away from the
building, maybe it's held up by some structure,
| | 05:24 | but if you wanted to actually attach the
building, we can use our Align tool for that.
| | 05:28 | So I'm going to go to Align, and
what's really neat about Align is it
| | 05:32 | actually works here in 3D.
| | 05:33 | So I'm going to click the face of the
wall, and then you see how it'll actually
| | 05:38 | let me highlight the face of the roof object.
| | 05:41 | And then it will just go
ahead and stretch that for me.
| | 05:44 | So instead of my struggling with the grips
there, the Align will do a much better job.
| | 05:49 | So there you have it:
That's an Extrusion roof.
| | 05:51 | You can use it for any similar type
shape: barrel vaults or undulating forms
| | 05:56 | like this, and simple
sketch, and you're good to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Roof modifications and examples| 00:00 | As you sketch elements like roofs and
floors, the geometry you create will often
| | 00:03 | maintain associative
relationships to the surrounding geometry.
| | 00:06 | For example, if you use the Pick Walls
option to create your sketch lines, the
| | 00:10 | shape of your roof or floor will
change automatically if the walls move.
| | 00:14 | This is only one example.
| | 00:15 | There are other modifications that
we can employ to create intelligent
| | 00:19 | relationships among the
various parts from our model.
| | 00:21 | In this movie we'll highlight some of
those topics, and we'll also explore a few
| | 00:24 | other miscellaneous roof-making techniques.
| | 00:27 | Some of these we've already seen,
so it's more like a summary.
| | 00:29 | We have a gable roof here.
We have a hip roof.
| | 00:32 | These are both done with footprint roofs.
| | 00:33 | So is this shed roof over
here is also a footprint roof.
| | 00:37 | Let's do something with the shed roof
here at the end though, to make it match
| | 00:40 | what's going on here and
here with these two roofs here.
| | 00:43 | Notice that the walls are actually
following the shape of that gable roof, but
| | 00:48 | here in the shed, they clearly are not.
| | 00:50 | This is exactly a pretty easy change to make.
| | 00:53 | I'm going to highlight one of the walls,
| | 00:55 | press my Tab key to
Chain select all four walls.
| | 01:00 | Now remember, it's been a while since
we've done Chain select, if you've been
| | 01:02 | following the movies in order.
| | 01:04 | So don't move your mouse away, because
if you do, you haven't selected anything.
| | 01:08 | You've got to pre-highlight one wall,
Tab, then click to get all four walls.
| | 01:13 | Now they're actually selected.
| | 01:15 | Then over here on the Ribbon,
you can choose Attach Top/Base.
| | 01:17 | When we click that tool, it will
prompt us to select something in the model.
| | 01:23 | And I'll just go ahead and select the
roof, and you'll see the walls jump up and
| | 01:27 | attach themselves to the roof.
| | 01:29 | Now what's important about that is we
talked about these relationships being
| | 01:33 | associative and maintained.
| | 01:34 | So this roof was drawn with the Pick
Walls option, like the roofs we did in the
| | 01:41 | previous couple of movies.
| | 01:42 | If I were to move this wall, you'll
notice that the shape of that roof
| | 01:47 | moves along with it.
| | 01:49 | Furthermore, if I were to take this
roof and actually scroll down here
| | 01:53 | and adjust its slope,
| | 01:55 | so instead of a 3'/12'' maybe I make it
a 5'/12'' and go ahead and click Apply,
| | 02:00 | you'll notice that that new
attachment we just made of the walls
| | 02:04 | stays maintained as well.
| | 02:05 | So there's sort of this circular
relationship between the walls driving the shape of
| | 02:10 | the roof and the roof
driving the height of the walls.
| | 02:13 | So those two work together.
| | 02:15 | Now let's direct our attention
over here to these two flat roofs.
| | 02:19 | A flat roof is also
generated by a footprint roof.
| | 02:22 | So we draw the footprint roof and to
make it a flat roof, we simply make none of
| | 02:27 | the sketch lines slope-defining.
| | 02:30 | So I'm going to select this
roof, choose Edit Footprint.
| | 02:34 | You can see the four sketch lines.
| | 02:37 | And if you were to click on any of
them, none of them have Defines Slope.
| | 02:41 | You tell that just by looking, because
none of them have that little triangle symbol.
| | 02:44 | So in order to create a flat roof,
that's all you have to do is you sketch your
| | 02:49 | footprint, and you just make
none of the edges slope-defining.
| | 02:53 | But I've taken this roof
and taken it a step further.
| | 02:57 | Notice when I pre-highlight it, it's got those
four red, little, squared handles at the corners.
| | 03:02 | These are little shape handles
that are associated with flat roofs.
| | 03:06 | You won't get those if you pre-
highlight a roof that has slope-defining edges.
| | 03:11 | So if you look at the roofs that
actually have slope-defining edges,
| | 03:15 | when you pre-highlight them, they
don't show any of those little squares at
| | 03:18 | the corners, and furthermore, if you
select them, the only tool that you'll see
| | 03:22 | here is Edit Footprint.
| | 03:23 | Contrast that to this one: If you select
it in addition to Edit Footprint, you see
| | 03:28 | this panel here where you
have all the shape editing tools.
| | 03:31 | So what shape editing tools allow you to do
is do things like add points, for example.
| | 03:36 | I'm going to add a point in this roof
and change the elevation to - I am going to
| | 03:41 | do something very dramatic, to
maybe 4 feet and click it right there.
| | 03:47 | When I click the Modify tool, you'll see that
| | 03:49 | that basically turned this roof into a pyramid.
| | 03:51 | So when I started this file, I
did something much more subtle.
| | 03:55 | And when I click on that roof, you've
got this tool is how you can get in there
| | 04:00 | and actually modify these points after the fact.
| | 04:03 | So the Modify Sub Elements.
| | 04:05 | If I click on one of those little
squares, as you can see that one set at 4''
| | 04:10 | and this one set at 0''.
| | 04:12 | So there's a very subtle, little
drainage slope going on in this roof.
| | 04:16 | Now, if you want you 4 feet and the
pyramid shape, you can certainly do that.
| | 04:20 | So by actually adding these points,
you can sculpt a pretty dramatic roof.
| | 04:24 | Now what I'm going to do is actually
undo the placement of that point, and I'm
| | 04:29 | going to go to a section view, because
I want to show you one more thing about
| | 04:33 | this modification that I made.
| | 04:35 | So remember, at this side of the roof - let
me just show you Modify Sub Elements again -
| | 04:41 | the point is that 4'', and at this
side of the roof it's only at 0''.
| | 04:46 | But furthermore, what we've done here -
let me zoom in even closer - is you'll
| | 04:52 | notice that the insulation component
that's used on the roof here is actually
| | 04:56 | thicker on this side than
it is over here on this side.
| | 04:59 | So I'm going to select this roof.
| | 05:02 | You'll notice that instead of using the
Generic-12'' roof that we've been using
| | 05:06 | in other movies this one is actually a more
complicated roof that has Metal Deck and EPDM.
| | 05:12 | And I'm going to edit its type.
| | 05:14 | Now, when I edit its type, I
can then edit the structure.
| | 05:17 | And if you recall the movies on
creating walls, we looked at a similar dialog to
| | 05:22 | this when we were looking at the wall structure.
| | 05:24 | Like walls, the roof has a core with
a structural component, in this
| | 05:28 | case Metal Deck, and then it has
some Insulation, and then a Finish
| | 05:32 | material, the EPDM.
| | 05:33 | The Insulation component has a check
box right here which makes it Variable.
| | 05:38 | I want to summarize all that parts and
pieces here, because there is a lot of
| | 05:42 | moving parts to make this work.
| | 05:44 | To do this technique that I'm
showing here, you need three things.
| | 05:47 | You need to create a footprint
roof with no Slope Defining edges.
| | 05:52 | Next, you need to go into the shape editing
tools and add points at different Z heights.
| | 05:58 | In my case, I did 0 and 4 inches.
| | 06:00 | It doesn't matter how much;
| | 06:01 | you've just got to have different heights.
| | 06:03 | Then finally, you need to edit the
structure of the roof assembly and make one
| | 06:09 | of the components variable.
| | 06:10 | Typically, that's going to be your
rigid Insulation, because you'd want to
| | 06:13 | keep your structure flat like I have
here, and have the installation taper to
| | 06:18 | allow for drainage.
| | 06:19 | So, if that's the kind of roof
structure that you need, those of the tools that
| | 06:24 | you have that you can use to accommodate that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with slope arrows| 00:00 | Typically when you create a footprint
roof, you're going to use slope-defining
| | 00:03 | edges to determine the slope the roof.
| | 00:05 | What do you do if the direction of the
slope does not run parallel to one of
| | 00:08 | the edges of your roof?
| | 00:09 | Well, in that case you can use slope
arrows to indicate the slope of your roof.
| | 00:13 | In this movie, we are going to
take a look at slope arrows.
| | 00:15 | The file I have onscreen is called
slope arrows, and I am looking at a few
| | 00:19 | simple examples, and what we'll do is
we'll start with the one over here on the
| | 00:23 | left, and we will make a really
simple slope arrow modification.
| | 00:27 | So again, the purpose of using a slope
arrow is simply when the slope does not
| | 00:31 | run parallel to any one of the edges.
| | 00:33 | So if I were to edit the footprint of
this roof, if I change any one of these
| | 00:38 | edges to slope-defining,
it makes that edge a hinge.
| | 00:41 | It runs the slope along that direction.
| | 00:44 | But what if the slope actually
runs diagonally across the building
| | 00:49 | from corner-to-corner?
| | 00:50 | Then I can't really use a
sloped edge to indicate that.
| | 00:53 | I need to do another technique.
| | 00:55 | And that's where a slope arrow might be handy.
| | 00:57 | So over here on the Ribbon,
Boundary Line was what we looked at when we
| | 01:02 | actually created roofs.
| | 01:03 | In this case, we are going to choose
Slope Arrow, and then it defaults to drawing
| | 01:07 | it by a line, which is what I will do,
and I am going to simply snap an end
| | 01:12 | point to this corner and drag all the
way across the diagonal of the square to
| | 01:17 | the opposite corner, and that's a slope arrow.
| | 01:21 | Now what can you do with a slope arrow?
| | 01:23 | Once you have it, I am going to select
it and you direct your attention over to
| | 01:26 | the Properties palette.
| | 01:27 | What happens is Revit can determine the
slope along that arrow in one of two ways.
| | 01:32 | The default behavior is to specify the
height of the arrow at its tail and then
| | 01:38 | an offset from that height at its head.
| | 01:41 | So, in other words, the default right
here says the height of the tail, meaning
| | 01:45 | this end of the arrow here, and
it's a little tough to see, but if I
| | 01:48 | pre-highlight it, it's a little easier to see.
| | 01:51 | Notice that the arrowhead is on the
right side and on the left side we are
| | 01:55 | seeing the tail of the arrow.
| | 01:57 | So down at the tail it's set at 0, and
then the default behavior is to rise up
| | 02:02 | 10 feet above that by the
time it gets to the arrowhead.
| | 02:05 | Now that would make a really steep
slope, and actually I am going to go ahead
| | 02:08 | and leave that, because it will be a
very dramatic effect, and we will be able
| | 02:11 | to see very clearly what's happened.
| | 02:12 | Now the other alternative we have is we
can actually define it by slope instead.
| | 02:17 | If you did that, it would turn all
this off, and you could just put in your
| | 02:20 | typical rise over run slope instead.
| | 02:23 | I am going to go back to Height at Tail,
and I will leave all the defaults, go
| | 02:27 | ahead and apply that, and
then I am going to click Finish.
| | 02:30 | What you'll see is the slope arrow
ran along this way, and it actually is
| | 02:35 | determining the plane of the slope.
| | 02:38 | If it's not real clear to you I am
going to go ahead and orbit this a little,
| | 02:42 | holding down the Shift key and dragging
with the wheel, and you can kind of see
| | 02:48 | that it's sloping in all three
directions. Like that view maybe shows it best.
| | 02:52 | So, the top edge of each
wall follows a different slope.
| | 02:57 | Sometimes you see churches with a roof
like this, or something along those lines.
| | 03:01 | Now let's do a similar example.
| | 03:04 | What happens if you add
more than one slope arrow?
| | 03:07 | So I am going to just tilt my view
back down a little, so I can have a better
| | 03:10 | look, and I will select this guy right
here, edit the footprint, and I'm going
| | 03:16 | to add a slope arrow.
| | 03:18 | Actually, this time what I am going to
do first is just - I will do a boundary
| | 03:22 | line which I am going to erase, but I
just want to draw the diagonal, just to
| | 03:26 | kind of give me something to work with,
and then I will add a slope arrow from
| | 03:30 | here to the midpoint.
| | 03:32 | Now I don't want to leave this
boundary line, because Revit will complain,
| | 03:36 | because it won't understand
what to do with the sketch.
| | 03:38 | So I am going to just select that and delete it.
| | 03:40 | But you see how that gave me the
ability to draw the slope arrow nice and
| | 03:43 | clean along the diagonal?
| | 03:45 | I am going to select it, and I am going
to use the same settings, but I'll drop
| | 03:49 | it down a little bit this time.
| | 03:50 | Let's go down to 5 feet and apply that.
| | 03:53 | Then this time I am going to mirror
that slope arrow, and I am using the
| | 03:57 | mirror along an axis.
| | 03:59 | So I am going to draw the axis from
here to here, and that will actually draw a
| | 04:04 | mirrored copy of that slope
arrow facing the other one.
| | 04:07 | Let me zoom in a little bit here.
| | 04:08 | So you can see we have one slope arrow
pointing this way, another one pointing this way.
| | 04:13 | They started 0 down here and here, and
they both end up at 5 feet in the middle.
| | 04:19 | So what that's actually going to do is
something similar to the guy over here,
| | 04:23 | except that we are going end up
with a ridge along this diagonal here.
| | 04:27 | Let's go ahead and click Finish,
and you can see that that gives us a
| | 04:30 | ridgeline, because that really defined
two diagonal planes now, and it looks
| | 04:38 | something like that.
| | 04:41 | Now you can actually get even more
complex still, and I've already kind of done
| | 04:45 | all the work on this one, and I am just
going to show you what I did here, but
| | 04:50 | here is a roof with a couple crickets,
and those crickets are defined with
| | 04:53 | slope arrows as well.
| | 04:55 | I am just going to select on it, go to
Edit Footprint, and I will just you where
| | 04:59 | the slope arrows are.
| | 05:01 | To make this one work, I had to actually
break this sketch line into several pieces.
| | 05:07 | You can see that as I
highlight my mouse over there.
| | 05:10 | So there is actually several
sketch lines underneath there.
| | 05:13 | I used the Split tool for that.
| | 05:15 | You just split it at a point
in each of those locations.
| | 05:18 | And then I drew my slope arrows, and
if I click on one of those, it goes from
| | 05:24 | 0 just up 6 inches.
| | 05:25 | So it's just a small amount. And
then I mirrored it over here, and then I
| | 05:29 | copied those over there.
| | 05:30 | So it took a little bit of effort,
but otherwise it was exactly the same
| | 05:33 | procedure that we just used over here
and when you finish it, it ends up just
| | 05:37 | tilting those sloping edges up just a touch.
| | 05:39 | Now the one thing I want to point out
is if you tab in right here, right there
| | 05:44 | that's actually the roof edge and with
it highlighted there - let me actually
| | 05:49 | copy it to show you -
| | 05:53 | it doesn't have the little triangle;
| | 05:55 | that one is not slope defining.
| | 05:57 | Don't put a slope arrow right on top of a
slope-defining edge. Revit won't like that.
| | 06:02 | It will complain and bad things will happen.
| | 06:08 | Anyway, there you have it.
| | 06:09 | Those are slope arrows, so that gives
you the control to create unusually sloped
| | 06:13 | conditions when the slope
doesn't run parallel to a roof edge.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding openings| 00:00 | Once you have your basic geometry in
place - like walls, floors, and roofs - you
| | 00:03 | will begin the steady process of
refining your model as the design progresses.
| | 00:07 | In many cases, you will find that you
need to cut holes in some of these other
| | 00:10 | items, like simple passageways, or
shafts for stairs, or shafts for elevators
| | 00:15 | and equipment, or even
skylights for dormers and roofs.
| | 00:19 | In some cases, it might be easiest to just
edit the sketch to represent that penetration.
| | 00:23 | In other cases, you will want
to create an opening object.
| | 00:26 | Now, an opening object, there is a few
different kinds that Revit includes, and
| | 00:29 | they're basically all the same in the
sense that they're all these void objects.
| | 00:33 | And a void object you sketch in a
very similar way to a solid object.
| | 00:38 | The difference is the void interacts
with a solid object and actually cuts the
| | 00:42 | hole in the host solid object.
| | 00:44 | So let's go ahead and take a look.
| | 00:45 | Here I'm in my condominium project.
| | 00:47 | This file that I have onscreen is
called Shaft, and we're looking at the
| | 00:52 | elevator shaft in Section view, and you
can see the problem that I have right here.
| | 00:57 | If I move my mouse into the space,
tap my Tab key there for a moment, and
| | 01:02 | highlight the floor, the floor is
actually passed right through the elevator
| | 01:06 | shaft on all three levels.
| | 01:09 | Now, one option would certainly be that I
could select the floor, go ahead and click on it.
| | 01:13 | I could do Edit Boundary.
| | 01:15 | That would take me to Sketch mode.
| | 01:17 | Now, I want to point out one
thing if I were to do that.
| | 01:19 | Because I am in Section, Revit would
actually ask me to switch to a floor plan,
| | 01:23 | just because you can't edit the sketch
directly in Section, you'd actually have
| | 01:27 | to go to a Floor Plan view
and look down on the sketch.
| | 01:29 | I am going to cancel out of here,
because this wouldn't be a very practical
| | 01:33 | way to handle the problem I have, because I
would have to edit three separate sketches.
| | 01:38 | Furthermore, if the shape of the
elevator core changes, I would have to go back
| | 01:42 | later and edit three separate sketches.
| | 01:45 | So a more efficient way to do it
is to create a shaft opening, which
| | 01:48 | would automatically cut through all of the
parallel floors in one shot, with one object.
| | 01:54 | So let's go ahead and take a look at that.
| | 01:56 | To create a shaft, I do need to work in Plan.
| | 01:59 | So I am going to go to my Level 1 Floor Plan,
and I will zoom in on the elevator core.
| | 02:06 | Actually, I didn't like
the way I drew the shaft.
| | 02:08 | I wanted to do it to the outside of the walls
in retrospect, so now I get that opportunity.
| | 02:13 | On the Home tab, over here on the
Opening panel, you can see that we have
| | 02:16 | several different types of openings we
can create, and we are going to go with
| | 02:19 | the shaft opening for this example.
| | 02:21 | Now, when I click on that, we
are in a typical sketch mode.
| | 02:24 | The model grays out.
| | 02:26 | We've got a lot of similar
tools that we've seen before.
| | 02:28 | And while I could use Pick Walls,
for this example I am actually going to
| | 02:32 | just sketch the shape that I want, just using
a rectangle, just to show you an alternative.
| | 02:36 | So I am going to go over here and
snap to this end point, and I'll come over
| | 02:41 | here, and notice that Revit will find
the end point, even though it's more of an
| | 02:45 | apparent end point right
there and snap right there.
| | 02:49 | As soon as I draw the sketch, you
will see these little lock icons appear.
| | 02:52 | Now, it's not necessary that you
click these, but sometimes it can be a
| | 02:56 | pretty good idea, because if the shape
of the shaft should change, the walls
| | 03:00 | should move around,
| | 03:01 | these locks will actually allow the
sketch to adjust according to the new
| | 03:05 | locations of the walls they're locked to.
| | 03:07 | The only downside of that is sometimes
it can generate error messages if Revit
| | 03:12 | is unable to continue to
maintain the relationship.
| | 03:14 | The worst-case scenario there is
you have to click a button that says
| | 03:17 | Remove Constraints.
| | 03:18 | So it won't delete your
whole object or ruin your model;
| | 03:20 | it will just mean that you will
have to go back and fix it manually.
| | 03:23 | Not that big of a deal.
| | 03:24 | So I am going to go ahead and click
Finish, and let's take a look at what we've got.
| | 03:28 | So I am going to switch back
over here to my Section view.
| | 03:32 | You can see the shaft is selected and
highlighted, and it's kind of in the
| | 03:36 | middle of the building.
| | 03:37 | So I need to adjust it slightly, and
I will do that with these little grip
| | 03:42 | handles, like so, and I want to make
sure that it's tall enough to cut through
| | 03:47 | the entire elevator.
| | 03:48 | Now, at the moment, you're like, yeah,
but it's covering up everything.
| | 03:51 | That only appears that way
when you have the shaft selected.
| | 03:54 | As soon as I deselect it by clicking
somewhere else, you can see how everything
| | 03:58 | is now very nice and clean.
| | 04:00 | That shaft is cutting through all
of the horizontal objects in its way.
| | 04:04 | It didn't cut through the walls.
| | 04:05 | So it totally ignored the walls.
| | 04:07 | So the walls are nice and clean, going
vertically up, showing us a nice clean
| | 04:10 | shaft, but it did cut through
all of my floor slabs in one shot.
| | 04:16 | So let's take a look at
another example, a similar example.
| | 04:19 | I have another file here called Dormer.
| | 04:23 | Now, this kind of an opening is
designed specifically to cut through roofs, to
| | 04:27 | create dormer openings.
| | 04:29 | So we can see that tool right here.
| | 04:31 | I am going to zoom in a
little bit, get a better look.
| | 04:35 | Now, the dormer structure I've
created is nothing more than just a simple
| | 04:39 | roof and three walls.
| | 04:41 | There is not anything special about that.
| | 04:43 | There is no dormer object.
| | 04:44 | And I want to do a little bit of cleanup
before we get started with the dormer opening.
| | 04:48 | The problem I have here is this roof
just kind of intersects this roof, but they
| | 04:52 | don't clean up very nice.
| | 04:54 | So we are going to go to the Modify tab,
and I want to use this Join/Unjoin Roof,
| | 04:59 | but if you look at the picture here,
you can see it's going to require me to
| | 05:02 | click the back edge of the roof,
and I can't see that right now.
| | 05:06 | It's back there somewhere.
| | 05:07 | So let me temporarily
change this view to Wireframe.
| | 05:11 | That will reveal that back edge.
| | 05:13 | Then I will click this tool, select that back
edge, and then click anywhere on this plane.
| | 05:21 | You see how it highlights the
front plane that's facing me.
| | 05:23 | That will actually cut the entire back
off that roof and make it match the slope
| | 05:28 | of this current roof.
| | 05:29 | Now, everything looks terrible.
| | 05:31 | So let's go back to Hidden Line, and we've
got a little problem there with our walls.
| | 05:35 | I am going to jump to my roof plan,
just real quick, to clean that up.
| | 05:39 | I can do that with these little grips,
easily enough; just drag them down.
| | 05:47 | Return to my 3D view, and
that's all nice and clean.
| | 05:51 | The next step that I need to do is
actually cut the hole in the roof right now,
| | 05:54 | because you will see that
there's no hole here in the roof.
| | 05:56 | So that's going to be the dormer opening.
| | 05:58 | So we will go to the Home tab.
| | 06:00 | We will click on Dormer.
| | 06:02 | The first thing that it will ask me to
do is to select the roof that I want to
| | 06:05 | actually cut, and that's
going to be this roof right here.
| | 06:08 | That puts me in Sketch mode, and then I
can begin selecting the objects that I
| | 06:12 | want to generate the sketch from.
| | 06:14 | So I am going to select the roof and then
the walls that make up my dormer, like so.
| | 06:23 | Now that one, you can see it kind of
went to the inside face of the wall.
| | 06:26 | So all I have to do is just click the
little flip grip, and that will flip it around.
| | 06:29 | I use my Trim tool, like we've done
with other sketches, clean things up, and
| | 06:35 | then go ahead and click Finish.
| | 06:36 | Now, when I do, unfortunately,
I have generated an error.
| | 06:40 | I want you to see this error, because
you're going to see these inevitably in
| | 06:43 | your own work in Revit. So these do occur.
| | 06:46 | Definitely read them. Try and
understand what they're telling you.
| | 06:49 | What Revit is telling us here is that
this roof can no longer join to this
| | 06:53 | vertical wall down here. Now, why is that?
| | 06:56 | Well, the roof has somewhat of an
overhang, and what's probably happening is
| | 07:01 | this opening is overlapping
where that top of that wall is.
| | 07:05 | Now, the only choice I have
here is to unjoin the elements.
| | 07:08 | I don't really have any remedy other than that.
| | 07:10 | Now, the opening is cut in the roof,
and that's all fine, but let's go fix the
| | 07:14 | problem that we were just alerted to.
| | 07:16 | So the best way to do that is going to
be to go take a look at the section, and
| | 07:22 | let's zoom in on the problem area.
| | 07:25 | And as you can see, this wall kind of
overlaps slightly with that wall, and then
| | 07:30 | the hole kind of cuts right there.
| | 07:32 | So that's really what caused the whole problem.
| | 07:34 | So really, the simplest solution would
be to actually select this wall and move
| | 07:41 | it so that it no longer
intersects the other wall.
| | 07:44 | And I'll do that by just taking this
Temporary Dimension and maybe making that 3' 10''.
| | 07:48 | No, I've got to go a little bit more.
| | 07:51 | Let's do 3' 9'', and, like so.
| | 07:55 | That should take care of that, and now
I should be able to select this wall and
| | 07:59 | reattach it to the roof without any trouble.
| | 08:02 | If you don't like the amount of overhang,
you can go back and edit that sketch
| | 08:05 | and take care of that.
| | 08:08 | That's all there is to it.
| | 08:09 | Notice that the dormer has
updated itself when we moved that wall.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with stairs| 00:00 | Stairs are among the more
complex of our sketch-based object.
| | 00:03 | You sketch a plan representation of
the stair, and from that sketch, Revit
| | 00:06 | builds all the model geometry necessary.
| | 00:09 | The sketch lines are color coded to
indicate their different functions.
| | 00:12 | So, the riser lines are black, the
boundaries are green, which indicate the
| | 00:16 | edges of the stair and also
indicate any stringers you might have, and
| | 00:20 | there is a blue line that
indicates the path of the stair.
| | 00:23 | With the Run tool on the Ribbon, you
can quickly draw all of these elements
| | 00:26 | with just a few clicks.
| | 00:27 | Sometimes stairs can be a little tricky, but
with a little practice you get the hang of it.
| | 00:31 | So here I am in a version of the condo file.
| | 00:33 | The file is called simply
stairs in the Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:37 | We're going to go ahead, on the Home
tab, and on the Circulation panel,
| | 00:40 | click the Stairs tool.
| | 00:41 | This will take us to Sketch mode.
| | 00:44 | We'll see a lot of familiar tools
and a few that are unique to the stair.
| | 00:48 | Now, the first thing I'd like to
point out is stairs have fewer shapes.
| | 00:51 | We either draw them as straight or
curved, and you'd use curve if you're doing
| | 00:54 | like a spiral stair, or
something along those lines.
| | 00:57 | We're going to stick with
straight stairs in this case.
| | 00:59 | Now, I'm going to do a pretty typical
switchback stair here in the stair tower,
| | 01:03 | so it's going to go up half the
risers, and then it's going to turn with
| | 01:07 | landing and go up the rest.
| | 01:08 | Before I start clicking and sketching,
when you're working with stairs, it's
| | 01:12 | very important that you
check the properties first.
| | 01:15 | Now, the first properties we are
going to talk about are the Levels.
| | 01:17 | I want to just verify that I'm starting
at Level 2, and I'm going up to Level 3.
| | 01:22 | The reason this is important is if I
click the Edit Type button right here, and
| | 01:28 | scroll down, the type in this case is
called 7 inch maximum, 11 inch tread.
| | 01:34 | What that means is exactly what you see here.
| | 01:36 | The minimum tread depth
of this stair is 11 inches;
| | 01:40 | the maximum riser height is 7 inches.
| | 01:43 | So, we can do a smaller riser, and
we can do a bigger tread, but we can't
| | 01:46 | exceed these two limits.
| | 01:48 | So, Revit is going to take this number
here, this 7 inches, and it's going to
| | 01:52 | look at the distance between these two
levels, and it's going to figure out how
| | 01:54 | many risers we need.
| | 01:57 | That's going to be controlled down here.
| | 02:00 | So, if we want to try a different number
of risers, we can do that. Like I could
| | 02:04 | put in 16, for example.
| | 02:06 | But if I try to use that number, Revit
will complain and give me an error message.
| | 02:11 | It violates the rules
basically, that I just showed you.
| | 02:13 | It doesn't work with a maximum 7-inch riser.
| | 02:16 | So, 18 is basically the limit.
| | 02:19 | As you can see here, that gives me an
actual riser height of nearly 7 inches.
| | 02:23 | That's as close to 7 inches as
you're going to get without going over.
| | 02:27 | Now, the other thing I want to look at
here is the overall width of the stair.
| | 02:31 | I actually want my stair to be a
little wider than the default 3 feet.
| | 02:34 | So, I'm going to increase that to 4 feet.
| | 02:36 | Again, you can edit that later, but
it's easier to just do it ahead of time.
| | 02:40 | Now, the next thing is I don't
typically try to draw my stair in exactly
| | 02:44 | the right location.
| | 02:45 | What I typically do is just kind of click in
a convenient open space, and start drawing.
| | 02:53 | What I would like to point out to you
here, is it's a little difficult to see,
| | 02:57 | but there's this gray piece of text
following my cursor, and right now it says,
| | 03:02 | 11 risers created, 7 remaining, and
then it says 12, and then 13 and so on.
| | 03:07 | This is telling you how many risers you have.
| | 03:10 | So, what I want to do here in this case,
because I'm doing a switchback stair, is
| | 03:14 | I'm actually going to back up here to
where it says 9 risers, because I know
| | 03:18 | I've got 18 total, so I want to use up
half the risers for the first run of my
| | 03:24 | stair, and then I'm going to click my mouse.
| | 03:26 | Now, I mentioned the color coding.
| | 03:28 | You can see it here.
| | 03:29 | The green lines are your boundary, the
blue line is your path, and these black
| | 03:34 | lines are the risers themselves.
| | 03:36 | Now, let me zoom in just a little bit closer.
| | 03:40 | To create a landing, we
don't actually draw the landing.
| | 03:43 | Revit will do that for us.
| | 03:44 | All we need to do is indicate where we
want the next run of the stairs to start.
| | 03:49 | So, I'm going to kind of
come over here and click.
| | 03:53 | Then you'll see the little message,
telling me how many risers I have left.
| | 03:56 | As soon as I click past that rectangle,
you can see that I've used up all 18
| | 04:01 | risers, and there are zero remaining.
| | 04:02 | I'm going to click again.
| | 04:05 | Not only do I get the rest of that run
of stairs, but Revit also goes ahead and
| | 04:09 | fills in a landing for me.
| | 04:11 | Now, you can make some modifications to this
sketch after the fact. I'm going to zoom back out.
| | 04:17 | The most obvious modification that
we want to do is actually relocate it,
| | 04:21 | because it's just sort of
floating in space right now.
| | 04:24 | So, the easiest way to do that
is to just kind of move it around.
| | 04:26 | So, I'm going to select the entire
sketch with the window, click the Move tool,
| | 04:31 | pick the end point snap right here, and
snap that right to that end point there.
| | 04:36 | So, that will kind of get me started in
the right location, but the next thing I
| | 04:41 | want to do is I only want to
move this half of the stair.
| | 04:44 | So, I'm going to make another window
selection, like so, to highlight just that
| | 04:50 | half of the stair, and
that's all I want to move.
| | 04:53 | Now, I could use the Move tool again for
this, but I actually don't want to snap
| | 04:57 | it right to any geometry
that I have conveniently nearby.
| | 05:01 | I want it to be an offset off of this wall.
| | 05:04 | Now, I could do that really easily if
I had some temporary dimensions, but
| | 05:07 | they're not displaying.
| | 05:08 | It turns out that we've got this
button right here where we can force the
| | 05:11 | temporary dimensions to display,
simply by clicking on that button.
| | 05:15 | Now I have all the dimensions I could
need to go in and tell it exactly where I
| | 05:20 | want these sketch lines to move over to.
| | 05:22 | So, I'm going to edit that value right
there, and I'm going to make this 4 inches.
| | 05:29 | That's going to pull everything over
there, and basically lengthen the landing.
| | 05:34 | One last modification, if I want, is I
could make the landing a little deeper.
| | 05:40 | Again, you'll see that that's perfectly fine,
so whatever modifications that you need to do.
| | 05:45 | Before I get out of here, I just want
to verify, Revit will create railings for
| | 05:50 | us automatically, as a convenience;
it's not required, but it does it.
| | 05:53 | I'm going to click the Railing type, and
just verify the type of railing I have.
| | 05:58 | You might have several choices, so you
want to kind of choose the one that you want.
| | 06:02 | I'm going to stick with the default
Rectangular Handrail, and then I'm going to
| | 06:06 | go ahead and click to finish.
| | 06:10 | What you'll see is we've created the
stair, and not only that, but it's given us
| | 06:14 | some railings on each side of the
stair, and drawn it there in plan.
| | 06:19 | Let's take a look at it in section.
| | 06:20 | I can see it there in our section.
| | 06:26 | Now we could mirror and copy
that around elsewhere in the file.
| | 06:30 | So, there you have your
stair, complete with railings.
| | 06:33 | You can repeat the same process to
create other stairs, like, for example, down
| | 06:36 | here in the main lobby.
| | 06:37 | We can do a straight run stair running up there.
| | 06:40 | All you need to do in that is just use
the Run tool, click, and use up all 18
| | 06:45 | risers in two clicks.
| | 06:47 | For other floors, where you have the
switchback stair, you could just simply
| | 06:50 | copy the one we have around.
| | 06:52 | So, in this lobby here, I might
want just a simple, straight-run stair.
| | 06:57 | I'm going to return to
Level 1, here in the lobby.
| | 07:01 | The stair should remember most of the
settings that I already had configured.
| | 07:05 | So, we'll just verify that.
| | 07:06 | We're going up from Level
1 to Level 2. It's 4 feet.
| | 07:10 | It's 18 risers.
| | 07:11 | So, all I have to do is click, and this
time click all the way to the end, use
| | 07:15 | up all 18 risers in a single
run, select the entire stair,
| | 07:20 | activate the dimensions.
| | 07:22 | We'll place that at 4 inches, and
we'll go ahead and click Finish.
| | 07:29 | There we have our second stair.
| | 07:31 | Zoom out, take a look at the section,
and we do have to nudge it over a little
| | 07:36 | bit to make it meet up with the floor,
but I think I'll leave that to you as
| | 07:39 | an exercise.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with railings| 00:00 | When you create stairs, Revit
also creates a railing automatically.
| | 00:03 | Railings that are created
automatically with the stairs are considered
| | 00:06 | hosted railings, and the ones you create for
guardrails would be basically freestanding.
| | 00:10 | So, in this example, let's go ahead and
take a look at creating our own railings
| | 00:14 | from manual sketches.
| | 00:16 | I'm in a file called Railings.
| | 00:18 | It's a version of our office
building project that we've been looking at.
| | 00:23 | I have a stair over here
with its associated railings.
| | 00:27 | What I would like to do in this first
example is I want to take this existing
| | 00:30 | railing, and I want to edit its sketch.
| | 00:32 | I want to do that so that I can add a
little railing extension on the end to
| | 00:36 | accommodate code requirements.
| | 00:38 | So, I'm going to go ahead and click on
the Edit Path, and that will take me into
| | 00:42 | the sketch for this railing.
| | 00:45 | Then I'm going to go to the toolbox here
and click the Draw tool. We'll pick Line.
| | 00:50 | I'm going to start right at this
end point, go out this way 1 foot, go from this
| | 00:56 | end point, maybe down about 5 inches, and
then again, from this end point, I'll go
| | 01:00 | about 1 foot 6 inch.
| | 01:03 | Now, perhaps you're wondering why I
did not just simply extend this line.
| | 01:08 | Well, look carefully at these existing lines.
| | 01:11 | This is a sketch line.
| | 01:13 | That's a separate sketch line.
| | 01:14 | That's a separate sketch line.
| | 01:16 | The reason these two are separate sketch
lines is because this railing is a hosted railing.
| | 01:21 | It's attached to the underlying stair.
| | 01:23 | This sketch line follows the
slope of the stair in this location.
| | 01:28 | This sketch line stays flat, as does
this one and this one, to stay with that
| | 01:33 | landing, and then this guy is sloping as well.
| | 01:36 | So, what I want to do is actually make
sure that my little extensions here stay
| | 01:40 | flat and don't try and follow any
kind of the slope. We can do that;
| | 01:44 | we can override the default behavior
just to make sure by selecting on them.
| | 01:49 | Over here on the Options bar,
I can just force it to flat.
| | 01:53 | Now, you may or may not need to do this.
Revit might recognize that there's no
| | 01:57 | host there, and simply go flat.
| | 01:59 | But it doesn't hurt to just go ahead
and force them to flat just to be sure.
| | 02:03 | So, let's go ahead and finish, and you
can see there in plan that it has added
| | 02:08 | this extension on my railing.
| | 02:10 | But it might be a little nicer
to take a look at this in 3D.
| | 02:13 | So, let's go ahead open up the 3D view.
| | 02:17 | Then I'll just zoom in on this area
right here, and you can see what that's done.
| | 02:21 | Now, this particular railing has a guardrail
integral with it, the handrail and a guardrail.
| | 02:26 | So, you can see that both items are
turning the corner as we wrap around.
| | 02:30 | So, that's a pretty simple example.
| | 02:32 | Let's look at creating a
totally new railing from a sketch.
| | 02:36 | So, along this floor here, we don't
have any kind of a guardrail at all, and
| | 02:41 | that's sort of a hazard.
| | 02:42 | So, let's go ahead and
take care of that problem.
| | 02:43 | We'll go up here to Level 2,
and we'll zoom out a little bit.
| | 02:51 | You can see here, this is our floor
object, and I'm going to build this railing
| | 02:55 | relative to that existing floor.
| | 02:57 | So, I'm going to go over here to the
Railing tool, click on it, and instead of
| | 03:01 | doing Draw Lines this time, I'm
actually going to do the Pick Lines.
| | 03:06 | Now, what this will allow me
to do is I can put in an offset.
| | 03:09 | So, I'm going to go ahead and put in 2
inches, and you'll see here that you can
| | 03:16 | offset that up 2 inches or down 2 inches.
| | 03:18 | I'm going to go up, and then over this
case, I'm going to go over to the left.
| | 03:24 | Now, it looks pretty good right there,
but I just want to pan down here, and
| | 03:28 | notice that it's kind of going into the wall.
| | 03:30 | So, let's just zoom in on that area,
| | 03:33 | select this, just kind of drag
that back, just a touch, like so.
| | 03:39 | Then I'll do my Zoom
Previous. Take a look here.
| | 03:45 | Click Finish.
| | 03:47 | Then let's go back to our 3D
view, and see what we got there.
| | 03:51 | Now, because that railing, we did
not assign it to any kind of a host, it
| | 03:56 | automatically just stayed
flat throughout its length.
| | 03:59 | Now, if I click on it and I edit the
path, if this floor were sloping, like
| | 04:04 | maybe it was in a parking garage, and
you wanted the railing to follow the
| | 04:07 | sloping path in the parking garage,
you could actually click this button here
| | 04:11 | while you're in the railing sketch, and
choose Pick New Host, and then you'd be
| | 04:14 | able to select right on that floor.
| | 04:17 | That would keep the railing attached
to that floor, should the height of the
| | 04:20 | floor change, or the slope of
the floor change, and so on.
| | 04:22 | I'm going to cancel out of here.
| | 04:25 | That's a little bit of editing railing sketches.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with ceilings| 00:00 | Ceiling elements in Revit are similar to floors.
| | 00:02 | They are horizontal planes set at a
certain height above the finished floor, and
| | 00:05 | can even include layers of material
under construction, just like floors can.
| | 00:09 | You could choose from any common
types, like 2x4 ceiling grids or drywall
| | 00:13 | ceilings, or you can even create your own.
| | 00:14 | The fastest way to create a ceiling
is to use the Auto-Ceiling option.
| | 00:18 | This automatically creates a ceiling from
the surrounding walls that enclosed the space.
| | 00:22 | In cases where you don't have
surrounding walls, or if the walls don't
| | 00:26 | exactly match the shape of the
ceiling, you can sketch the ceiling using
| | 00:29 | familiar sketch-based tools.
| | 00:31 | So I'm here in our office building project,
the name of this file is called Ceilings,
| | 00:35 | and I'm currently looking
at the First Floor Plan.
| | 00:38 | Now, I'm going to go right into the
Ceiling tool and show you a common
| | 00:41 | error that you'll see.
| | 00:44 | Everyone makes this mistake as a beginner,
so I'll go ahead and make it on purpose.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to click Ceiling, I'm going to
pick a point, and I get an error message.
| | 00:53 | The reason is I'm working in a
Floor Plan, and I just created a ceiling
| | 00:56 | element, and it's above
my head, so I can't see it.
| | 01:00 | So what I'm going to do is get out of there.
| | 01:02 | I'll do undo with Ctrl+Z. What we need
to do as a first step when you want to
| | 01:08 | work on ceilings is actually go down in the
Ceiling Plans and double-click that Level 1.
| | 01:13 | This will be a much better
place to create a ceiling.
| | 01:15 | So let's go ahead and do it the right way now.
| | 01:17 | So I'm going to click on the Ceiling tool,
and before I actually pick any points
| | 01:21 | this time, I'm going to take a look over here.
| | 01:25 | I said there were a few different types.
| | 01:26 | So the template includes a 2 x 2
ceiling grid and a 2 x 4 ceiling grid.
| | 01:31 | I'm going to go ahead and choose a 2 x 4,
verify my ceiling height at 8 feet.
| | 01:36 | That will work fine for the offices.
| | 01:37 | And then I'm going to move my mouse
over here, and you'll see I get the little
| | 01:41 | no-can-do symbol out here.
| | 01:43 | But as soon as I move my mouse into
an enclosed space, because I have this
| | 01:47 | tool on automatically, by default,
this is going to automatically find those
| | 01:51 | boundaries, find those surrounding walls, and
create a ceiling for me with a single click.
| | 01:56 | It doesn't get much easier than that.
| | 01:58 | So I could just go into all of the
offices, and just like that, I could create
| | 02:04 | a bunch of ceilings.
| | 02:05 | Now, I probably don't want a big, ugly
2 x 4 ceiling in the conference room, so
| | 02:09 | I'm going to change my
type to a drywall ceiling.
| | 02:13 | I'm even going to increase the
ceiling height just a little bit.
| | 02:16 | I think I can accommodate 9 feet.
| | 02:19 | We'll go ahead and click in there.
| | 02:21 | Maybe the restrooms also have a drywall ceiling,
although I might not want it to be at 9 feet.
| | 02:26 | I probably should have
changed the height of that.
| | 02:30 | Just so you can see all three, I'll put a
2 x 2 over here in the break room. All right.
| | 02:37 | So what does that give us?
| | 02:38 | That's all the easy rooms.
| | 02:39 | Out here, we might have a ceiling as well,
but this is a double height space, and
| | 02:45 | this is doing something else, and
really we need a ceiling here that might just
| | 02:49 | match the underside of that floor.
| | 02:52 | We're not going to get away with
doing Pick ceiling in that area.
| | 02:55 | So we're going to do Sketch for that one.
| | 02:56 | So I'm going to go to the Ceiling tool
again, and this time, instead of clicking
| | 03:01 | Automatic Ceiling, I'm
going to do Sketch Ceiling.
| | 03:04 | I'll get all my familiar sketch-based tools.
| | 03:06 | I do want to verify the ceiling Height.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to stick with my 8 feet, or
actually, let's go ahead and make that 8'
| | 03:12 | 6", just for a little variety there.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to zoom in on this area, and
I'll start with a rectangle, from right
| | 03:23 | here to perhaps right about there.
| | 03:27 | Now, it's not really necessary
for me to go around the columns.
| | 03:31 | I mean, you could do that if you
want to, but the ceiling plane will just
| | 03:35 | intersect the columns, and it will look
fine in the Ceiling Plan, so it's really
| | 03:38 | not necessary to go to that degree of detail.
| | 03:40 | But I might want to make a little jog
right here to actually get out to the
| | 03:47 | edge of this floor.
| | 03:49 | I did that kind of by eye.
| | 03:55 | So if we zoom in, you can
see it's not quite right.
| | 03:58 | That's where my old friend, the Align
tool, will come in, and allow me to get
| | 04:01 | that to line up just perfectly.
| | 04:03 | Then we'll go ahead and trim that up,
do a Zoom Previous, and we'll trim that
| | 04:09 | up, and we'll click Finish.
| | 04:12 | So it's like any other sketch-
based object, and there you have it;
| | 04:15 | you've got that ceiling.
| | 04:16 | The other thing that you want to know
about ceilings is it did a pretty nice job
| | 04:20 | of guessing how we wanted those grids to
be oriented, but when you start putting
| | 04:24 | lights in here, this
orientation might not work for you.
| | 04:28 | You can easily shift the grid.
| | 04:30 | You can rotate the grid.
| | 04:31 | You can line them up with neighboring offices.
| | 04:33 | So let's just say for the sake of argument
that I want to move this entire grid half a tile.
| | 04:38 | All you do is click a single line on
the grid pattern. Go to your Move tool.
| | 04:44 | I'm going to kind of click out here and
just drag to 2 feet and then click again.
| | 04:48 | That will actually shift
the entire grid pattern.
| | 04:51 | Now, I could do that repeatedly for all
the other ceilings as well, or I could
| | 04:55 | just go back to my friend, the Align
tool, and then before I click this time,
| | 05:00 | I'm going to check this box right here,
Multiple Alignment, and that will allow
| | 05:04 | me to make this my boundary edge
and align several objects to it.
| | 05:10 | Now, you notice that it's
got the little lock icons.
| | 05:12 | If I actually clicked those, what will
happen is if I come back later and move
| | 05:19 | this, say 1' 6", it will
actually move both rooms together.
| | 05:24 | So sometimes you might
actually want to lock that alignment -
| | 05:27 | I'm going to undo that and bring it
back - but you might want to actually undo
| | 05:30 | that alignment if you want all
of those rooms to move as a unit.
| | 05:33 | The last thing I'd like to show you in
this movie here with regard to ceilings,
| | 05:37 | doesn't really have anything to do
with the ceiling grid itself, but since
| | 05:39 | we're talking about ceiling plans, we
probably ought to get some light fixtures in here.
| | 05:42 | That's just simply adding a component.
| | 05:45 | So the procedure is exactly like other
components that we've added elsewhere in
| | 05:49 | the training series
| | 05:50 | when we added toilet fixtures, and
when we added equipment, and so on.
| | 05:54 | I probably don't have any good light
fixtures to choose from in this file.
| | 05:59 | Well, I guess I'm wrong. There we are.
| | 06:02 | There are some light fixtures in here.
| | 06:03 | But just in case, if you don't see the
ones that you want, all you have to do,
| | 06:08 | remember, is click Load Family, and
go load them in from the library.
| | 06:11 | So these came from the out-of
-the-box library right here.
| | 06:15 | I'm going to go ahead and
just choose a 2 x 4 fixture.
| | 06:18 | And you see how it
actually is hosted to ceilings.
| | 06:21 | So you couldn't place it freestanding out here.
| | 06:23 | It won't allow that.
| | 06:25 | The only thing it doesn't really
do very nicely is it doesn't line up
| | 06:27 | perfectly with the grid.
| | 06:28 | So what I usually do is just sort of
drop it anywhere, and then I'll zoom in on
| | 06:33 | that room, and I'll use my
Align tool to get it lined up.
| | 06:41 | I want to turn off Multiple
Alignment this time, and to get it lined up.
| | 06:47 | You don't need to lock that, because it will
automatically stay attached to the ceiling.
| | 06:54 | So once I've got it in position
correctly for one of them, I can go to my Copy
| | 06:59 | tool, choose Multiple, and then
begin copying it around the space.
| | 07:08 | Now, again, in here, you say, oh,
well, that doesn't work so well.
| | 07:13 | The whole assembly will move together as a unit.
| | 07:16 | So the grid will move, all the light
fixtures will move, and then finally you
| | 07:21 | could select all of these light fixtures
together and copy those down into the other offices.
| | 07:25 | So the first one is a little challenging
because it doesn't automatically snap
| | 07:29 | and you have to align it, but then
after that it goes pretty quickly, because
| | 07:33 | you can just use copy, and
move, and rotate, and so on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Complex WallsCreating a custom basic wall type| 00:00 | We've seen various kinds of
walls so far in this course.
| | 00:03 | Some of them were generic,
showing only one layer of material.
| | 00:06 | Some were brick, some had
steel studs and drywall.
| | 00:10 | Would you be surprised to learn that
all of these walls belong to the same family?
| | 00:13 | Walls are a system family in Revit and
all the walls mentioned here are part of
| | 00:17 | the basic wall system family.
| | 00:20 | System families are built into the system.
| | 00:22 | Most major building components are
actually system families, including walls,
| | 00:26 | floors, roofs, and stairs, to name a few.
| | 00:29 | This means that we cannot change any
of the parameters of the family itself.
| | 00:33 | We cannot rename it.
| | 00:34 | We can't delete it.
| | 00:35 | We can't add a new one.
| | 00:36 | However, we can manipulate the
family types of any system family.
| | 00:41 | So when we see one wall made out of
brick and another made out of concrete,
| | 00:45 | they both belong to the basic wall family,
but they are two different types.
| | 00:50 | So in this movie, we'll explore how
we can make our own type of basic wall.
| | 00:55 | So I am in our office building project.
| | 00:57 | We are looking at the toilet rooms for
our office building structure and we
| | 01:01 | have this really thin little basic wall
here, Interior - 4 7/8" Partition, which
| | 01:08 | matches all the others, and that's
not really appropriate for the wet wall
| | 01:12 | between all the plumbing fixtures.
| | 01:13 | So let's go ahead and select this wall,
and over here on the Properties palette,
| | 01:19 | we are going to choose Edit Type.
| | 01:22 | And if I were to go and actually
start making modifications, it will be a
| | 01:26 | little dangerous, because I would
actually be editing the Interior - 4 7/8"
| | 01:30 | Partition type, and that would apply
everywhere, throughout the project, so
| | 01:34 | that's not what I want to do.
| | 01:35 | So the first step is I need to click
Duplicate and give my new wall type a different name.
| | 01:41 | So I am going to just call this Plumbing Wall.
| | 01:48 | Now, it's just an exact copy
of the wall that I started with.
| | 01:51 | So now all I have to do is make
whatever modifications are necessary to turn
| | 01:55 | this thin little stud wall into
a more substantial plumbing wall.
| | 02:00 | We are going to do that right
here with the Edit Structure button.
| | 02:04 | We have been in here
before, just sort of briefly.
| | 02:06 | We are going to spend a little bit more
time in here now doing a little bit more work.
| | 02:09 | We're going to actually make some
modifications and add a few components.
| | 02:12 | So just to recap a few things we have
already discussed in previous movies,
| | 02:16 | the core boundary is set out
by these two gray bars here.
| | 02:19 | You can't change these; they are built-in.
| | 02:22 | You can however change what occurs above
the core, below the core, or inside the core.
| | 02:28 | So in this case, we can see we have a
structural component inside the core that
| | 02:33 | uses a Metal - Stud layer material,
and its set at 3 5/8" of an inch.
| | 02:37 | We have a Finish on either side, both of
them are Gypsum Wallboard, and they are
| | 02:43 | both 5/8" of an inch.
| | 02:44 | So what we are going to do is actually
select the structural element here, these
| | 02:49 | are actually referred to as layers, so
we are going to select the structural
| | 02:52 | layer, and we are going to click Insert.
| | 02:53 | We are inserting another
structural layer right above the first one.
| | 02:58 | What I want to do is basically make it
match all the settings of the first ones.
| | 03:02 | So I am going to select the thickness of
the one below it and do Ctrl+C on my keyboard.
| | 03:08 | That's copy.
| | 03:09 | And then click over here and do
Ctrl+V on my keyboard to paste it.
| | 03:15 | And then I want to also change the
material of that layer to match the one below.
| | 03:20 | So you see when I click in here for the
material, I get this small little Browse button.
| | 03:25 | I'll go ahead and click on that.
| | 03:26 | I'm going to scroll down here and
we are going to find Metal - Stud layer.
| | 03:33 | Again, we are just going to pick off the list.
| | 03:35 | You can see here there's quite a long
list of materials that are part of the
| | 03:38 | template that we started this project with.
| | 03:40 | You could choose any of those.
| | 03:42 | I am going to choose the Metal - Stud layer.
| | 03:44 | So that takes care of that.
| | 03:46 | However, I don't want these two Stud
layers to be right up against each other.
| | 03:49 | Let me move this box over slightly,
and I am going to click right here on
| | 03:55 | the Preview button, and that's
actually going to show me in real time what
| | 03:59 | we've been modifying.
| | 04:01 | So you could see that this was the
original Stud layer where my mouse is here,
| | 04:04 | and the new one is right up against it here,
and they've got this little seam in between.
| | 04:08 | So I am going to select the first one,
and I am going to click Insert again, and
| | 04:12 | this is going to make a third layer
inside the core, and I am going to change
| | 04:16 | its material to a
miscellaneous air layer air space.
| | 04:23 | So this is going to be the space where the
cavity will actually be for the plumbing.
| | 04:27 | I am going to go ahead and click OK on that.
| | 04:29 | Up here, my total wall
thickness is currently 8 1/2".
| | 04:34 | I can either decide how big I want the
air space to be, or I could decide how
| | 04:37 | big I want the total wall to be and
kind of do the math and work backwards.
| | 04:41 | I am feeling like I just want to
put in a number here right now.
| | 04:44 | So I am going to go
ahead and put in 6" for that.
| | 04:48 | That means my total wall is 1' 2 1/2".
Well, maybe I'll just even that off at 14".
| | 04:54 | So I'll go ahead and change this to 5 1/2".
| | 04:58 | That reduces it a little.
| | 04:59 | You see it add here in real time in the preview.
| | 05:02 | So I now have a stud here, I have an
air space here for plumbing, and then
| | 05:06 | another stud right here.
| | 05:08 | Now, I don't want this to be
considered a structural layer, because the air
| | 05:12 | isn't holding anything up.
| | 05:13 | If I click right here, you can see
there's actually a bunch of functions
| | 05:17 | available on this list.
| | 05:18 | Now, these are built-in.
| | 05:19 | You and I can't add any functions to the list.
| | 05:21 | So we can just choose
from the ones off the list.
| | 05:23 | So a Thermal Air layer is what makes a little
bit more sense in this case for the function.
| | 05:28 | I don't need to do anything for the
finishes, except perhaps if you wanted to
| | 05:32 | add another layer of drywall or some
acoustical barriers or things like that.
| | 05:37 | But in this case, I am going to keep
this plumbing wall fairly simple and
| | 05:40 | that's all I really need to do.
| | 05:42 | I'm going to click OK and I'll OK again.
| | 05:47 | And you'll see after a moment,
the thickness of that wall will change and all
| | 05:52 | the plumbing fixtures that were
attached to the wall adjust accordingly.
| | 05:56 | If I come down here and I change from
Coarse to Medium detail, it will display
| | 06:02 | those components that I built inside the wall.
| | 06:04 | That's a real simple example, but that
gives you the idea of all you need to do
| | 06:08 | if you want to create your own basic wall type.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding stacked walls| 00:00 | In this movie, we are going to look at
the next type of system family, which is
| | 00:03 | called the stacked wall.
| | 00:05 | Now we've looked at basic walls in a
previous movie and a basic wall is so named
| | 00:08 | because, well, its structure is basic.
| | 00:11 | The same structure applies across
the length of the wall as it does along
| | 00:14 | the height of the wall.
| | 00:15 | But when you get into a stacked wall,
the material is the same along the length
| | 00:18 | of the wall, but it varies along its height.
| | 00:20 | So what you do to create your own
stacked wall is you simply take two or more
| | 00:25 | basic walls and you stack
them up on top of one another.
| | 00:28 | So let's go ahead and have a look.
| | 00:29 | I am going to do all of this work
in the Project browser for right now.
| | 00:33 | So if I scroll down on the Project
browser, toward the bottom, you are going to
| | 00:37 | find a Families branch.
| | 00:39 | Beneath the Families branch, you'll
see all the various categories and if we
| | 00:45 | scroll down far enough, we'll find the
Walls category and beneath it we'll see
| | 00:48 | our Basic Wall, our Curtain
Wall, and our Stacked Wall.
| | 00:52 | We've already discussed basic walls,
we are going to look at curtain walls in
| | 00:55 | the future movie, and let's go ahead and
take a look at our stacked walls right now.
| | 00:58 | Now, there's only one stacked
wall in this project currently.
| | 01:03 | Every project has to have at
least one of each system family.
| | 01:06 | So that's why we are seeing a
stacked wall in here right now.
| | 01:09 | What we are going to do is duplicate
this stacked wall by right-clicking on it.
| | 01:14 | That will create the same name
with a 2 at the end, and I am going to
| | 01:20 | right-click that, choose Rename, and I
am going to call this LDC Exterior Facade.
| | 01:27 | Now as far as naming goes, pretty
common industry convention for firms to use
| | 01:33 | some sort of nomenclature at the
front or at the end of any names for any
| | 01:38 | content they customize.
| | 01:39 | So whether that's the initials of
your firm or some other designation,
| | 01:43 | it's pretty good best practice to get in a
habit of naming things consistently so
| | 01:47 | that yourself and other members of
your team can easily spot the items that
| | 01:51 | you've customized and know that they might
want to use those in their projects as well.
| | 01:56 | Now to save us a little bit of work,
I've gone in here and created three basic
| | 02:02 | wall types to use in this stacked wall.
| | 02:05 | So we are going to start at the
bottom with this 14" concrete wall.
| | 02:08 | We are going to then move up to a
brick on CMU wall, and then we are going to
| | 02:13 | end off with the brick parapet.
| | 02:14 | So I am going to start with the foundation wall.
| | 02:16 | I am going to right-click it and go
to Type Properties, and look at the
| | 02:22 | properties of this wall so that we can
get a sense of how the wall is going to
| | 02:25 | change as we move up the stacked wall.
| | 02:27 | When I edit the structure,
this first wall is very simple.
| | 02:30 | It's just one component, Cast-
In-Place Concrete, 1' 2" thick.
| | 02:35 | I am going to cancel one time.
| | 02:37 | I don't need to get all the way
back out and go to the Project browser.
| | 02:40 | I can do it all in this dialog.
| | 02:42 | From the Type List here, I am going
to change to the Brick on CMU, and I am
| | 02:46 | going to click Edit, and we'll see all
the various layers that are in this wall.
| | 02:50 | I am going to change the preview here
to a section preview because in addition
| | 02:55 | to the layers that we are seeing here,
Concrete Masonry units, Membrane, Thermal
| | 03:01 | Insulation, Thermal Air Gap, and Brick,
| | 03:04 | we also have this item right here, a
Brick Soldier Course, which is actually a
| | 03:08 | sweep, and we'll be talking
about sweeps in the future movie.
| | 03:11 | Go ahead and click Cancel.
| | 03:12 | We'll go to the next one, the Brick Parapet.
| | 03:16 | It also integrates the sweep at the top,
and then its structure just simply has
| | 03:22 | two structural brick layers, a
Thermal Air Gap, and a Finish Brick.
| | 03:27 | So let's cancel once out of there and
again we don't need to cancel all the
| | 03:31 | way back to the Project browser.
| | 03:33 | At the very top of this list, we can just
simply change the family name to Stacked Wall.
| | 03:39 | That will show us the two stacked wall
types that are available in this project.
| | 03:44 | I'll choose the new one that I just created.
| | 03:47 | If you look at the structure, it
doesn't look anything like the three walls
| | 03:49 | that I just shown you.
| | 03:51 | Well, that's because it's just
the copy of the previous one.
| | 03:54 | So let's go ahead and click the Edit button
and make the modifications that we need to make.
| | 03:58 | So we'll start at the bottom, and
we'll select layer #2, open up the list and
| | 04:05 | scroll down, and we are going to be
using the Foundation wall for the bottom.
| | 04:10 | We'll go to the next wall up, scroll down,
locate the Brick on CMU and apply that next.
| | 04:19 | With that one selected, I am going to
click the Insert button. That will add a
| | 04:22 | third layer on top of the other two,
and I am going to open up the list and
| | 04:28 | change that to the Brick Parapet.
| | 04:30 | So that's the three walls that I need,
but you can see that they need a little
| | 04:34 | bit of adjustment, both
vertically and horizontally.
| | 04:36 | So let's move our attention to those settings.
| | 04:40 | So we'll start with the Height, and
I'll just move over to the right of the
| | 04:44 | component I have selected, and the
parapet only needs to be about 3 feet tall.
| | 04:49 | So I am going to put 3
feet in here and press Enter.
| | 04:52 | You can see that because layer 2 is
variable, all of the height got taken up by
| | 04:58 | the middle component.
| | 04:59 | We are not going to change that.
| | 05:01 | We are going to move down to the
Foundation component, and we are going
| | 05:03 | to change its height to 4 feet and again,
the variable height will adjust accordingly.
| | 05:08 | Now you can actually change which
one of these components is variable by
| | 05:13 | clicking this button here, but
only one component can be variable.
| | 05:16 | So as soon as you make one variable,
then the previous variable one you have to
| | 05:20 | put in an explicit height.
| | 05:22 | Now, let's deal with the horizontal shift.
| | 05:25 | We could come into the Offset column
here and we could type in numbers to get
| | 05:28 | everything to line-up, but you might
want to look first at the offset location
| | 05:33 | line that's being used.
| | 05:35 | This is the point that these
numbers are referenced from.
| | 05:38 | So let's start with this and see if
we can get close and then we'll edit
| | 05:42 | offsets if we need to.
| | 05:44 | I am looking at this wall, and I am
thinking that the exterior face of the core
| | 05:48 | is probably going to give
me a slightly better result.
| | 05:51 | Now I can actually zoom in, in this
preview over here by clicking to make it
| | 05:56 | active and then just rolling my wheel
on my mouse and you can see that by
| | 06:01 | matching up the core face right here,
we've shifted everything over and there
| | 06:05 | is a slight difference here, but that's
perfectly fine. Because this component
| | 06:09 | is narrower than this one here.
| | 06:11 | I am going to zoom back out.
| | 06:13 | And it doesn't really help us too much
down here because when we line-up these
| | 06:18 | two faces, we don't get exactly what we want.
| | 06:20 | But now all I need to do is put in an
offset in just one of these fields instead
| | 06:25 | of two of them, so that
was a little bit simpler.
| | 06:28 | We are going from a 14" component, the
Concrete, to a 7 5/8" component, the CMU.
| | 06:34 | So we just simply need to do the math
and figure out what the difference is.
| | 06:37 | And that's going to be 6 3/8".
| | 06:42 | I'll press Enter and that will shift
the concrete over and make the adjustment
| | 06:46 | for us, and I am going to click OK and
you can see the full preview right here.
| | 06:52 | So the wall looks pretty good.
| | 06:53 | That's exactly what we want, and
I'll go ahead and click OK again.
| | 06:57 | The only step that remains is
because we did all the work on the Project
| | 07:00 | browser, we just simply now need to
select the actual walls in the project.
| | 07:04 | I'll use my Chain Selection, and then from
the Type Selector, choose the wall that I want.
| | 07:15 | Deselect, adjust the wall,
and there you have it.
| | 07:20 | So to create a stacked wall,
all you need is two or more basic walls.
| | 07:25 | Stack them on top of each other,
adjust your heights in horizontal offsets,
| | 07:29 | and you are good to go.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain walls| 00:00 | Curtain wall is our third
type of wall system family.
| | 00:03 | Curtain walls are the most complex,
in that they can vary in any direction,
| | 00:07 | and they can even form complex
patterns within the structure using grids,
| | 00:10 | mullions, and panels.
| | 00:11 | In this movie, we'll get you started
with the essentials of the curtain wall
| | 00:14 | object and in the next movie we'll get
a little deeper into the whole curtain
| | 00:17 | wall mullion grid panel thing.
| | 00:19 | I want to jump right in by drawing
a curtain wall and discussing it.
| | 00:22 | Let's remember that the curtain wall is a wall.
| | 00:25 | So we use the Wall tool to access it,
and if I open up the Type Selector, Basic
| | 00:31 | Wall was at the top of course, gray bar,
and like any other object in Revit,
| | 00:36 | the family is listed with the gray bar.
| | 00:38 | So here is Curtain Wall, and this
template that we started with actually
| | 00:41 | includes three types.
| | 00:42 | I am going to use the Storefront for
this example, because it's the one that has
| | 00:47 | the most interesting stuff
going on in it by default.
| | 00:51 | So I am going to just
draw a simple little segment.
| | 00:54 | So when I pre-highlight the curtain wall,
you'll get this sort of little I shape to it.
| | 00:57 | That's actually the whole curtain wall itself.
| | 00:59 | So that's if you want to select the
actual curtain wall and then modify it
| | 01:03 | in the Properties palette or
something like that, you look for that sort of
| | 01:06 | I-shaped dash line.
| | 01:08 | Otherwise, you'll notice that this
curtain wall has several internal mullions,
| | 01:12 | and if you press the Tab key, you can even
reach in there and get the panels as well.
| | 01:17 | So there's actually a lot going on.
| | 01:19 | If you select the curtain wall and drag
these little handles at the end, you are
| | 01:24 | going to actually see that instead of
just stretching out the spacing, at some
| | 01:30 | point it will actually add another mullion.
| | 01:32 | So there's some rules built into this
curtain wall that we are going to take a look at.
| | 01:35 | So if I select it and I edit its type,
you are going to see that there is a
| | 01:41 | Vertical Grid Pattern and
a Horizontal Grid Pattern.
| | 01:44 | The Vertical Grid Pattern is
set to a Maximum Spacing of 5' 0".
| | 01:47 | So it might not always be 5',
but it will never be more than 5'.
| | 01:51 | Then in the vertical direction, it's
actually set to a Fixed Distance of 8' 0".
| | 01:56 | So that mean that it's always 8', and
if there's any left over, they just sort
| | 01:59 | of leave that at the top.
| | 02:00 | While we are here, just real quickly
down here at the bottom, you can see that
| | 02:05 | there is a variety of settings for
mullions and in this case they are all set
| | 02:09 | to the same 2.5"x5" mullion, which we are
seeing here very clearly in a section cut.
| | 02:15 | Now, before I move on from the curtain
wall that we have here onscreen, let's
| | 02:18 | take a quick look at it in 3D and
I'll do that here on the QAT by going to
| | 02:22 | the default 3D View.
| | 02:23 | Let's go ahead and spin the view
around and then zoom in, like so.
| | 02:30 | There you can see very clearly the 8'
spacing that we were just looking at
| | 02:34 | for this curtain wall.
| | 02:36 | If I highlight it in this view, instead
of the little long thin dashed I shape,
| | 02:40 | we get more of a dashed box shape.
| | 02:43 | So it's the same thing though.
| | 02:44 | If you select it, you are actually
selecting the entire curtain wall.
| | 02:47 | I am going to delete that, go back to
the floor plan, and I want to show you one
| | 02:52 | of the neat feature of
this particular curtain wall.
| | 02:55 | The Storefront is still
selected on my Type Selector.
| | 02:58 | If you draw it right on top of another wall,
it will actually embed itself in that wall.
| | 03:06 | I'll show you that again.
| | 03:08 | Draw it right on top of another wall.
| | 03:10 | It will actually embed itself in the wall.
| | 03:12 | Now, like doors and windows and other
walls, there's also a little flip here, so
| | 03:16 | you notice the glass is on the inside.
| | 03:18 | I can easily remedy that by
flipping it over to the outside.
| | 03:21 | So the setting that controls this
embedding behavior was also part of the type,
| | 03:26 | and that's right here at the
top, this little check box:
| | 03:29 | Automatically Embed.
| | 03:30 | So when that's turned on in the Type,
the wall will embed itself and actually
| | 03:35 | cut a hole in the other wall.
| | 03:37 | So if we look at 3D, we can see that
a little bit more clearly, because you
| | 03:41 | can see it has actually made a hole in the
wall, kind of like a door or window would.
| | 03:45 | Now, I am going to go to an Elevation View.
| | 03:47 | Let's go to the North Elevation, zoom in,
and I am going to select the curtain wall.
| | 03:56 | I might need to use my Tab key.
| | 03:59 | With this little shape handle here, I am
going to drag it up and snap it to that
| | 04:05 | level line right here.
| | 04:07 | That gives me much more glass on that
facade, a little bit more light in the
| | 04:10 | stairwell, and you can see again the
8' spacing is being repeated, and what I
| | 04:15 | mentioned about the top is the
leftover all occurs at the top.
| | 04:19 | So again, that's all being
controlled by the Type parameters.
| | 04:22 | Now, this is a little tight right here.
| | 04:25 | Maybe that's not quite so nice.
| | 04:27 | So let's look at one other
feature that we can do here.
| | 04:30 | On the Ribbon, when the curtain wall
is selected, we can actually click this
| | 04:33 | Edit Profile button.
| | 04:34 | We can actually do this for any
wall, not just the curtain wall.
| | 04:37 | We'll do it here for the curtain wall.
| | 04:39 | When you do that, you are in a Sketch
mode and you get a sketched rectangle for
| | 04:43 | the default shape of the curtain wall itself.
| | 04:46 | But I can modify the shape now
using any of my standard drawing tools.
| | 04:50 | In this case, I am going to use
Pick Lines, as this is going to be the
| | 04:53 | easiest way to do this.
| | 04:54 | I am going to set an Offset of, I
don't know, about 5' 0", and I am going to
| | 04:59 | highlight the edge of the roof eave.
| | 05:02 | And by doing that, you'll see a dashed line
appear down below it, and I am going to click.
| | 05:07 | I have that sketch line and I'll trim
it up and I can change the shape of the
| | 05:13 | curtain wall, like so.
| | 05:14 | When I click Finish, you'll see it
adjust and it automatically adjusts any of
| | 05:18 | the mullions and the grids and the
panels and so forth to fit the new shape.
| | 05:22 | So that's not too bad, right?
| | 05:23 | Let's take a look at that in 3D.
| | 05:26 | See the final result.
| | 05:28 | So let's draw one more curtain wall.
| | 05:29 | I am going to zoom back out to the
front of the building and it might be nice
| | 05:35 | to put a curtain wall in this
location instead of the single door.
| | 05:39 | So I am going to select the door,
press the Delete key, and delete it.
| | 05:44 | But for this curtain wall, I want to have
a little bit more control over the design.
| | 05:47 | I mean, the Storefront is fine with the
whole 5x8 spacing, but I'd rather set up
| | 05:51 | my own grid pattern.
| | 05:52 | So I am going to choose just the
generic Curtain Wall type and draw it the same
| | 05:57 | way that I did the other one, along here.
| | 06:01 | But this time I am going to get a little
warning, and it says highlighted walls
| | 06:05 | overlap and one of them might be
ignored, and at the very end of it says
| | 06:09 | something about cutting geometry.
| | 06:10 | So what they are telling us there is
we need to use this tool right here,
| | 06:13 | the Cut Geometry tool, to actually manually
embed the one curtain wall within the other.
| | 06:19 | Now, why do we need to do that?
| | 06:20 | Well, if we click Edit Type, this one,
Curtain Wall, rather than Storefront,
| | 06:25 | that's the type we are using, is
not set to Automatically Embed.
| | 06:29 | So that's why I have to use the Cut tool,
tell Revit which wall I want to cut,
| | 06:34 | and then tell it which wall I
want to do the cutting with.
| | 06:38 | So now that embeds the wall.
| | 06:39 | So that gets us set up for the next
movie and what we'll do is make a custom
| | 06:45 | design on the front here to give
us a nicer entrance to the building.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding curtain grids, mullions, and panels| 00:00 | In the Adding curtain walls movie we
saw that we can use a curtain wall type
| | 00:03 | that has a predefined spacing in both
the horizontal and vertical directions.
| | 00:07 | This will certainly serve your needs
in many situations, but there are many
| | 00:10 | situations where you need a curtain
wall that has to match a certain design
| | 00:14 | intent. Maybe it doesn't have a
regular spacing and maybe you need to
| | 00:17 | customize it in some way.
| | 00:18 | So in those cases you're going to want
to just lay out the curtain grid yourself;
| | 00:22 | and in this movie that's
exactly what we're going to do.
| | 00:25 | This file is called Curtain Wall Grids
and Mullions and it represents where we
| | 00:29 | left off in the adding curtain walls movie.
| | 00:31 | We have a simple curtain wall here
using just the out-of-the-box curtain wall
| | 00:36 | style, which is essentially just a
big plain glass like a blank canvas.
| | 00:39 | And I could certainly work here in Plan view.
| | 00:42 | It's going to a lot easier if I go to
an Elevation view, such as the South
| | 00:46 | Elevation in this case, so that I can
look right at the curtain wall that I'm
| | 00:49 | designing and get a better sense.
| | 00:51 | So I'm going to zoom in on that area
and as you can see, we have this big
| | 00:56 | blank slate to work with.
| | 00:58 | On the Home tab, we've a Curtain Grid
tool and as you move your mouse around
| | 01:03 | the edges of the curtain wall,
you'll see you can draw these grids either
| | 01:07 | horizontally or vertically, and what
I want to do is to sort of get them in
| | 01:12 | rough locations for right now.
| | 01:14 | We've seen this kind of
approach before in Revit.
| | 01:18 | And then of course, like other places
in Revit, we can go in and modify the
| | 01:23 | temporary dimensions to fine-
tune position of these things later.
| | 01:28 | Now we can certainly do that by
selecting each one using the temporaries, but
| | 01:33 | sometimes it's actually handy to see
the dimensions before you edit so that
| | 01:36 | you've a better idea of which ones need editing.
| | 01:38 | So I'm actually going to
make a permanent dimension.
| | 01:40 | On the Annotate tab I'm going to click
the Aligned tool and then just select
| | 01:46 | each of my edges, and I'll just place
the dimension up here to kind of get it
| | 01:53 | out of the way, but keep it still visible.
| | 01:55 | So now when I select Grid,
the remainder of the dimensions will stay visible,
| | 01:59 | but the two on either side of the
grid I have selected will become editable
| | 02:03 | temporary dimensions.
| | 02:05 | So I can just click and make
whatever modifications I want.
| | 02:08 | I pretty much want each of
these bases to be three feet.
| | 02:12 | That one there, and the
ones at the end to be 1'6".
| | 02:17 | So that kinds of takes care of that, and
then let's double check in the other direction.
| | 02:22 | We've got two feet here. That's good,
six feet there, and we're ultimately
| | 02:27 | going to put a doorway in here, so that
will give us a total of an 8 foot tall door.
| | 02:31 | So that's the basic layout of our grid.
| | 02:34 | What we want to do next is take a look at how
we could start adding mullions to that grid.
| | 02:39 | When I click the Mullion tool on the
Home tab, you can see that there are
| | 02:43 | three placement options.
| | 02:45 | We can add mullions to an entire grid line.
| | 02:48 | We can add mullions to individual
segments, and we can even add mullions to the
| | 02:52 | entire grid of all empty segments.
| | 02:54 | But I'm not going to do that yet,
because I still have some more work to do
| | 02:58 | with the grid itself.
| | 02:59 | So for now I'm just going to add
mullions along the outer grid lines like so,
| | 03:05 | and maybe these two over
here and these two right here.
| | 03:09 | So we'll start with those and then
I want to do some work in this area
| | 03:14 | because as I mentioned,
| | 03:15 | I want to put a door in here.
| | 03:17 | You can't make an
irregular shaped grid directly.
| | 03:20 | The way you do that is you actually
create the overall grid lines and then you
| | 03:24 | select them and on the ribbon you have
this Add/Remove Grid Segments button.
| | 03:29 | So when I click on that it will allow
me to remove segments of the grid line
| | 03:34 | that I don't want to see.
| | 03:35 | So I'll do that again.
| | 03:37 | I'll select this grid line, Add/
Remove Segments, and remove this grid
| | 03:42 | line segment right here.
| | 03:44 | So what that leaves me with, if I use
my Tab key, is one big panel right there
| | 03:49 | in the middle of the grid.
| | 03:51 | So that's pretty handy approach to
customizing the grid and getting exactly the
| | 03:55 | effect you're looking for.
| | 03:57 | Now you can do other things with these panels.
| | 03:59 | I'm going to go ahead and Tab in
and select one of these panels.
| | 04:03 | Now it turns out if you right-click
you have other selection options for the
| | 04:08 | panels, so we can select them each
individually with the Tab key, but that
| | 04:11 | gets a little tedious.
| | 04:13 | You can also do tricks like this
where you can say select them all on the
| | 04:16 | horizontal or vertical grid.
| | 04:18 | You see how those
highlighted all the way across.
| | 04:19 | So what I'm going to do is take
those four panels that I've selected and
| | 04:25 | they're currently using the system
panel called Glazed, and I'm going to
| | 04:29 | change those to Solid.
| | 04:31 | Now that actually captured my doorway as well.
| | 04:34 | I'm going to select my doorway, and
let's see what we have available for that.
| | 04:41 | It turns out if we scroll up a little bit,
| | 04:44 | we actually have a Store Front Double
Door panel type that we can load in there,
| | 04:48 | and that will actually make that a door.
| | 04:50 | Now it's a little tough to see what we
did here down at the bottom and the door
| | 04:54 | is easy enough to see, but let's go
ahead and change the Shading mode down here
| | 04:59 | on the View Control Bar, and I'm going
to choose the Shaded with Edges option.
| | 05:04 | Now I know the blue is a little
bright here, but the blue represents glass,
| | 05:09 | and you can see the gray panels,
those are actually spandrel panels, and so
| | 05:13 | those are Solid panels.
| | 05:14 | You can see also that I've missed one
grid line here with mullions, so let's go
| | 05:18 | ahead and take care of that, just like so.
| | 05:23 | One last little touch-up that we can do.
| | 05:25 | You can actually control whether or not
the vertical mullions or the horizontal
| | 05:29 | mullions interrupt one another, and
you can do that by selecting on them and
| | 05:33 | they have these little
controls that appear right here.
| | 05:36 | And that might be a little easier
to see if I set that back to Hidden Line.
| | 05:38 | Well, about the same.
| | 05:42 | But I'm going to click on those
little things, and you'll see that that now
| | 05:45 | makes the horizontal predominant.
| | 05:47 | We'll do it again over here, like so.
| | 05:51 | I can maybe do it here as well. Here as well.
| | 05:57 | Missing one grid line right there,
and again, I want that one to be
| | 06:08 | interrupted there and there.
| | 06:11 | As a finishing touch,
let's go take a look at our 3D.
| | 06:16 | Let's spin this guy around to get a better look.
| | 06:20 | Zoom in and we definitely want to
look at this one with Shaded and Edges.
| | 06:29 | And so there you have it.
| | 06:30 | So by adding some grids and then
applying mullions to those grids and then
| | 06:33 | swapping out different kinds of
panels, you can make more interesting
| | 06:37 | customized curtain wall design than
you could get if you just rely on the
| | 06:41 | equally spaced type controls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating wall sweeps| 00:00 | A sweep is a material that you add to a wall.
| | 00:02 | It can be added to either the
type or the instance of the wall.
| | 00:05 | When applied at the type level, it
applies to all instances of that wall.
| | 00:10 | If you apply it to individual walls, it
only applies to the walls you actually select.
| | 00:13 | You use sweeps to represent things
like moldings or trims or other kinds of
| | 00:17 | details along the wall.
| | 00:18 | The file I've opened is called Wall
Sweeps, in the Chapter07 Exercise Files, and
| | 00:23 | let's start with adding a wall
sweep to the Exterior Wall type.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to add one that will represent a
brick soldier course going around the building.
| | 00:33 | So I'm going to select one of my walls.
| | 00:36 | Because this is a type level
modification, I don't need to select multiple
| | 00:39 | walls. Simply applying it to one
at the type level will apply it
| | 00:43 | automatically to all the walls.
| | 00:45 | Over here on the Properties palette,
I'll choose Edit Type, and when the Type
| | 00:48 | Properties dialog appears, I'm going
to make a little bit of room and down
| | 00:51 | here at the bottom
I'm going to click the Preview button.
| | 00:54 | I'm going to click the
Edit button next to Structure.
| | 00:57 | This gives me access to the
structure of the wall type.
| | 01:00 | And down here at the bottom you can see
Modify Vertical Structure and it says,
| | 01:05 | "Section Preview only.
| | 01:06 | And all the buttons are grayed out."
| | 01:07 | So what they mean by that is right
here in this little dropdown for the View,
| | 01:12 | you need to change to Section.
| | 01:14 | That will give you a section cut preview
of the wall that you're working on, and
| | 01:18 | then all these buttons will become available.
| | 01:20 | Now, there are several options here.
| | 01:21 | In this movie, we're just
going to look at Sweeps.
| | 01:24 | We click on Sweeps and the
dialog is currently empty.
| | 01:27 | You can add one or more sweeps to the wall.
| | 01:30 | In this case, I'll add a simple
soldier course to this brick wall.
| | 01:33 | So I'm going to click Add and an item
will appear and all the default settings
| | 01:39 | occur, which are basically a square,
and it doesn't have any material assigned,
| | 01:43 | and it's set at 0 and so forth.
| | 01:46 | So we have a lot of work to do here to
make this a little bit more interesting.
| | 01:49 | The first thing we're going
to do is choose a profile.
| | 01:52 | Now, what a profile is is a really
simple two-dimensional family that's drawn in
| | 01:57 | the shape of a closed loop.
| | 01:58 | You can open up and create
your own profile families.
| | 02:02 | You would open up a profile family
template and you would just literally draw
| | 02:05 | any shape you like, as long as it's a
closed two-dimensional shape, much like
| | 02:09 | what we've done in Sketch mode,
that could be used as a wall sweep.
| | 02:13 | In our case, this template that we
started the project with includes several
| | 02:18 | existing profile families already loaded in.
| | 02:21 | So we're going to choose from one of
the existing ones that's already here.
| | 02:24 | You can see that there's some Vinyl Base.
| | 02:26 | There are Parapet Caps, which we
saw in the stacked walls movie.
| | 02:30 | There is Precast Sills, Stair Nosing.
| | 02:32 | Obviously, we wouldn't want to put that
on a wall, and we have three options for
| | 02:37 | brick soldier courses.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to choose this one here
at the bottom, the Brick Soldier Course
| | 02:43 | with 3 bricks, and we'll
go ahead and select that.
| | 02:49 | Next, I'm going to click over here in
the Material column and it's currently
| | 02:53 | set to By Category, which means it
will just match whatever the category for
| | 02:56 | walls tells it to do.
| | 02:58 | I want it to actually look like soldier bricks.
| | 03:00 | So I'm going to click the small little
Browse button right here in the Materials.
| | 03:04 | That opens up my Materials list, and
if we scroll through and look for our
| | 03:09 | Masonry materials, there is a Brick
Soldier Course material here, which uses a
| | 03:14 | vertical line pattern that
represents the soldier course bricks.
| | 03:18 | We'll go ahead and click OK on that.
| | 03:20 | I'm going to skip over Distance for a minute.
| | 03:22 | The next thing that I want to do is the From
setting has two choices, From Base or From Top.
| | 03:28 | So I'm going to go ahead
and leave it set to Base.
| | 03:30 | So in other words, if you look at the
section preview, we're going to measure
| | 03:34 | where the location of the soldier
course is from the base of the wall.
| | 03:38 | If we chose Top, we would be
measuring it up here from the top of the wall.
| | 03:41 | And you can do either one;
| | 03:42 | it's entirely up to you.
| | 03:43 | The Side, I'm going to also leave alone,
because it's set to Exterior. That will
| | 03:48 | put it on the outside of the
wall, which makes sense here.
| | 03:50 | We'll talk about Offset in a
minute, Flip and other things.
| | 03:54 | Before we know what we have to change
here, let's go ahead and click Apply.
| | 03:58 | Now, when I do, down here in the Preview,
you'll actually see it selected there
| | 04:03 | in blue, and it's way down
at the bottom of the wall.
| | 04:05 | So obviously we still have
a little bit of work to do.
| | 04:08 | So I'm going to change the Distance now,
and this will determine how high off
| | 04:13 | the floor this soldier course is going to occur.
| | 04:15 | So I'm going to go ahead and
try like 6 feet and click Apply.
| | 04:19 | So that moves it up the length of the
wall and again that's because we're
| | 04:22 | measuring it from base.
| | 04:24 | Next, I'm going to put in an offset here, and
I don't want it to hang off the wall so much.
| | 04:30 | I want to kind of shift it in and
merge it into the wall a little bit.
| | 04:33 | Most bricks are two and two-thirds
inches, so I should be able to put in--
| | 04:39 | Let's try 2.5 inches here and let's apply that.
| | 04:43 | Now, oops, that's going the wrong way.
| | 04:45 | So all I've to do is click negative right
here and that will shift it the other way.
| | 04:52 | Now, this check box here says Cuts Wall,
and that's why it's actually cutting
| | 04:56 | into the wall, which I
think is a pretty good thing.
| | 04:59 | We can also make it cuttable, and
what that means is if the Soldier Course
| | 05:03 | happens to interrupt a window or a door,
the window or a door will actually cut
| | 05:07 | through it, which is also a good thing.
| | 05:08 | We don't want the soldier bricks to
just run right through the window.
| | 05:11 | And that should pretty much do the trick.
| | 05:13 | Let's go ahead and click OK.
| | 05:14 | So you can see where the preview is
absolutely critical to making this work.
| | 05:18 | I'm going to click OK again, and one
more time, and you should see that for the
| | 05:25 | most part that's exactly what we want.
| | 05:27 | Obviously, I don't want it up here,
so I probably have to choose a
| | 05:30 | different wall type up here.
| | 05:31 | The reason we're seeing it up there is that
that's a new wall starting at the second floor.
| | 05:35 | So now the soldier is measured
6 feet from the second floor.
| | 05:39 | So I'll leave that to you to remedy.
| | 05:42 | You just swap in a different wall type
up there, but you can see right here that
| | 05:46 | the soldier course wraps all the way
around the building, and that's the result
| | 05:51 | of doing it as a type level setting.
| | 05:54 | You can also see that because we've
made it cuttable, the windows and doors
| | 05:57 | are cutting through it.
| | 05:59 | Now, the other way that you can do a
sweep is on the Home tab, on the dropdown
| | 06:04 | button for a Wall, you can
actually just choose Wall Sweep.
| | 06:08 | This is not a type level modification.
| | 06:10 | This is an instance level modification.
| | 06:13 | In other words, you're going to be
making this modification wall by wall.
| | 06:17 | And so I'm just going to go with the
default trim board here, and if I wanted
| | 06:21 | to add this trim board, you can see
that I can just sort of click on the walls
| | 06:25 | where I want the trim to occur.
| | 06:27 | Now, up here I can say Restart and
then I can add another trim board at
| | 06:32 | a different height.
| | 06:33 | So once you set the first one, you can
add multiple segments and keep going.
| | 06:38 | If you want to restart at a
different height, you have to reset it.
| | 06:41 | With the manual sweep, you
can also make it go vertically.
| | 06:43 | So you can't do that at the type level,
but if you wanted this trim board to run
| | 06:47 | vertically, you could do that as well.
| | 06:49 | Now, I should mention that we also
have reveals, and that is an option.
| | 06:53 | A reveal will actually carve away the
geometry, where a sweep added to the geometry.
| | 06:58 | Unless the reveal is actually
substantial, like the preview tooltip is showing
| | 07:02 | us here, that's a pretty substantial reveal.
| | 07:05 | I'd be okay with that.
| | 07:06 | But if you're using reveals for
something like a control joint in brick, I would
| | 07:10 | not recommend that approach.
| | 07:12 | What I would recommend instead is to
simply use a model line, and a model line
| | 07:17 | is literally a 2D line
you can draw on any surface.
| | 07:21 | Now, to determine the surface you want
to draw it on, we saw this in the Roof
| | 07:25 | by Extrusion movie.
| | 07:26 | We can go to this button right here,
Set Work Plane, click the Pick a plane
| | 07:32 | option, click OK, and we can pick
right on the surface of the wall.
| | 07:38 | When I go to model line, I could then
come in and draw a line and I'm going to
| | 07:45 | kind of go right through the windows right now.
| | 07:46 | I am being a little sloppy.
| | 07:47 | But the point is is that when you
look at this in Elevation, let's look at
| | 07:52 | the South Elevation.
| | 07:54 | That's going to be convincing
enough to represent a control joint.
| | 07:57 | You can dimension those.
| | 07:59 | It's going to show in
each view. It does the job.
| | 08:02 | To actually carve away a little half-
inch reveal to try and represent that,
| | 08:07 | first of all, it's going to print way
too bold, because you're going to have two
| | 08:10 | thin lines right next to each other,
which are going to look like a thick line.
| | 08:13 | So that's not going to look so well.
| | 08:14 | It's going to be tough to control,
and it's just going to make your model
| | 08:17 | heavier and make it perform less
optimally than it would otherwise.
| | 08:20 | So my recommendation for really simple
reveals, like control joints and stuff
| | 08:24 | like that, use a model line.
| | 08:26 | If the Reveal is actually substantial
and really is modifying the shape of the
| | 08:30 | wall, then you can go ahead and use
reveal, and the process would be exactly the
| | 08:33 | same as what I just showed you for sweeps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Visibility and Graphic ControlsUsing object styles | 00:00 | As your work progresses, you'll find
times when you wish to change the way some
| | 00:03 | of the various elements
display onscreen and/or in output.
| | 00:07 | There are various tools available in
Revit which make changes both globally
| | 00:11 | across the entire project and in a
much more specific and isolated way.
| | 00:14 | Each of the movies in this
chapter will explore the topic with
| | 00:17 | progressively more specificity.
| | 00:19 | Here we will begin with the
global project-wide settings.
| | 00:22 | So I am looking at a file called
Office, and it's in the Chapter 8 Exercise
| | 00:26 | Files, and we have a few little
challenges that we want to address in this
| | 00:31 | particular view, and I am
going to zoom in right about here.
| | 00:38 | Notice that the line weight that's used
on the wall is kind of bold and heavy.
| | 00:43 | It may be a little easier to see over here
on the right, nice and bold here for the
| | 00:46 | walls, and then the floor is not so much.
| | 00:49 | So it doesn't quite look
as appealing as it ought to.
| | 00:52 | I mean you really want the floor to
have the same sort of punch that the walls
| | 00:56 | do when you're cutting
through it here in section.
| | 00:58 | So let's go ahead and talk
about how we would do that.
| | 01:01 | What controls the line weights and a
few of the other settings, but the line
| | 01:05 | weights in general of all of your
elements across the entire project is
| | 01:09 | something called object styles.
| | 01:11 | So I am going to go to the Manage tab
and find the Object Styles button over
| | 01:15 | here on the left, and I am going to
go ahead and click on that, and we'll
| | 01:18 | get this three tab dialog that breaks
down all of the objects in Revit into
| | 01:23 | three overall groupings.
| | 01:24 | We've got Model Objects, which
is anything to do with the model.
| | 01:27 | We've got all our annotation like text
and dimensions than anything that might
| | 01:30 | be imported like CAD files.
| | 01:31 | We're going to focus our
energy on Model Objects.
| | 01:34 | Now these categories are
all built into the software.
| | 01:37 | We talked about this way back in the
first chapter. Categories are built into
| | 01:41 | the system, and they're controlled by
Revit, and you and I can't change them.
| | 01:44 | But what we can change is what line
weight or color or line pattern a particular
| | 01:50 | category uses, so we do
have that level of control.
| | 01:53 | So, for example, if we look at the
Floors element, we will see that when we're
| | 01:57 | looking at floors in elevation or in
plan, they're going to use a pen weight 2.
| | 02:03 | That's what projection means.
| | 02:04 | So anytime you see it when you're
looking at it. Anytime you're cutting through
| | 02:08 | it like a section in this example,
it's also using a pen weight 2, and that's
| | 02:13 | why it doesn't look so good.
| | 02:14 | That's why it doesn't have any punch to it.
| | 02:16 | Now if I scroll down and look at walls, walls
are set up a little differently in this file.
| | 02:22 | Projection is set to a pen weight 2 just
like floors are, but when we cut through walls,
| | 02:27 | they get a little more oomph,
because they're using a pen weight 4.
| | 02:30 | So why don't we go in here and take
our floors and change that line weight to
| | 02:36 | match what we've got for the walls?
| | 02:38 | So by changing that to a pen weight 4
and then go ahead and click OK, you are
| | 02:43 | going to see that now the floor object
has a little bit more punch to it than
| | 02:47 | it did previously and it matches the
line weight of the wall, so everything
| | 02:50 | looks a little better.
| | 02:51 | Now over here, we're still
getting a heavy line here and here.
| | 02:54 | You can actually start fine-tuning some
of that if you like by going to Modify
| | 03:00 | and using the Join tool and you can
just join geometry to one another and it
| | 03:05 | will actually start to clean
up those intersections for you.
| | 03:08 | So if you want to make this a little
bit more of like a presentation type
| | 03:10 | drawing where everything just kind of has
one overall profile, you can certainly do that.
| | 03:16 | Now if I continue to scroll over here,
this is a ceiling and this little tiny
| | 03:23 | item here is actually a soffit wall, so
that's just a little piece of wall, and
| | 03:27 | then our floor and again we don't have
a nice continuous bold profile. So it's
| | 03:32 | really the same issue.
| | 03:33 | So all I would do is go to Object
Styles, click on Ceilings, notice the same
| | 03:38 | problem, change that to a pen weight
4, click OK, and now my ceiling gets
| | 03:43 | bolder and everything looks a little bit nicer.
| | 03:46 | One more time I could do a join over
here, and it's basically more of the same.
| | 03:50 | So this is a kind of control that you
can achieve at a global level and that
| | 03:55 | would affect every view in your projects.
| | 03:58 | So if I go to another section and I
zoom in, you'll see that the floors and
| | 04:03 | the ceilings are already bold here.
| | 04:04 | I don't have to make that
change over and over again.
| | 04:07 | So if it's a line weight or a line type
like a dashed pattern or a solid pattern,
| | 04:11 | or a color, although colors aren't
used that frequently in Revit views, those
| | 04:15 | three things you can do
globally in object styles.
| | 04:18 | So as you're fine-tuning the graphics
of your Revit projects, getting them
| | 04:22 | ready for presentation, the first
place to look is in your object styles.
| | 04:25 | The reason is because object
styles are global settings.
| | 04:28 | They apply across your
entire project to all views.
| | 04:31 | You'd certainly want to start there.
| | 04:32 | In the next movie we will look at
how we can start fine-tuning it on a
| | 04:35 | view-by-view basis, where we'll
start in object styles, where we'll
| | 04:38 | fine-tune the graphics of our line
weights particularly and line types and
| | 04:43 | colors if necessary.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with visibility/graphic overrides| 00:00 | There are many ways to manipulate the
graphical display of elements in Revit projects.
| | 00:04 | It's really important to begin with a
good understanding of the overall default
| | 00:07 | used in your project at the top level of
the display hierarchy before you go in
| | 00:11 | and start modifying things at an override level.
| | 00:14 | So, for example, in the previous movie
called Object Styles, you want to start
| | 00:17 | there and make sure that you have an
understanding of what's controlling the
| | 00:20 | overall graphics first, and then if
need be, you can come in and start
| | 00:24 | manipulating graphics at a
particular view-by-view level.
| | 00:27 | So in this lesson we have a file here
called Visibility Graphics and we're
| | 00:31 | going to look at a few examples where
you might want to make some changes to
| | 00:34 | some of your views that are a little
bit different than the way they are
| | 00:37 | displaying in other views.
| | 00:39 | This floor plan is showing me furniture,
it's showing me electrical fixtures,
| | 00:43 | and it's showing me some
dimensions and some other things.
| | 00:46 | You may want to have a separate electrical
power plan and a separate furniture plan.
| | 00:51 | So to do that, what you need to do is
learn how to duplicate existing views and
| | 00:55 | then how to change the graphical
settings of those views so that they look
| | 00:58 | different from one another.
| | 00:59 | I'm in Level 1 floor plan and if I
select the floor plan, I can right-click
| | 01:04 | on it and there is a Duplicate View and
there are actually three different options.
| | 01:09 | We're going to focus on
the first two in this movie.
| | 01:12 | If you just simply do Duplicate, you're
going to get a copy of Level 1 that only
| | 01:18 | shows model geometry and
none of the annotations.
| | 01:22 | So there are no dimensions here, there
are no room tags, and in some cases that
| | 01:25 | may be exactly what you want.
| | 01:26 | If I go back to Level 1 and do right-
click, Duplicate with Detailing, Copy 2 of
| | 01:33 | Level 1, this is an exact copy of
Level 1 including all annotation.
| | 01:38 | All door tags, window tags,
room tags and dimensions.
| | 01:41 | So that's the first step is deciding
whether or not you want to start with the
| | 01:45 | annotation from the previous view or
whether or not you want to remove that.
| | 01:49 | Now if you need some of the annotation
and not all of it, you're still going to
| | 01:52 | want to Duplicate with Detailing in
most cases and then just remove the
| | 01:55 | annotation you don't want.
| | 01:56 | So in this example, I am
going to start with this one.
| | 01:59 | I am going to right-click it again and
choose Rename and I am going to call
| | 02:02 | this Furniture Plan, but I probably
ought to say Level 1 Furniture Plan.
| | 02:09 | So this is going to be my Level 1
Furniture Plan and the first thing I want to
| | 02:13 | do is I want to clean it up a little bit.
| | 02:15 | I do want to see the room tags but
not really any of the other tags.
| | 02:19 | So I am going to make a big old
selection around the entire floor plan, and that
| | 02:25 | highlights everything, then I will
click my Filter button, check None,
| | 02:30 | and I want to only select
the stuff I want to delete.
| | 02:34 | Door tags, dimensions, window tags.
| | 02:38 | Now, deleting dimensions, this is
not model geometry, so it's only being
| | 02:42 | deleted from this view.
| | 02:44 | If I go back to the original Level 1
View, you can see that I still have all of
| | 02:48 | the dimensions and tags intact over here.
| | 02:50 | So let me return to the furniture plan.
| | 02:52 | So now we've gotten rid of the tags we want.
| | 02:54 | Now unlike tags, if I were to
delete electrical fixtures, they would be
| | 02:59 | deleted everywhere.
| | 03:00 | So that, we don't want to do.
| | 03:02 | We want to take a different approach here.
| | 03:03 | So here we're going to actually hide
the electrical fixtures in this view only,
| | 03:09 | as opposed to deleting them.
| | 03:10 | Now, there is a couple of ways we can do that.
| | 03:12 | We can do it with the Visibility Graphics
dialog, and I'd like to show you that way first.
| | 03:17 | So we're going to go to the View tab.
| | 03:18 | We're going to click on Visibility Graphics.
| | 03:20 | Notice that the shortcut for that is VG.
| | 03:23 | You'll be using Visibility Graphics
quite often, so you probably want to get the
| | 03:26 | hang of using the shortcut for this, VG.
And I would go down and I would find
| | 03:31 | electrical fixtures, and I
would simply uncheck the box.
| | 03:34 | That will make those items
invisible in this view only.
| | 03:37 | Now again, this is a view specific change.
| | 03:40 | If I return to Level 1, you can see that
electrical fixtures are still visible here.
| | 03:44 | So I will go back to the furniture plan
and everything looks pretty good and so
| | 03:49 | I'm confident that this is the plan that I want.
| | 03:52 | So I am going to be comfortable with this one.
| | 03:54 | Let's do one more example.
| | 03:56 | I am going to right-click Level 1,
duplicate it with detailing, rename it,
| | 04:00 | and I will call this Level 1 Power Plan.
| | 04:06 | Now here I will show you an alternative to
the method I just showed you to hide things.
| | 04:10 | Once again, I'm going to select
everything. Filter, check None, and delete
| | 04:19 | dimensions, door tags, and window tags.
| | 04:23 | Your alternative of course is to
duplicate without detailing and then
| | 04:27 | re-add your Room tags.
| | 04:28 | Some might argue that it's just as
easy to do that as it is to do the method
| | 04:32 | that I'm showing, but I think it's a "6 of one
and 1/2 dozen of the other" proposition, so
| | 04:36 | I'll leave that up to you.
| | 04:37 | Now here, I want to see the electrical fixtures,
but perhaps I don't want to see the furniture.
| | 04:42 | So I could go to VG and uncheck
Furniture, or I can select one of my furniture
| | 04:48 | items, and up here on the Ribbon,
there is this little light bulb icon for
| | 04:52 | Hide & View, and if I click on that, it's
actually a dropdown, and we can hide two ways.
| | 04:58 | If I were to just choose the first one,
Hide Elements, we will talk about that
| | 05:01 | in the future movie. That
would only hide this one table.
| | 05:04 | But if I use this one, Hide Category, and
you can see the shortcut for that is VH,
| | 05:09 | that will hide everything that shares
the category of the item I have selected,
| | 05:14 | which is furniture in this case.
| | 05:16 | So that will hide all the furniture,
and that would be exactly the same as if
| | 05:19 | I typed VG and unchecked the furniture box.
You'll notice how it's just done it for me.
| | 05:24 | So that can be sometimes a little bit
quicker if you know that you just want to
| | 05:28 | hide items like the one that you have selected.
| | 05:30 | So you end up in the same place;
you have both of those methods.
| | 05:34 | Now I am going to undo. Perhaps
instead of hiding the furniture, what you'd
| | 05:38 | actually like to do is just make the
furniture a little bit less obvious.
| | 05:42 | Let's half tone it, for example.
| | 05:44 | I can do the same thing.
| | 05:45 | I can go to VG and make the
modification, or right below the little light bulb,
| | 05:50 | there is a little Paintbrush icon.
| | 05:52 | I am going to choose that, and
we have Override by Category.
| | 05:56 | Now when I select that that will take
me to VG automatically and highlight the
| | 06:01 | furniture item for me.
| | 06:02 | So it's a little quicker than my
typing VG and then going to find that
| | 06:06 | category, particularly if you are
not sure which category something is.
| | 06:09 | Now it's pretty obvious that
this was furniture, but who knows?
| | 06:11 | Maybe in some cases you
might want to just be sure.
| | 06:13 | All I have to do is check the
Halftone box right here and when I click OK,
| | 06:18 | you'll see that instead of disappearing,
all the furniture drops back to 50% gray,
| | 06:22 | and so it's a little bit less
obvious, but it might be helpful to have the
| | 06:25 | furniture nearby, so that the guys
laying out the electrical outlets kind of
| | 06:30 | know where to put the power and so on.
| | 06:31 | So those are a few different methods
you have to modify the graphics of your
| | 06:36 | various views at a view-by-view level,
and again, I really want to remind you,
| | 06:40 | if I go back to Level 1, that all the
changes we made only affected that view.
| | 06:45 | So unlike object styles which was a global
change, these changes are view by view-by-view.
| | 06:50 | Very powerful indeed!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Hide/Isolate| 00:00 | As your model becomes more complex, it
can become difficult to edit certain items.
| | 00:04 | Sometimes there is an item in the
way of another item and you need to see
| | 00:08 | behind it, or sometimes you just find an
item in a view that shouldn't really be there.
| | 00:12 | In the last two movies, we talked
about different levels of the hierarchy
| | 00:15 | of visibility setting.
| | 00:16 | So, we started with object styles, and
we said that these were global changes,
| | 00:19 | and then we saw that to turn things on
and off, we could use Visibility Graphics
| | 00:23 | on a view by view basis.
| | 00:24 | Well, sometimes, you don't
want all the furniture to hide.
| | 00:27 | You just want that one piece of furniture
to hide, or something along those lines.
| | 00:31 | Well, it turns out that you can
actually hide and edit elements right down
| | 00:35 | to the element level.
| | 00:36 | I just want to caution you, always try
and do it globally first, if that makes
| | 00:40 | sense, and then work your
way down to individual edits.
| | 00:43 | There are two ways that we
can actually do such editing.
| | 00:46 | We have our temporary variety
and we have our permanent variety.
| | 00:49 | So onscreen right now I have a file
called Hide Isolate, and I'm looking at a
| | 00:53 | 3D View, and you can see that I have
my link to Revit file site file here.
| | 00:57 | This was linked then back in Chapter 5.
| | 01:00 | Perhaps I want to do some work on the
foundation walls of this file and I
| | 01:04 | want to work in 3D, but of course
the site file is concealing my view of
| | 01:10 | those foundation walls.
| | 01:11 | So, this is a good example of where we
could use temporary hide to temporarily
| | 01:16 | take the site file and
just get it out of our way.
| | 01:19 | So, all we have to do is select it,
and then if you look down on the View
| | 01:24 | Control Bar, which is this
little Temporary Hide/Isolate icon.
| | 01:29 | It kind of looks like little sunglasses,
and we're going to go ahead and click on that.
| | 01:33 | Now, we have Hide Element, we have
Hide Category, and we also have Isolate
| | 01:37 | Category and Isolate Element.
| | 01:39 | So, each of these works a little differently.
| | 01:42 | If you do Hide Element,
that's what we want in this case.
| | 01:44 | It will just hide whatever you have
selected and this will work on one
| | 01:48 | object or several objects.
| | 01:49 | So, however many you have selected,
and again in the scenario that I just
| | 01:53 | discussed, I could now zoom in and get a
better look at the foundation walls and
| | 01:58 | the footings and so forth
without the topography in the way.
| | 02:01 | When I'm done making whatever edit I
need to make to those items, I could go
| | 02:06 | back to the sunglasses, and I can
choose the Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate mode.
| | 02:12 | Now, the alternative approach there was
to select and I could do Isolate Element.
| | 02:19 | That's actually the exact opposite.
| | 02:21 | So, instead of hiding what you have
selected, it hides everything else in the
| | 02:26 | model and again that's also temporary.
| | 02:28 | What do we mean by that?
| | 02:29 | Well, if you look at the outline of my
screen, you'll notice that I have this
| | 02:34 | cyan colored border all
the way around my screen.
| | 02:37 | That's Revit's way of letting
you know that you're in this
| | 02:39 | Temporary Hide/Isolate mode.
| | 02:42 | That mode stays active only
during the current work session.
| | 02:45 | So, if I were to close Revit and go
home for the day and reload the project
| | 02:49 | tomorrow, nothing would be
hidden or isolated any longer.
| | 02:52 | If I were to print this file, it
would still print everything as if it
| | 02:56 | weren't hidden or isolated.
| | 02:57 | So, it's a temporary on-screen viewing
mode just meant to make your job a little
| | 03:01 | bit easier while you're working.
| | 03:02 | Of course, you can always reset it at anytime.
| | 03:06 | One other example of using
Temporary Hide/Isolate is it also
| | 03:11 | works categorically.
| | 03:13 | So, if I select a single element and I
say Hide Category, then in this view it
| | 03:20 | will temporarily hide all columns.
| | 03:23 | Again, Isolate Category would do
the same thing except it would hide
| | 03:26 | everything but columns.
| | 03:27 | So, those modes all work view by view.
| | 03:30 | So, if I have something selected and
hidden in this 3D view and I go to my
| | 03:36 | Level 1 Floor Plan, it is not selected
and hidden in that 2D floor plan view.
| | 03:41 | It was only in the 3D
view where I did the hiding.
| | 03:44 | So that's Temporary Hide.
| | 03:45 | There is also another form of
hiding called Permanent Hide.
| | 03:49 | The way this works is when you select
the item and you say I want to hide it,
| | 03:53 | it hides it permanently until
you choose to go and un-hide it.
| | 03:57 | So, it would print that way, and it would
still be hidden tomorrow when you open the file.
| | 04:02 | So, for example, while I was working on
the curtain wall, I went in and cut this
| | 04:06 | section here along the front of the
building, just to make it a little easier to
| | 04:09 | see what I was working on.
| | 04:11 | If I double-click it, you can see very
simple, just looking right at the curtain wall.
| | 04:16 | I may not want that section bubble to
actually show in this view, because I
| | 04:21 | don't really intend to put that section
on a sheet by itself or anything. I was
| | 04:25 | just using that as a working view to
make it easier to work in the curtain wall.
| | 04:28 | So, I can select that section item and
then up here on the toolbar I'm going
| | 04:33 | to go to Hide Elements.
| | 04:35 | In the Visibility Graphics
movie, we looked at Hide Category.
| | 04:38 | That would hide all
section markers in this view.
| | 04:41 | That's not what I want.
| | 04:42 | I want to do Hide Elements, which will
hide only the one that I have selected.
| | 04:46 | Let's look at another quick example.
| | 04:48 | If I go to the foundation plan, we have
a little bit of work to do in here, some
| | 04:52 | we'll do in this movie, some
we'll do in a future movie.
| | 04:55 | But you'll notice here that there is this sort
of floating dashed line thing. What is that?
| | 05:00 | Well, if I pause over it, it's actually
an opening in a wall on the level above,
| | 05:05 | this guy right here.
| | 05:07 | Just because of the way that family
is designed, it's interacting with the
| | 05:11 | foundation plan and it
thinks it needs to show it here.
| | 05:13 | Now, you could go through a lot of
effort to try and figure out why it's
| | 05:17 | displaying and edit the family and do a
variety of things to try and make it not
| | 05:21 | display, but it might be easier to just
say it doesn't need to be in this view.
| | 05:25 | I'm just going to select it and go to Hide
Elements, and that takes care of the problem.
| | 05:29 | Now, in both cases, you hidden something,
and it's a Permanent Hide, so it's gone.
| | 05:34 | How would you get it back?
| | 05:35 | What if you changed your mind?
| | 05:36 | If I go back to Level 1 Floor Plan
and say I really want to get that
| | 05:39 | section back in here,
| | 05:40 | I want to see that now, because I'm
actually going to put it on the sheet after all,
| | 05:43 | how do I get it back?
| | 05:44 | Well, down here on the View Control bar,
there is a little light bulb icon, and
| | 05:48 | it's called Reveal Hidden Elements.
| | 05:51 | So, I'm going to click on that, and
instead of the cyan colored border that
| | 05:55 | we saw before, we now get the sort of
maroon colored border going around the screen.
| | 05:59 | It will indicate to us
that we're in Reveal mode.
| | 06:03 | It grays out the model and then
anything that's hidden in view will display
| | 06:07 | also in this sort of reddish maroon color.
| | 06:10 | You can see, if I zoom out just a touch,
that the site plan was already hidden
| | 06:14 | in this view when we started.
| | 06:16 | When I zoom back in, this section that
we just hid a moment ago ourselves is
| | 06:21 | hidden, and I can select it and then up
here on the Ribbon, I can choose Unhide Element.
| | 06:27 | That will bring it back.
| | 06:28 | Then I can click either here to close
the mode or back on the light bulb to
| | 06:33 | close the mode, either one.
| | 06:35 | It will get me out of that mode and
the section is now displayed again.
| | 06:38 | So, use Temporary Hide/Isolate when you
just want to get something out of your
| | 06:43 | way while you're working, because it's
kind of in the way and you just need to
| | 06:46 | see it clearer, and it will come back
again the next time you open the file or
| | 06:50 | when you reset the Temporary
Hide. You use Permanent Hide
| | 06:54 | when you don't want it to display, you
don't want it to print, you want it off
| | 06:57 | the view permanently. Both of these
changes are view by view, so they only
| | 07:01 | affect the view you're in. Both have utility.
| | 07:04 | Then if you need to get things back
that you've permanently hidden, you can use
| | 07:08 | the Reveal mode, the little
light bulb, to get things back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding view range| 00:00 | Orthographic views in Revit are
generated from the 3D model using a variety of
| | 00:04 | rules derived from
conventional architectural drafting.
| | 00:07 | When it comes to plan views,
architectural drafting convention treats the plan
| | 00:11 | as basically a horizontal section,
cutting the building at a predetermined
| | 00:14 | height above the floor, and
then looking down into the model.
| | 00:17 | Naturally, there are many other rules
that are in abstractions that are applied
| | 00:21 | to the graphics to achieve
an acceptable floor plan.
| | 00:23 | However, the concept of cut plane
is used quite literally in Revit.
| | 00:27 | In this movie, we will look not just
at the cut plane, but the entire view
| | 00:30 | range and understand how it functions and
how we can manipulate it in floor plan views.
| | 00:34 | What I have onscreen is a file called
View Range and I am at the second floor
| | 00:39 | right now, and what I would like to do
is direct your attention to these windows
| | 00:43 | right over here, and let's
just talk about view range.
| | 00:46 | Again, from architectural drafting, you
should be pretty comfortable with the concept.
| | 00:50 | Essentially, you're cutting through
the building at a certain predetermined
| | 00:54 | height and looking down, and that
predetermined height in Revit is 4 feet,
| | 00:58 | which matches up with my experience in
architectural drafting school. Probably yours as well.
| | 01:02 | So let's go ahead and take
a look at this in Elevation.
| | 01:06 | So we can talk a little bit about
what we want to do here, just to
| | 01:10 | demonstrate the concept.
| | 01:11 | So we were looking at these two
windows in that second floor, and this is
| | 01:16 | actually the roof level.
| | 01:17 | That's why I wanted to back
up and check. This is Level 2.
| | 01:20 | And if you imagine cutting it 4
feet, you would be right about here.
| | 01:23 | Let me go ahead and just draw a line there.
| | 01:29 | And we can even take that line and
make it exactly 4 feet, and so you can see
| | 01:34 | that it cuts right through those windows.
| | 01:37 | Now, if I copied that line up to about
here somewhere, let's just make that a
| | 01:44 | nice even number, if we cut it 12 feet,
we would actually be cutting through
| | 01:48 | these clerestory windows that
are up much higher in the wall.
| | 01:52 | So let's take a quick look at how we
can manipulate that setting and that
| | 01:55 | should give you a pretty good idea of how
the view range functions in a Revit floor plan.
| | 02:00 | So let's go back to Level 2.
| | 02:01 | This is what it looks
like when we cut it 4 feet.
| | 02:03 | Now, we've discussed this before, but
I just want to reiterate, if nothing is
| | 02:07 | selected in your model, then what you
are seeing on the Properties palette is
| | 02:11 | actually the properties of the current view.
| | 02:14 | So you can verify that over here,
because it says Floor Plan: Level 2.
| | 02:18 | If you have something selected, like
this column, it will say Column and it
| | 02:22 | will say that you have one column selected here.
| | 02:24 | But you can always still get back
to the properties of Floor Plan:
| | 02:27 | Level 2 by clicking this dropdown.
| | 02:28 | So either way, I mean, I don't need
anything selected, but I just want you to
| | 02:32 | always pay attention to what it says here.
| | 02:34 | So make sure that it says Floor Plan:
| | 02:35 | Level 2, because if it doesn't, when
you scroll down, you won't find the View
| | 02:40 | Range setting that we are looking for.
| | 02:42 | So down here under Extents, we have
View Range, and we are going to click this
| | 02:45 | Edit button, and it will bring up this box.
| | 02:47 | And there is actually four settings and they
define basically three zones in the view range.
| | 02:53 | So let's start with the first two
that are the easiest to discuss.
| | 02:56 | Bottom is at the Associated
Level, Level 2, and that's just 0.
| | 03:00 | So it's 0 from Level 2, so
it's right there at the floor.
| | 03:03 | And then the cut plane is also
relative to the Associative Level.
| | 03:07 | We cannot change that.
| | 03:08 | So that's grayed out.
| | 03:09 | But we can change the offset, and it's
defaulting to the 4 feet above the floor,
| | 03:14 | as we just discussed.
| | 03:15 | Furthermore, the view range does
actually take into account geometry that occurs
| | 03:20 | a little bit above the cut plane and
even potentially a little bit below the
| | 03:23 | bottom of the view range, and so
that's what those last two settings are for.
| | 03:26 | We have got Top and we have got View Depth,
and we'll discuss those in a few moment.
| | 03:29 | So let's just focus our
energy right now on the cut plane.
| | 03:32 | In the Elevation view we drew a line
at 12 feet, what I want to show you here
| | 03:36 | is we can't get away with just typing
12 feet and clicking OK. We'll get an
| | 03:40 | error message from Revit.
| | 03:41 | So one last rule that you need to know,
these numbers need to be in order.
| | 03:44 | So that means it doesn't matter what
you set this number to, but this number
| | 03:48 | here at the top of the view range has to be
at least equal to the cut plane or higher.
| | 03:53 | So I am going to just go ahead and
make it 12 feet as well. It doesn't matter.
| | 03:56 | It can be the same, but it can't be lower.
| | 03:58 | So I am going to go ahead and click OK,
and you'll see these windows got smaller.
| | 04:03 | We are cutting through those two upper windows.
| | 04:05 | Now, of course we kind of
lost many of the other objects.
| | 04:08 | We're no longer seeing any of the
furniture and we are not seeing the doors,
| | 04:12 | because we are no longer cutting through those.
| | 04:13 | We are not seeing these windows over here.
| | 04:15 | So we wouldn't want to keep the drawing
set to this setting, but I just wanted
| | 04:20 | to use it to illustrate for
you how the view range works.
| | 04:22 | So I am actually going to undo that
back to the setting that we were at.
| | 04:26 | So if your modification is moving
within a few inches, you are probably okay.
| | 04:30 | You would probably get away with it,
but if you're making a dramatic change,
| | 04:34 | then you might want to take a
slightly different approach.
| | 04:36 | So let me take you down to the first
floor and go take a look at the stairs, and
| | 04:44 | we can discuss a similar
situation right over here.
| | 04:47 | Now, the stairs are also being cut at 4
feet, like everything else in the floor
| | 04:53 | plan is, and that gives us this
diagonal cut line right about here.
| | 04:57 | Now, my preference would be for the diagonal
cut line to actually occur after the landing.
| | 05:01 | Okay. I think that's a nicer graphic.
| | 05:03 | If you don't agree, you can leave yours alone.
| | 05:05 | But what I am going to do is I want to
adjust just the stair and not change the
| | 05:09 | rest of the floor plan, because to get
it to go after the landing, I would need
| | 05:12 | to increase the cut height to about 8
feet, maybe even 9 feet, and then we'll
| | 05:16 | have the same problem we just
witnessed on the second floor.
| | 05:19 | The stair will cut really nicely,
but then all the doors and windows will
| | 05:21 | disappear, and the rest of the
floor plan will not be what we want.
| | 05:25 | So where is the compromise?
| | 05:26 | We go to the View tab, and under Plan
Views, we're going to choose this item
| | 05:31 | here called the Plan Region.
| | 05:33 | This is a sketch-based object and you
can sketch it any shape you want, and all
| | 05:37 | I am going to do is just go to the
Rectangle tool here and just kind of make it
| | 05:43 | big enough to surround the stair.
| | 05:47 | I want to just nudge it slightly.
| | 05:49 | I am going to use the arrow key on the
keyboard there to just nudge it slightly,
| | 05:54 | so that it's just big enough to
cover the stair and not any bigger.
| | 05:59 | I am going to click Finish and
you'll see this dashed green line appear.
| | 06:06 | Now, if I selected that dashed green
line, this is a plan region, over here on
| | 06:10 | the Modify Plan Region tab, you will
see a View Range button, and if I click on
| | 06:15 | that, it's the same settings we were
just looking at for the whole floor plan,
| | 06:18 | but now they only apply in this rectangle.
| | 06:21 | So I am going to take this
and go up to maybe 8' 6".
| | 06:25 | I'll increase this to 9', so it's a
little bit taller, click OK, and you'll see
| | 06:30 | that the cut moves up a little higher.
| | 06:32 | Now, it's actually a little higher than
I'd like, so I'll probably go ahead and
| | 06:34 | modify and drop it down a little
bit less than that. Let's try 7.
| | 06:40 | That's a little nicer, and there you go,
and that did not affect the doors or
| | 06:45 | the furniture or anything else.
| | 06:46 | Everything else is still displaying
just fine and now we get the stairs
| | 06:49 | looking the way we want.
| | 06:50 | So we could do the same approach,
| | 06:51 | if I went back to the second floor, to
make those clerestory windows display if
| | 06:55 | we needed those to display instead.
| | 06:56 | Now, in this case, because I have lower
windows, I am not going to do that, but
| | 06:59 | I could just draw a simple little
rectangle right there and increase the cut
| | 07:03 | range just in that zone.
| | 07:04 | Now, you will actually see that there is
already one in here in this view, and I
| | 07:07 | am going to click on it and do Edit
View Range, just to show you the settings.
| | 07:11 | Here the cut range has been modified so
that it goes up above that low roof, and
| | 07:17 | that's what's allowing us to see the
low roof here in our second floor plan.
| | 07:21 | So you can use these settings in a
variety of different ways to get the floor
| | 07:26 | plans to display exactly the
way you need them to display.
| | 07:29 | Whether or not you edit the overall
view range of the entire view or whether or
| | 07:34 | not you add these plan regions to just
isolate the change into certain areas,
| | 07:38 | it works the same way in both cases.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Linework tool| 00:00 | So at this point you've edited your
object styles, you've done some view
| | 00:04 | visibility graphic overrides, view-by-
view, maybe you've hidden some individual
| | 00:08 | elements, and you're still finding
one or two little areas where you can't
| | 00:13 | quite get the graphics to do exactly
what you want because if you hide the
| | 00:16 | element, it hides the whole thing, and
you really only want to hide part of it,
| | 00:19 | or if you change the line weight of
the object, it changes line weight
| | 00:23 | everywhere, and you really only wanted
to change the line weight in just this
| | 00:26 | little edge. So what do you do?
| | 00:27 | Well, you certainly want to use this
next technique after you've exhausted all
| | 00:31 | the other possibilities, but if you have,
we have the tool called Linework that
| | 00:35 | allows you to literally reach in and
touch any individual edge of an existing
| | 00:40 | object and change the
line work of that particular edge.
| | 00:43 | So let's go ahead and take a look.
| | 00:45 | I am in a file here called Linework, and
I am looking at the second floor, and I
| | 00:48 | have this Open to Below space here, and
there is a floor element right here that
| | 00:54 | I am highlighting right now, and that
edge of the floor really probably wants to
| | 00:59 | show in the plan view down below.
| | 01:01 | So if I go back to Level 1, you can see
that this is the same general area, but
| | 01:07 | we're not seeing any indication that
we have this balcony up above our head.
| | 01:11 | Now there are a variety of ways
that we might choose to approach that.
| | 01:14 | We could certainly try to select the floor
object and make it do what we want it to do.
| | 01:18 | We could just draw some line-work and
fake it in, but the problem with drawing
| | 01:22 | line-work is that it's not
associated with the model in any way.
| | 01:25 | So what we are actually going to do
is we are going to temporarily make the
| | 01:27 | floor display, and then using the
Linework tool we are going to override the
| | 01:32 | two edges that we need to
make them dashed above our head.
| | 01:35 | So how do we do that?
| | 01:36 | Let's make sure that we are looking at the
floor plan properties which are for Floor Plan:
| | 01:40 | Level 1, scroll down a little, and
there is a property here called Underlay,
| | 01:45 | currently set to None, and I am going
to change that to Level 2 and let's go
| | 01:49 | ahead and click Apply.
| | 01:50 | Now sometimes that gives me what I
want and other times I have to change the
| | 01:54 | Underlay Orientation to Reflected Ceiling Plan.
| | 01:57 | So I am going to choose between the two
and see which one gives me a better result.
| | 02:00 | I actually like Reflected
Ceiling Plan because it's less busy.
| | 02:03 | The floor plan was showing me the
railing and everything else and all I really
| | 02:05 | need is that edge of the floor.
| | 02:07 | That's all I am trying to get there.
| | 02:08 | Now the Underlay is literally like
an underlay in manual hand-drafting.
| | 02:13 | So if you remember back in the day
when we used to draft by hand on drawing
| | 02:17 | board, this is like taking one sheet
on mylar and slipping it underneath the
| | 02:21 | other sheet of mylar to use for reference.
| | 02:23 | So here is your second floor kind of
slipped underneath the first floor for reference.
| | 02:28 | Now notice that that's actually a live view.
| | 02:30 | So I can select, and I am selecting that
floor object and so it's not just visual.
| | 02:35 | That's real stuff.
| | 02:36 | So be careful there.
| | 02:37 | Now what I am going to do is go to the
Modify tab and right here on the View panel,
| | 02:41 | I have got the Linework tool,
and the shortcut for that is lw.
| | 02:44 | I am going to go ahead and click on that,
and what this tool does is it gives me
| | 02:49 | a list of line styles.
| | 02:51 | So from the list of line styles, I am
going to choose the one that I want, and
| | 02:54 | I am going to choose this one here,
Overhead lines, and what I can do is now
| | 02:58 | reach in here and touch the line in question,
and it will actually change it to a dashed line.
| | 03:05 | Now in that case I got the railing line,
so I am going to press the Tab key to
| | 03:09 | make sure I am getting the floor line.
| | 03:11 | If you look down at the status line,
you can see it says Floors, that's one
| | 03:14 | I want to click, and I get a single
dash line, and then I am going to click
| | 03:17 | it over here, and you can zoom in and make sure
that the extent of that line is what you want.
| | 03:22 | Turns out in this case is stop nice and
cleanly at the wall, but if it didn't,
| | 03:26 | I can actually drag that grip and
change the extent of this modification.
| | 03:31 | So that's a pretty handy thing to do.
| | 03:32 | I'll click the Modify tool.
| | 03:34 | I'll go back to my Floor Plan properties and
set the Underlay back to None to see the result.
| | 03:42 | So as you can see, we can use the
Linework tool to go in and make modifications,
| | 03:45 | whether it's to reveal these lines above
our head or maybe you want to use it to
| | 03:49 | show the edge of the roof, and on each
condition there is a variety of places
| | 03:52 | where this might be useful.
| | 03:53 | But you are literally going in, reaching
in, touching the line work in the object
| | 03:57 | and making just to add little tweak
that you need to get the graphics to look
| | 04:00 | just the way you want them to look.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using cutaway views| 00:00 | Most of the movies in this chapter
were about editing the graphics of
| | 00:03 | the display onscreen.
| | 00:05 | This one is related in the sense that
we're going to still be modifying the
| | 00:09 | way we're seeing our model, but it doesn't
really have anything to do with editing graphics.
| | 00:12 | What we are going to do instead is
actually customize a view entirely.
| | 00:16 | So looking at my stair here and maybe I
want to have a better understanding of
| | 00:20 | how my stair's coming together.
| | 00:21 | It might be nice to have a 3D view of this.
| | 00:24 | Now I could certainly use some of the
techniques we've covered in this chapter
| | 00:27 | so far, and I could do a 3D view, and
then I could come in here and start hiding
| | 00:33 | elements that are in my way.
| | 00:35 | Peel off the roof and maybe hide
some doors, and I could do this with
| | 00:39 | Temporary Hide, like you see here
onscreen, or I could do it with Permanent
| | 00:42 | Hide, what have you.
| | 00:43 | It gets a little tedious, and we might
still not even get exactly the view we want.
| | 00:47 | It turns out that there is actually a
much easier way to get in and look at
| | 00:51 | exactly what we want.
| | 00:52 | I am going to duplicate the 3D view, I am
going to rename that, 3D Stair, and click OK.
| | 01:00 | Now of course, it doesn't
look much like 3D Stair.
| | 01:02 | Now let me go ahead and reset this
Temporary Hide/Isolate, just start with a
| | 01:06 | clean view this way.
| | 01:07 | Now I have already on my Project
Browser a view called Section at Stair.
| | 01:13 | If you want to do this technique in
your own projects, you really want to make
| | 01:15 | sure that you have two things. You
have a 3D view, and you also have a floor
| | 01:20 | plan, an elevation or a section that
you want to match to that 3D view, because
| | 01:23 | if you come over here to the View Cube
in the 3D View and you right-click, we
| | 01:27 | have an Orient to View option, and you
can orient this view to match any of your
| | 01:33 | other views in your project.
| | 01:34 | So I could do a 3D floor plan, or I
could do a 3D of one of my elevations, or in
| | 01:39 | this case, I'm going to do a
3D of the Section at Stair.
| | 01:43 | It will spin the view around,
crop it down, make it match.
| | 01:47 | Let's go ahead and do a zf to zoom to
fit and get in a little closer, and then
| | 01:51 | I'll hold my Shift key down and drag my
wheel, and just like that we're able to
| | 01:57 | spin around and take a look, and you
can see that this is much nicer than
| | 02:01 | hiding a bunch of objects.
| | 02:03 | We can get in there and take a good look
at our stair and see that everything is
| | 02:07 | shaping up the way we want.
| | 02:08 | So make sure you name them carefully,
but a nice little trick that you should
| | 02:12 | have in your arsenal.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. RoomsAdding rooms| 00:00 | Room elements are a
special object type in Revit.
| | 00:03 | A room is something that we all
understand without too much explanation.
| | 00:06 | We occupy rooms in our everyday
lives, but what is a room really?
| | 00:10 | Is it the four walls that surround it or
is it the space of the air that surround it?
| | 00:14 | This is precisely the challenge that
the Revit programmers have to solve when
| | 00:17 | they were devising the room object.
| | 00:19 | In Revit, we have special room
elements that automatically conform to the
| | 00:22 | shape of the surrounding geometry, and thus
accurately represent the space so enclosed.
| | 00:27 | Rooms have some special behaviors in
Revit from the way that they are added to
| | 00:31 | the model, to the way that they
display in the views, to the way that you
| | 00:34 | actually edit them.
| | 00:35 | The basic behaviors of rooms
will be the subject of this movie.
| | 00:38 | The file I have opened onscreen is called
Two Bedroom Unit, and it represents just
| | 00:42 | one of the units in our overall condo
building, and we're going to go ahead and
| | 00:46 | add some rooms to this file.
| | 00:47 | I'm going to start in the Home tab and
over on the right-hand side,we have the
| | 00:53 | Room button, and I'll go ahead and
click on that. The shortcut for that is rm, and
| | 00:58 | if I move my mouse out here somewhere
out in free space, you'll see that the
| | 01:03 | room appears is just sort of a generic
blue rectangle, and in fact, if I went
| | 01:09 | ahead and clicked it out there, I will
get a "room is not in a properly enclosed
| | 01:14 | region" message from Revit.
| | 01:16 | Now, I could ignore this message.
| | 01:18 | It doesn't actually prevent me from
creating the room, but this room that would
| | 01:22 | be created out here first of all
would be hard to see, because you'll notice
| | 01:27 | that unless I move my mouse into the
general vicinity, it doesn't anyway appear
| | 01:32 | that there's anything there.
| | 01:33 | The only real indication that I have that
there is something there is the room tag.
| | 01:37 | So if you really need to create a
freestanding room you certainly can do it,
| | 01:41 | but generally speaking that's not
really the right way to do it or the
| | 01:44 | preferred way to do it.
| | 01:45 | So let me go ahead and undo that, go
to Room and show you what happens if
| | 01:50 | instead, I move my mouse
inside the space somewhere.
| | 01:54 | So you'll notice that that blue
outline now highlights the enclosed spaces
| | 02:00 | within the project file.
| | 02:02 | So I'm going to go ahead and start here
in this upper corner and I'll click to
| | 02:06 | place a room in that location, and
then I'll place another one right here.
| | 02:11 | Notice that the room tags do
try and line up with one another.
| | 02:15 | Place another here and
another here and continue.
| | 02:24 | Put one here in the utility room and
the two closets, and then let's talk about
| | 02:30 | the challenge we have with this room here.
| | 02:33 | If I were to add this room, you see how
it's going to fill all of the remaining space.
| | 02:38 | So I'm going to go ahead
and undo that last room, okay.
| | 02:42 | So we don't want one big room that's
going to fill all of that contained space.
| | 02:47 | So what we're going to do instead is
we're going to subdivide this space into
| | 02:51 | smaller areas, and we do that with a
tool called a Room Separation Line.
| | 02:57 | So you can find that on the dropdown for
the Room button on the Home tab as well
| | 03:02 | and a Room Separation Line is a kind of
model line in Revit that you simply draw
| | 03:08 | two points like any other line. In fact,
you can draw at any shape you like and
| | 03:12 | I can draw them, like so.
| | 03:14 | I'll press Escape one time. The
default behavior is the chain, so it wants to
| | 03:22 | draw several room separation lines in
a chain sequence and if I just press
| | 03:26 | Escape one time, I break that chain.
| | 03:29 | So, what I'm going to do is just
close off each of the rooms that I want
| | 03:38 | to generate with this.
| | 03:40 | Now I'm going to continue out
here and sort of trace over.
| | 03:44 | I might need to press my
Tab key here. There we go.
| | 03:52 | I'm going to trace over the patio, because I
want to actually add a room out there as well.
| | 04:01 | And I need to do that because even
though we see a line there, that's just the
| | 04:05 | edge of the floor down below.
| | 04:07 | That floor doesn't actually
bound space around the room.
| | 04:12 | It would bound the floor of the room,
but it won't bound space on the three
| | 04:16 | sides like the Room Separation Lines would do.
| | 04:19 | So without those three lines, we would
get one of those freestanding rooms again.
| | 04:22 | So now I can go back to my Room tool,
and you'll see that these individual
| | 04:27 | spaces now are recognized and I'm
able to add separate rooms in here for the
| | 04:33 | living room and for the
dining room and the kitchen.
| | 04:36 | So that makes a little bit more sense
in terms of labeling and so on and then
| | 04:41 | out here, because I added the Room Separation
Lines, we can see that we have our patio as well.
| | 04:50 | So these are few other
things that we could look at.
| | 04:53 | I mean right now you can see that all
of the rooms just have the generic name
| | 04:57 | Room and the numbers occurred just
in the order in which I placed them.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to talk about
numbering of rooms in another movie.
| | 05:05 | So I'm going to skip over that for right now.
| | 05:06 | But as far as the naming goes, it's pretty easy.
| | 05:10 | You could just simply select the room tag.
| | 05:13 | That will let you reach in and change
the room name and so I'm going to just go
| | 05:19 | in there and type what I want the name
to be. Foyer in that case and kitchen in
| | 05:24 | this case and so forth and so on.
| | 05:26 | I'm not going to do every room,
but you get the general idea.
| | 05:28 | The other way that you can change any
of the parameters of the room, whether it
| | 05:32 | be the name or the number or even the
parameters we're not seeing in the tag,
| | 05:36 | would be to select the room.
| | 05:38 | So if you move your mouse around
onscreen, you'll notice that when it
| | 05:42 | pre-highlights, there's actually two
things that pre-highlight. The outline of
| | 05:45 | the room, which if I get my mouse near
there, I might be able to get, but you
| | 05:50 | see how it's difficult to select it at
that point because there's always other
| | 05:53 | geometry in the way.
| | 05:55 | Now, I could certainly press my Tab key,
and eventually I would get to the room,
| | 05:58 | but this X that they have crossing
through the room, they've devised as a way to
| | 06:03 | make it easier to select rooms.
| | 06:05 | So that's really what that's about,
those sort of indicators there, and if you
| | 06:09 | click on it, that highlights the room
and it tints in this shaded blue color,
| | 06:13 | and then if we look over here on the
Properties palette, you're going to see all
| | 06:17 | of the properties for
that room including its name.
| | 06:20 | So this is another way that I could
change the name, the number, any comments,
| | 06:26 | who occupies the room, which is more
of a commercial designation, but Finish
| | 06:31 | is, I could say that this floor finish
is carpet and so forth and fill in all
| | 06:36 | those different settings.
| | 06:37 | So when I click Apply, that change will
apply to the room that I had selected.
| | 06:43 | You can add rooms easily enough.
| | 06:44 | They will look for the bounding objects.
| | 06:47 | If you don't have convenient bounding
objects, you can use these Room Separation
| | 06:51 | Lines to create your boundaries and
then after you've added the rooms, you can
| | 06:56 | easily select them either through the
tags or through the room itself to make
| | 07:01 | edits to any of their internal properties.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling room numbering| 00:00 | In the Adding Rooms movie, we saw the
basics of how to add rooms and how they
| | 00:03 | behave in your Revit project.
| | 00:05 | In this project, we're going to take
a slightly more systematic approach
| | 00:08 | to adding the rooms, with the intention of
controlling the way the numbering occurs.
| | 00:13 | Revit does a pretty good job of
sequentially numbering things as you add them.
| | 00:17 | We saw this back when we added column
grids and perhaps you've noticed it in
| | 00:20 | some of the other objects you might have added.
| | 00:22 | But even though it does number things
sequentially, if you don't catch the
| | 00:26 | numbering right away and set the
proper first starting number, then all the
| | 00:31 | sequential numbering could be wrong.
| | 00:33 | So, you're going to want to go in and
make sure that you follow a systematic
| | 00:37 | approach and then you'll save
yourself some re-numbering effort later.
| | 00:41 | So, let's take a look.
| | 00:42 | I'm going to go to the Home tab and I'm
here in a file called Office Rooms and
| | 00:49 | it's in the Chapter 9 folder.
| | 00:51 | We're in the first floor plan.
| | 00:53 | We've got a couple of things going here.
| | 00:55 | Of course, we've got our layout, and
there already are some room separation lines.
| | 00:59 | Now, before I go ahead and start
adding the rooms in here, let me just do one
| | 01:01 | little trick that's very common in many firms.
| | 01:04 | It's sort of a very common practice thing
to do is I'm going to go to the Manage tab.
| | 01:10 | On the Manage tab, under Additional Settings,
I'm going to go to the Line Styles dialog.
| | 01:15 | Now here, I'm going to take the Room
Separation line style, click its color and
| | 01:21 | change it to some bright
recognizable color, like orange.
| | 01:25 | Click OK and get back out of the dialog.
| | 01:28 | Now that makes it very easy for me to see
where the room separation lines are in this view.
| | 01:32 | Later, we can go into VG, Visibility/
Graphic Overrides, and we can actually turn
| | 01:37 | off the room separation lines for
printing purposes, but it'll be nice to see
| | 01:41 | where they are while we're working here.
| | 01:43 | I'm going to go to the Home tab, and
I'm going to click on Room, and I want to
| | 01:50 | decide where I want my first room to be.
| | 01:52 | So, in this case, I'm going
to use this room right here.
| | 01:55 | This is going to be the lobby space, so
I'll go ahead and make this the first room.
| | 01:59 | It should be fairly obvious, if you
did the previous movie on adding rooms,
| | 02:02 | that we're getting a room and a room
tag at the same time, but I just want to
| | 02:05 | point out that the reason that's
happening is because the Tag on Placement
| | 02:09 | button is selected here.
| | 02:11 | So, we're going to go ahead and leave that
selected and I'm going to click right here.
| | 02:14 | Now, here's the trick or here is the
process that I wanted you to follow.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to press Escape twice or
click my Modify tool to cancel out of that
| | 02:21 | command, because what I want to do
next is click on the room tag, click right
| | 02:26 | on the room number, and I want to
change that number to whatever I want the
| | 02:29 | first number to be.
| | 02:31 | If you don't remember to do that,
then the next number will just be two,
| | 02:35 | and then three, and then four, and you'll have
to go back and renumber all these rooms later.
| | 02:40 | But by remembering to change the number first,
you save yourself a little bit of effort ongoing.
| | 02:45 | So, let me go to room now,
and I'll add this next one.
| | 02:50 | I'm not going to worry about the names.
| | 02:52 | I showed you how to change the
names in the adding rooms movie.
| | 02:54 | So, we're going to just leave more room for
now, but you'll notice that that one says 102.
| | 02:58 | Then we'll go down here, and we'll make
this 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107, and 108 here.
| | 03:10 | I'm going to stop there for a moment.
| | 03:11 | You could do more the same on the rest
of the floor plan, but here's the second
| | 03:15 | half of the technique that
I want to share with you.
| | 03:18 | This part of the floor plan is pretty much
identical on the next floor of the building.
| | 03:24 | At the very least, you have this
corridor, you have these offices, and you have
| | 03:28 | this conference room.
| | 03:29 | So, it's going to make some sense for
me to get these as correct as possible,
| | 03:35 | before I go any further.
| | 03:38 | Now these, I don't want
to type them one at a time.
| | 03:40 | I certainly could, Office, Office,
Office, but that's a lot of typing and
| | 03:43 | there's only four offices here, but
in your projects, if you have many more
| | 03:46 | offices, you'll appreciate this next tip.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to go to Filter,
Check None, and select only Rooms.
| | 03:52 | Sometimes people make a mistake here.
| | 03:54 | They think they're editing the tags.
| | 03:56 | You're editing the tags out of
convenience, because that immediately changes the
| | 04:00 | property on the room itself.
| | 04:01 | But what you're editing
is the rooms, not the tags.
| | 04:04 | The tags always get their data from the Rooms.
| | 04:06 | That's true for any tag in Revit.
| | 04:08 | The tag is always reading the data off
the object, not the other way around.
| | 04:12 | So, I have those four rooms selected,
and over here on the Properties palette,
| | 04:17 | you can see that they all share the
name Room, and I'm going to type in Office.
| | 04:22 | Now, I want to point out one other
thing here that you should be aware of.
| | 04:25 | The Number unfortunately in Revit, I
hope they change this in some future
| | 04:29 | version of Revit, but the Number,
because they don't share the same number, what
| | 04:33 | Revit does is it just blanks
out the field. It shows nothing.
| | 04:37 | I would prefer if they put the word
Varies in there or something along those
| | 04:40 | lines to indicate to me that each of
these rooms does actually have a number,
| | 04:44 | but they just vary from one another.
| | 04:46 | So, be careful, because if I were to
click in there right now and type a new
| | 04:49 | number, it would actually change the
number of all four rooms to the same
| | 04:52 | number and that's probably not what you'd want.
| | 04:54 | So, even though it's blank,
it looks like there's no value,
| | 04:59 | sometimes being blank just simply
means that there are multiple values, and it
| | 05:02 | can't show you anything.
| | 05:04 | So, now you see I have the four offices,
they have all changed to Office, and what
| | 05:08 | I'm going to do is make another
selection, like so. Filter again. Check None.
| | 05:14 | I want rooms, and this
time I also want room tags.
| | 05:19 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 05:20 | This room right here is the only one
that I'm going to actually create manually
| | 05:24 | on the second floor.
| | 05:25 | So, it was easier to just make a window
selection and get all of them, but what
| | 05:28 | I'm going to do now is use my
Shift key and deselect that room.
| | 05:33 | Now, I'm doing this in a very small file.
| | 05:36 | This technique would work equally well
in any size file and I think it will
| | 05:40 | have more value for you when you see
it in very large floor plans, but you'll
| | 05:44 | see the idea very
quickly once I'm finished here.
| | 05:47 | I'm going to use the Copy button, Copy
to Clipboard, or I could type Ctrl+C.
| | 05:51 | I want to go up to Level 2,
and here is the trick.
| | 05:56 | Go to the Home tab and create a new room.
| | 06:01 | Now, this is why I'm showing you
the whole process in the first place.
| | 06:05 | Notice that the room went to room number 109.
| | 06:08 | That's because that's just
where it happened to leave off.
| | 06:11 | Revit doesn't figure out that we're on
the second floor, and say, oh, would you
| | 06:14 | like this one to be a 20 number?
| | 06:16 | We have to do that ourselves.
| | 06:18 | So, I'm going to come in
here and make this 201, okay?
| | 06:20 | So, that's sort of the next step of the
process, and now I'm going to go to Modify.
| | 06:27 | You rarely want to use Ctrl+V in Revit,
because if you paste model geometry in
| | 06:33 | Revit, it will want you to move it as well.
| | 06:35 | I don't know why this is. It just does.
| | 06:38 | So, Ctrl+V is not recommended.
| | 06:41 | You always want to use the
tool here on the Modify tab.
| | 06:45 | Click the dropdown and you can see
there are several options that all say
| | 06:49 | Aligned in the name.
| | 06:51 | So, we're able to paste geometry from
one floor of the building to another floor
| | 06:55 | of the building and keep it
lined up in exactly the same spot.
| | 06:57 | So, that's really handy, and in this
case I'm going to say let's align it to
| | 07:01 | the current view, second floor in this case.
| | 07:05 | Now, when it does, you see all
those rooms paste right into the correct
| | 07:09 | locations in the new offices, and more
importantly, take a look at the numbers.
| | 07:14 | That one is 202, 203, 204 and so on.
| | 07:18 | So, the numbering now picks up from
where it left off, which happens to be 201.
| | 07:23 | So, if you've a got a 10-story building,
you're going to want to do this paste
| | 07:26 | aligned one at a time, one floor at a time.
| | 07:29 | You're going to add your 301 on the
third floor, and then paste a line.
| | 07:33 | Then you're going to add your 401
on the fourth floor and paste aligned.
| | 07:36 | If you do it that way, you could save
yourself a lot of effort in manually
| | 07:40 | renumbering when you have the same
floor plate floor after floor after floor.
| | 07:43 | Now, if the floors are all different,
then you basically just have to add all
| | 07:46 | the rooms manually, but if the floors
have a lot of repetitive layout, then this
| | 07:51 | is going to save you a lot of time.
| | 07:53 | I'll just make one other mention that
if you happened to have access to some of
| | 07:56 | the third-party plug-ins that are
available out there, there are third-party
| | 07:59 | plug-ins which make short work of renumbering.
| | 08:02 | So, the technique I'm giving you here is
just working within the confines of the
| | 08:07 | out-of-the-box Revit software.
| | 08:09 | If you happened to have one of those
plug-ins that allows you to do room
| | 08:12 | renumbering quickly, then you
certainly could use that as an alternative.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding room bounding elements| 00:00 | Boundaries are required in order to
generate the area and volume of a room.
| | 00:03 | Without boundaries, rooms will simply
be referred as unbounded and they will
| | 00:06 | show that blue generic rectangular
shape that we saw in the adding rooms movie.
| | 00:11 | Many elements can be room
bounding in a Revit project.
| | 00:13 | These include walls, floors, ceilings,
columns, and we do have control over
| | 00:18 | which elements in our project
are actually set to room bounding.
| | 00:21 | So let's go ahead and take a look.
| | 00:22 | I am in a file here called Room Bounding.
| | 00:25 | It's in the Chapter 9 folder.
| | 00:26 | And if I select any wall in my file
and look at the Properties palette, with
| | 00:32 | this wall selected and I scroll down,
and I can see that the Room Bounding
| | 00:35 | property has a check mark next to it.
| | 00:37 | If I were to uncheck that, it would
remove the bounding property from the room.
| | 00:41 | So I am going to come over here
and pre-highlight bedroom number 5.
| | 00:44 | You will get the hang of it.
| | 00:46 | It takes a little practice, but you
just kind of move your mouse to where you
| | 00:48 | think that little X is, and then it will
highlight, and then you can select on it.
| | 00:53 | Notice that the shape of the
bedroom goes to the inside of the closet.
| | 00:56 | Now, I could certainly add a room in
the closet to make a separate room called
| | 01:00 | closet, or in some cases you may not be
interested in actually having that be a
| | 01:04 | separate room. Maybe you're going
to do a marketing plan to print in a
| | 01:07 | brochure, and you don't really want
to call out each and every one of the
| | 01:10 | little small spaces.
| | 01:12 | So you could actually take these two
walls over here and turn off their Room
| | 01:16 | Bounding property and thereby have the room
flow in and include the space of the closet.
| | 01:22 | So if I select the first wall,
tab, pre-highlight the second one.
| | 01:27 | Before I click, I want to press my Ctrl
key to add to the selection and then click.
| | 01:33 | I've got both of those walls selected,
and then I will scroll down and I'll
| | 01:38 | turn off Room Bounding.
| | 01:40 | Now, if we go pre-highlight the room
again and select it, you will notice
| | 01:44 | now that the room flows right into the
closet and completely includes the entire area.
| | 01:49 | Now, that does change the square footage
that would be reported for the bedroom object.
| | 01:54 | I forgot to show it to you before we
started, but it's currently 171.89 square feet.
| | 02:00 | So let me do it this way.
| | 02:01 | Let me undo, select it again, and now
you see it was only 150 square feet.
| | 02:09 | So it definitely impacts the way
that Revit calculates that room.
| | 02:13 | So when you're deciding whether or not
to make a certain element room bounding,
| | 02:17 | that might be one of the things that
factors into your decision is whether or
| | 02:20 | not you want to actually include
that in the square footage count or not.
| | 02:23 | Be careful when you change
the Room Bounding property.
| | 02:27 | If you already have a room, like say I
wanted to do that same trick here with
| | 02:31 | the master bedroom, but you already
have a room in the small closet and you
| | 02:35 | come in here, and you change the
Room Bounding property to non-bounding.
| | 02:42 | When I accept the change by shifting
focus away from the Properties palette,
| | 02:46 | I will get this message that comes up
from Revit and if you read through the
| | 02:49 | whole message it's basically telling me that
I have two rooms now that are in the same spot.
| | 02:54 | It's even offering to
delete one of those rooms for me.
| | 02:57 | Now, let's say that I was a
little nervous about deleting a room.
| | 02:59 | I go "I don't want to delete anything.
| | 03:01 | What are you talking about?" So I click OK.
| | 03:03 | Let me show you what's actually going on here.
| | 03:06 | If I come in here and highlight,
actually the room is flowed through now,
| | 03:12 | ignoring that wall, but there's
actually two rooms in that same spot.
| | 03:17 | So if we were to actually take this one
and delete it, now we are going to get
| | 03:20 | another kind of error when I delete it, and I
will talk about this error in just a minute.
| | 03:25 | You noticed how the tag
disappeared in the linen closet.
| | 03:28 | So that was the room that we deleted.
| | 03:30 | You may think you've actually
deleted it, but what it's telling you in the
| | 03:33 | warning here is we've deleted the room from
the model, but it still remains in the project.
| | 03:38 | In the adding rooms movie, I
mentioned that rooms behave just a little
| | 03:41 | differently than other model objects.
| | 03:43 | And this is one of the ways
that they behave differently.
| | 03:45 | You can't just delete a room in the model;
| | 03:48 | you have to actually delete it deliberately.
| | 03:50 | So they do this on purpose, because
sometimes people like to actually create the
| | 03:54 | rooms first in a list and then go and
add those rooms that they've created in a
| | 03:59 | list to their projects.
| | 04:00 | So if you get a program from your client,
and it lists out all the spaces they need,
| | 04:04 | you might predefine what all
those spaces are and then come in and add
| | 04:08 | them to your floor plan.
| | 04:09 | So just exactly how would we deal with
that room then if we have that extra room?
| | 04:14 | Let me show you here. There we go.
| | 04:17 | There is actually still a room there.
| | 04:20 | So let's go down here on my Project
Browser and open up the Room Schedule.
| | 04:25 | Now, we are going to talk about
adding schedules in a future movie.
| | 04:28 | So right now I have just provided a
schedule for us, and if you look, here is
| | 04:32 | all the numbers, here is all the names,
and all the areas, but notice that room
| | 04:37 | number 15 is listed as not placed.
| | 04:40 | So even though we deleted it in the
model, room 15, that linen closet, still
| | 04:44 | exists in the project, and we could now
place it somewhere in the project, but
| | 04:49 | until we place it,
it will list here as not placed.
| | 04:51 | It won't report any kind of square footage.
| | 04:53 | So again, if I was building a program
of spaces and I wanted to add up several
| | 04:57 | rooms ahead of time, and then later
people could add them to their project.
| | 05:01 | So how would they do that?
| | 05:02 | I can click New right here
on the Ribbon to add rooms.
| | 05:07 | So I've just added room number 17.
| | 05:09 | It's also not placed.
| | 05:10 | If I don't want that room, I can
select it and this is how you actually
| | 05:14 | permanently delete it.
| | 05:15 | From the schedule, you click on it
and then you click the Delete button.
| | 05:20 | This will warn you, are you sure?
| | 05:22 | We are permanently deleting that room now.
| | 05:24 | I am going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 05:25 | Then what about a not placed room.
How would I go ahead and place that?
| | 05:29 | Well, let's go to the floor plan.
| | 05:31 | Let's take this wall and
make it Room Bounding again.
| | 05:37 | Now we need a room in that little spot.
| | 05:39 | Let's go ahead and zoom in a
little bit there to get a better look.
| | 05:44 | Before you place the room, the default,
if you look at your Options bar, is to
| | 05:49 | create a brand-new room, but if you
look right here, this is actually a little
| | 05:52 | dropdown and there's 15 Linen.
| | 05:55 | So that room exists on the list, and if
you've got a long list of programmatic
| | 05:59 | rooms, they will all be listed there, and
then we can add 15 Linen to our model like so.
| | 06:04 | So those are a few little extra
tips and tricks that you need to know
| | 06:07 | about working with rooms.
| | 06:08 | If you delete a room, it's
important to remember that it's not actually
| | 06:11 | deleted from your model.
| | 06:12 | You have to actually delete it from
the schedule to delete it permanently.
| | 06:15 | You can always go in and select
individual walls or ceilings and floors and
| | 06:19 | turnoff their Room Bounding behavior
and adjust the square footage of rooms that way.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Schedules and TagsUnderstanding tags| 00:01 | We've seen several example of
tags already in many of the movies in
| | 00:03 | this training series.
| | 00:04 | In this movie, we will
actually look at creating the tags.
| | 00:07 | The tag basically asks the question of
the object and then reports the result to
| | 00:11 | the symbol onscreen.
| | 00:12 | The same designation is often
included in a field on the schedule, so that
| | 00:15 | cross-references can be made.
| | 00:17 | We can tag all sorts of
objects, doors, windows, walls.
| | 00:21 | So let's look at a few examples.
| | 00:22 | I am in a file called Working with Tags.
| | 00:25 | It's in the Chapter 10 folder.
| | 00:27 | I am going to click on the Annotate tab,
and on the Annotate tab we have a Tag
| | 00:32 | panel, and we are going to start
with the Tag by Category button.
| | 00:36 | You can see the shortcut for that is TG.
| | 00:38 | Now, the way Tag by Category works
is as you move your cursor around the screen,
| | 00:43 | Revit will identify the
item under your cursor and choose the
| | 00:48 | appropriate tag for you.
| | 00:49 | So you can see that if I am over
a wall, I get this diamond tag.
| | 00:53 | I get the pillbox if I am on a door.
| | 00:55 | If I am over here on a wall, I get this hexagon.
| | 00:58 | We've already got tags in our rooms.
| | 01:00 | So typically if an object is already
tagged, Revit will ignore that object.
| | 01:04 | It won't add a second tag.
| | 01:07 | Some items will highlight, like this
railing, but if I were to actually click on
| | 01:11 | the railing and try and tag it, I would
probably get a message telling me that I
| | 01:14 | don't have a railing tag currently loaded.
| | 01:17 | The same might be true
for floors or other objects.
| | 01:20 | So Revit will let you tag just about
anything, but in order to tag something,
| | 01:25 | you actually have to have that tag loaded.
| | 01:27 | Now, before I go ahead and actually
click to create this tag, let me point
| | 01:30 | out one more thing.
| | 01:31 | Notice that this tag is actually
being attached to the object with a
| | 01:35 | short straight leader.
| | 01:36 | This is all controlled
right here on the Options bar.
| | 01:39 | So sometimes you want tags to be
associated with the objects for the leader and
| | 01:43 | other times you don't.
| | 01:44 | So what I am going to do is actually
uncheck the Leader here to create door
| | 01:48 | tags, and then I will go ahead
and click on the various doors.
| | 01:52 | Now, I'm going to zoom in and show you
that when the doors were added, they were
| | 01:58 | numbered at that time.
| | 01:59 | So by tagging, all we are really doing
is, again, the tag is simply asking the
| | 02:04 | question of the door, "hey door, what
number are you?" and it's reporting that
| | 02:08 | information in the tag.
| | 02:10 | So it's not assigning the number at this time.
| | 02:13 | It's not changing the door in any way.
| | 02:15 | Now, this particular door doesn't
actually have a number, so you see a little
| | 02:19 | questions mark appears, and we
can remedy that easily enough.
| | 02:24 | Now, if I came over here to a window,
in this case it looks as though the two
| | 02:28 | windows have the same designation.
| | 02:31 | Well, tags can report any
property in the object they're tagging.
| | 02:36 | In the case of the door, the tag is
reporting the Instance property for the door number.
| | 02:41 | It's called simply the mark.
| | 02:44 | In the case of the window, it's
reporting the type designation for the window,
| | 02:49 | which is called the type mark.
| | 02:51 | So that's why these both share the same
number, because what it's telling us is
| | 02:55 | these are both type 22 windows.
| | 02:58 | So, for example, if I were to click
Modify, select my window, and from the Type
| | 03:05 | Selector, choose a different size, you
will see that not only does the size and
| | 03:11 | shape of the window change, but
the type designation changes as well.
| | 03:15 | So depending on how the tag was
defined and what property it's designed to
| | 03:20 | look for, you may be seeing a type property,
or you may be seeing an instance property.
| | 03:25 | Now, the way that I am
adding these tags is fine.
| | 03:27 | I mean, it's moving along pretty quickly,
but there is actually a much faster way.
| | 03:31 | Right next to the Tag by Category
button is a Tag All button, and this is
| | 03:36 | actually, if you pause a minute and
wait for the tooltip, you can see it's
| | 03:39 | actually Tag All Not Tagged.
| | 03:41 | So what it does is it won't,
again, do redundant tags.
| | 03:44 | It won't retag anything that's already
tagged, but if you clicked this, you will
| | 03:48 | get a dialog box and it will list for
you all the categories of tags that are
| | 03:53 | currently loaded in the project.
| | 03:55 | So my project has door tags, and it has
property line segments and room tags and
| | 03:59 | window tags, but you could see that
it doesn't have like floor tags, or it
| | 04:03 | doesn't have railing tags, as we
talked about a few moments ago.
| | 04:05 | I am going to choose Door Tags, because
that's what I'm interested in tagging.
| | 04:08 | Let's go ahead and move this out of the
way and see if there's actually any doors.
| | 04:11 | There are a few doors
that still don't have tags.
| | 04:13 | So when I click OK, you'll see that it will
add tags to those missing doors in one shot.
| | 04:18 | Now, we have several
windows that don't have tags.
| | 04:21 | So if we repeat that again, and this time
highlight the Window Tags and click OK,
| | 04:27 | you see that tags will get added to all
the windows, and clearly that's much faster.
| | 04:31 | Now, even though we have Tag All Not Tagged,
some tags you may still choose to do manually.
| | 04:38 | For example, I am going to go back
to Tag by Category, and I want to talk
| | 04:42 | about wall tags next.
| | 04:45 | Now, with the wall tag, you typically
don't want to attach that directly to the wall.
| | 04:49 | You typically want a
leader associated with that.
| | 04:52 | So I am going to go ahead and check the
Leader box, and then I can come in here
| | 04:59 | and select my walls, and you'll see the
tag appear with a leader attached to it.
| | 05:05 | Now, if you think that leader is
not quite the right length, we can
| | 05:08 | actually adjust it.
| | 05:09 | How about 3/8 of an inch?
| | 05:12 | Make it a little shorter.
| | 05:13 | I am using my Tab key here to highlight
the wall, so I don't want to tag the toilets.
| | 05:19 | But I can kind of move
around and make these changes.
| | 05:22 | Now, why are all these tags blank?
| | 05:23 | Well, it's a similar kind of reason why
the window tags were all the same number.
| | 05:28 | The wall tags are looking at the Type
Mark property, and it turns out that most
| | 05:33 | of the walls, if not all the walls, in
this project don't have anything assigned
| | 05:37 | yet for that property.
| | 05:38 | So I've added a few tags just so
we can see what's going to happen.
| | 05:42 | When I select one of these walls now and
edit its type, scroll down and look for
| | 05:48 | the Type Mark property.
| | 05:49 | If I type something in here, like A1,
and click OK, that will instantly fill in
| | 05:55 | in all of the instances of A1 wall
throughout the project, which is everything
| | 06:00 | I've tagged, except the plumbing
wall that we built-in a previous movie.
| | 06:04 | Let me go ahead and select that one. Edit Type.
| | 06:07 | Let's make this a B1. Click OK.
| | 06:12 | And that would fill that in.
| | 06:13 | If I had another plumbing wall
somewhere else in the project, it would get that
| | 06:16 | designation as well.
| | 06:17 | So we've filled in the missing wall
designations, but we still have this one
| | 06:21 | door that needs to be
dealt with. Pretty simple.
| | 06:24 | All we have to do is select the door, and
remember the doors don't use a type mark.
| | 06:29 | They use an instance mark.
| | 06:30 | They are using just the Mark property.
| | 06:32 | So here it is right here.
| | 06:34 | And all I have to do is type in a number.
| | 06:36 | Now, I am not sure exactly which number.
| | 06:37 | This is a case where, because each
door is unique, if I use a number that's
| | 06:42 | already in use, Revit will complain, like let
me deliberately use one that we've already got.
| | 06:48 | So it will tell me, "sorry, you can't do that.
| | 06:50 | We've already got that number."
| | 06:52 | So unless I'm looking at a door schedule,
it might be difficult for me to know
| | 06:55 | exactly what number to assign here.
| | 06:56 | So I am going to just play it safe and
I will put in something like 20, which
| | 07:00 | looks like it's okay.
| | 07:02 | But I probably would want to go to a
door schedule at some point and check out
| | 07:05 | all my numbers, and maybe I don't want
a big gap between my last door and this
| | 07:09 | door, between say 15 and then 20,
with no numbers in between used.
| | 07:13 | But as long as you're not using the
same number over again, you can put in just
| | 07:17 | about any number you like.
| | 07:19 | So that's how you add tags. Use Tag by
Category to add them manually, one at a time.
| | 07:23 | You can use Tag All Not Tagged in
cases like door tags or window tags, where
| | 07:28 | it makes sense to do so, where you
would want to just quickly create the tags
| | 07:31 | for all those objects.
| | 07:32 | For things like wall tags, where you
want to add the leader, you might want to
| | 07:35 | have a little more control, place them yourself.
| | 07:37 | So there it makes a little more sense
to do Tag by Category and place them one at a time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding schedules| 00:00 | So, to get started, I'm going to
create a simple furniture schedule.
| | 00:03 | I'm going to use a furniture schedule,
because the items in the schedule will be
| | 00:06 | easily verified, because we can make a
quick visual account onscreen and make
| | 00:10 | sure that we're seeing the
same stuff in both views.
| | 00:12 | To create a schedule, I'll
switch over to the View tab.
| | 00:15 | I'm going to click on the Schedules
button. Go to Schedule/Quantities.
| | 00:20 | That will display a New Schedule dialog.
| | 00:22 | All the Revit categories are listed,
and all you need to do is select the
| | 00:25 | category that you're
interested in for your schedule.
| | 00:28 | So, in this case, I'll
choose furniture. Click OK.
| | 00:32 | So, the multi-tab Schedule Properties
dialog will appear and the first tab is Fields.
| | 00:37 | The list of available fields will vary
depending on the category you chose in
| | 00:40 | the previous screen.
| | 00:41 | So, I'm going to scroll through this list and
locate a few fields that I might want to add.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to add the Type Mark, the
Family and Type, the Count, and I always
| | 00:56 | like to add some Comments.
| | 00:57 | So, we'll start with just those
four simple fields and I'm going to go
| | 01:02 | ahead and click OK.
| | 01:03 | It would be possible to do the changes
on the other tabs, but we can always come
| | 01:07 | back and do those later and
we'll look at those in a later movie.
| | 01:10 | Now, when you display the schedule, you
can actually come in here and adjust the
| | 01:15 | columns to make things a little more
legible, and you'll see a nice list here of
| | 01:18 | all the furniture we have in our model.
| | 01:21 | Now, to do some of the other things
that I'd like to show you with the
| | 01:24 | schedule, it will be interesting or
useful to have this schedule side by side
| | 01:29 | with a floor plan view.
| | 01:31 | Now, if you look up here on your Quick
Access toolbar, it's usually a pretty
| | 01:34 | good idea to check how many open
windows you have before you tile your windows.
| | 01:40 | So, if we click the Window Switching
dropdown, I only have two windows open right now.
| | 01:45 | That's pretty good, but if you have
dozens, then you certainly would want to
| | 01:50 | know this next command.
| | 01:52 | Right next to the Switching Windows is
this guy right here, Close Hidden Windows.
| | 01:57 | You can also find that on the View tab.
| | 01:59 | This is a very important command.
| | 02:01 | If you've got 30, 40 windows open
in your Revit project and you go to
| | 02:06 | Tile, they're all going to be like the size
of a postage stamp. Very difficult to read.
| | 02:10 | So, what you want to do is every so
often you want to close all the hidden
| | 02:13 | windows, clean up your view basically.
| | 02:16 | That will also free up some RAM in
memory so Revit will perform better, like so.
| | 02:21 | You'll see that now I only have the one
active window open. And then you go to
| | 02:25 | your Project Browser, and if you need
another view, like the Level 1 Furniture,
| | 02:29 | you can deliberately open it, and then
finally on the View tab, you can click
| | 02:34 | the Tile button or use the Windows shortcut, WT.
| | 02:38 | Now, I'm going to go ahead and adjust
the view, so that I can get a nice, clean
| | 02:41 | look at the floor plan, and then over
here in the Schedule view, I can see very
| | 02:46 | clearly the four columns.
| | 02:48 | Now, let me show you a few tricks
for the way that things work here.
| | 02:51 | Essentially, what we have onscreen is a
graphical view on the left in the floor
| | 02:55 | plan, and a tabular view on
the right in the schedule.
| | 02:59 | I'm saying it that way because I want you
to understand very clearly what we have.
| | 03:03 | Let's talk about the beds for a moment.
| | 03:06 | Here I've got a Bed-Standard King
listed, and a Bed-Standard Queen.
| | 03:11 | If you scan through the list, you don't
see any other beds, and you can verify
| | 03:15 | that easy enough by
looking over your floor plan.
| | 03:18 | There are only two beds.
| | 03:19 | If I select one of those beds in
the schedule, you will see it actually
| | 03:24 | highlight in the floor plan.
| | 03:26 | They are one and the same.
| | 03:28 | The one on the left is a
graphical representation of the bed;
| | 03:32 | the one on the right is a text-
based representation of the bed.
| | 03:36 | They're both the same bed
as far as Revit is concerned.
| | 03:38 | In fact, if I opened up this list right
here, here's a list of all the families
| | 03:43 | that I could possibly swap out for that,
and I could change this bed on the fly
| | 03:48 | to a twin bed, right in the schedule.
| | 03:50 | So, this is some of what I was talking
about in the introduction when I said you
| | 03:54 | can change it in any view you
like and it changes in all views.
| | 03:57 | So, that's a really simple example of that.
| | 03:59 | I've got a powerful one nonetheless.
| | 04:02 | So, that works with any of these objects.
Notice how if I select through them.
| | 04:07 | Now, in this case, I have
several of these Chair-Breuers.
| | 04:11 | Now, suppose I wanted to
eventually tag some of these items.
| | 04:14 | Well, right now, they don't have any type marks.
| | 04:16 | In the previous movie on adding tags, we
talked about type marks versus instance
| | 04:21 | marks, and discussed how you
would make some of those edits.
| | 04:24 | Well, right here in the schedule is
another way that I could make this edit.
| | 04:27 | I could call this C for Chair 1 and press Enter.
| | 04:32 | Now, when I do, Revit will recognize
that the change I'm making is actually a
| | 04:36 | type-based change, and it will apply
that to every instance of the Chair-Breuer.
| | 04:41 | Now, we're not really going to see that
in the floor plan, because we don't have
| | 04:43 | any tags, but watch what
happens in the schedule.
| | 04:45 | So, you see how every instance of the Chair-
Breuer has been filled in with the type mark C1.
| | 04:51 | So, again, the schedule just becomes
now one more tool in your arsenal as a way
| | 04:57 | for you to select, edit, and manipulate objects.
| | 05:01 | You can make multiple selections in the
schedule as well and sometimes that can
| | 05:05 | be very valuable, very powerful.
| | 05:07 | So, for example, if I have both of
these Corbu chairs here in the living room,
| | 05:12 | and if I want to change them for
something else, I can click and drag through
| | 05:16 | both items, and you'll see they
both highlight in the schedule.
| | 05:21 | Now, the trick is that if you come
right over here and you click, unfortunately
| | 05:25 | it drops the one selection
and only goes to the first one.
| | 05:29 | So, that actually doesn't do the trick.
| | 05:31 | So, let me drag through them again,
get them both selected, but this is one of
| | 05:36 | the reasons why you want
the tiled view side by side.
| | 05:39 | If I just come over here and click on
the Floor Plan title bar, that will make
| | 05:43 | the floor plan active.
| | 05:45 | That will give me access
to the Properties palette.
| | 05:48 | You can see Corbu Chair listed here on
the Type Selector, and now I could open
| | 05:52 | up the list and scroll through and see
what other chairs I have available to me.
| | 05:56 | It doesn't look like I have a whole
lot of choices for chairs, so I might be
| | 06:02 | somewhat limited in what I can choose.
| | 06:04 | I guess we'll go ahead and just make
these a Chair-Breuer to illustrate the
| | 06:07 | point, even though that's not quite
as interesting as the Corbu Chair.
| | 06:11 | But by doing that, notice that both
of those chairs also picked up the
| | 06:16 | designation C1, because again, that's now
part of that type property for the chair.
| | 06:22 | So, that hopefully gets you a little
bit warmed up in understanding the power
| | 06:28 | and the potential of a schedule.
| | 06:29 | So, creating the schedule, you really
only need to do two things to get started.
| | 06:33 | You choose a category and then you
pick some fields and you'll get that
| | 06:37 | tabular list and then once you
have the list, it can be a great way to
| | 06:40 | verify what you have, to make global
edits to the project, or to just drag on
| | 06:45 | a sheet for printing.
| | 06:46 | We'll talk about sheets and
printing in a later chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying schedules| 00:01 | There are many formatting options
available to make a schedule view more legible
| | 00:04 | and enhance its usefulness as an editing tool.
| | 00:06 | In this movie, we will take a look at
several ways to manipulate the way that
| | 00:09 | our schedule is grouped, sorted, and displayed.
| | 00:12 | I have a file here onscreen
called Modifying Schedules.
| | 00:15 | I have it set up with two tiled windows,
a floor plan, and a schedule side by side.
| | 00:20 | If you want to understand how I was able
to open and tile both of those, you can
| | 00:23 | go back and review the Adding Schedules movie.
| | 00:26 | We went through the steps there.
| | 00:27 | So the first thing I'd like to do is
click on my Schedule view to make it active.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to click the title bar right here.
| | 00:36 | You may notice that the
Ribbon changes when I do that.
| | 00:38 | I'm going to click back to the floor plan,
and I would like you to watch the Ribbon.
| | 00:43 | Notice how that jumps me back
to the View tab on the Ribbon.
| | 00:45 | That happened to be the last tab I was on.
| | 00:48 | Then if I click the schedule, I get a
new tab, Modify Schedule/Quantities, and
| | 00:53 | it gives me some buttons that
have to do with the schedule.
| | 00:55 | So pay attention to that.
| | 00:56 | That tells you when you're in tiled
windows which one is active by clicking
| | 01:00 | the title bar of the view window.
| | 01:02 | Now, when the schedule is active, if
we also direct our attention to the
| | 01:06 | Properties palette, we can see that
we're seeing the properties of the
| | 01:10 | schedule itself, in this case,
Schedule Furniture, and then the rest of the
| | 01:13 | name kind of trails off there.
| | 01:15 | If you watched the Adding Schedule
movie, then you remember we had a 5-tab
| | 01:20 | dialog that came up when we were actually
creating the furniture schedule in the first place.
| | 01:24 | We only addressed the Fields tab at
that time, and I mentioned that we can go
| | 01:29 | back at any time and make modifications.
| | 01:31 | This is the way we would actually do it.
| | 01:32 | So here on the Properties palette, you
can see each of the five tabs listed and
| | 01:37 | an Edit button next to each one.
| | 01:38 | So you can jump right to the tab in
question that you want to work on.
| | 01:43 | The first one I'd like to
show you is Sorting/Grouping.
| | 01:45 | So I'm going to go ahead and click Edit there.
| | 01:47 | Again, this dialog should look
somewhat familiar, particularly if we were
| | 01:51 | to click over here.
| | 01:52 | This is what we saw in the Adding
Schedules movie and now we're going to focus
| | 01:56 | our attention here on Sorting/Grouping.
| | 01:58 | So the first thing we need to
decide is what do we want to sort by?
| | 02:01 | If I move this out of the way, I've
taken the liberty to go in and input a type
| | 02:06 | mark for each piece of furniture.
| | 02:08 | So it might be handy to sort the
list in order based on those Type Marks.
| | 02:14 | So we're going to go ahead and open
up the list, and you'll see each of the
| | 02:18 | sortable fields listed.
| | 02:19 | We'll go ahead and click Type Mark.
| | 02:22 | That's all we really need to do.
| | 02:23 | Let's just go ahead and click OK, and
you'll now see that everything is sorted,
| | 02:28 | both alphabetically and numerically.
| | 02:29 | Now let's go ahead and
take that a little further.
| | 02:32 | Go back to Sorting/Grouping.
| | 02:35 | If you want, it's not necessarily
appropriate in this case, but we might see
| | 02:40 | some variation, particularly since we
have so many C1s, you can add a header,
| | 02:45 | and I'll add a blank line too,
just to give it a little bit more space.
| | 02:50 | So I'm not sure that that really
helps us with the items that we have fewer
| | 02:55 | items of, like the B1s and the B2s, but
you can see that the Breuer Chairs,
| | 03:00 | this may be a little helpful,
makes it a little more legible.
| | 03:03 | Maybe some of the Night Stands and so on.
| | 03:05 | So in this case, I don't think that
helps us a whole lot, but just showing you
| | 03:08 | what some of the options are.
| | 03:10 | Now, let's say that it makes sense,
and in the case that I have it
| | 03:14 | doesn't really make sense, but I
just want to point out you actually can
| | 03:17 | sort by multiple fields.
| | 03:19 | So after you choose your first field,
you can sort by a second or a third and
| | 03:23 | even a fourth field.
| | 03:25 | I'm not going to do that in this case, but you
might want to do that in some of your projects.
| | 03:29 | So I've turned off the header here and
I'm going to add a grand total at the bottom.
| | 03:32 | So let's go ahead and click
OK and see the result there.
| | 03:37 | Now, I left on the blank line so it
doesn't put the number at the top, but it
| | 03:43 | does leave a little space
between each group of items.
| | 03:47 | Again, you can decide whether you think
that's more legible or not, but here's
| | 03:50 | the grand total down at the very bottom.
| | 03:52 | So it's telling me I have 26 total items,
and if you want to manually count and
| | 03:56 | verify that, you certainly can.
| | 03:58 | I'm willing to trust Revit on this point.
| | 04:00 | Now, why don't I see a count in the
Count column? And then you might also be
| | 04:04 | asking yourself, do I really need to
see four separate instances of Night Stand
| | 04:10 | listed out or however
many Breuer Chairs this is?
| | 04:14 | So let's go back to
Sorting/Grouping one more time.
| | 04:17 | If we uncheck this box right here for
Itemize every instance and click OK,
| | 04:23 | we now get a much cleaner list,
and you'll see two things change.
| | 04:27 | Instead of seeing ten separate
instances of the Breuer Chair, we see one and
| | 04:33 | then the Count over here has
changed to reflect the total quantity.
| | 04:37 | Now, we still end up with 26, and
certainly we could total it up and see whether
| | 04:42 | or not that number matches or not, but
we could even go a little further here.
| | 04:47 | If we need a separate total in that
Count column, we actually can do that.
| | 04:53 | We can go to the Formatting tab,
we can highlight Count, and we can check
| | 04:58 | this box right here.
| | 04:59 | Now, that might make a little more
sense to do in something like an Area column
| | 05:03 | or something like that. The Count really
is going to match the same as the grand
| | 05:07 | total, as you can see, but it will
put it right underneath that column.
| | 05:12 | So if you would prefer to have it right
there, you can certainly do that right there.
| | 05:16 | So those are some examples
of how you can group and sort.
| | 05:19 | And I should point out that this is
still a live view, so if I select the C1
| | 05:25 | chair item now, you're going to see all ten
Breuer Chairs highlight in the model at one time.
| | 05:31 | So this can be both a really powerful thing.
| | 05:34 | It can also be a really dangerous thing,
because if you were to do something to
| | 05:37 | those ten chairs right now that was
undesirable, you would be affecting all of
| | 05:41 | them, like I don't know,
delete or something like that.
| | 05:43 | So be a little careful, okay?
| | 05:45 | But depending on how you want to use
your schedule, Sorting/Grouping can really
| | 05:49 | make that schedule a
little bit more useful for you.
| | 05:52 | So by Sorting/Grouping your
schedules in various ways, you can make the
| | 05:56 | information more readable, easy to digest,
and in cases where you're using it as
| | 06:01 | a selection and editing tool, you can
make it easier for you to make quick and
| | 06:05 | easy selections of the items in your model.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a key schedule| 00:00 | Many fields available on the
schedules are simple text-based fields.
| | 00:04 | Inputting values into such
fields can be a tedious affair.
| | 00:07 | Using key schedules can help.
| | 00:08 | A key schedule is the schedule that
allows you to create a named style, complete
| | 00:13 | with values for several associated text fields.
| | 00:17 | You then add this key to your main
schedule and by choosing one of your
| | 00:21 | predefined key styles from the
field, Revit will input the values as
| | 00:25 | designated by the key.
| | 00:26 | So let's have a look.
| | 00:27 | What I have here onscreen is
the file called Key Schedules.
| | 00:32 | This is actually a more
complete version of the condominium.
| | 00:35 | It actually has all three floors.
| | 00:37 | And it has the mirrored layouts.
| | 00:41 | So if you scroll through this schedule
here, you can see we're grouped by level.
| | 00:46 | So we have Level 1 and
then Level 2 and then Level 3.
| | 00:50 | There are a lot of redundant room names
throughout, because each floor has four condo units.
| | 00:57 | So we have four Living
Rooms and four Master Bedrooms.
| | 01:01 | It's probably reasonable to assume that
in a building like this that if it was a
| | 01:05 | bedroom, it's going to have the
same finish as any other bedroom.
| | 01:09 | So it's an awful lot of manual typing if
we don't find some way to speed that up.
| | 01:14 | So let's go ahead and take a look.
| | 01:16 | That's our goal here is I want to fill
in as many of these text fields as I can
| | 01:19 | as quickly as possible.
| | 01:20 | I'm going to click in this A109 Master Bedroom.
| | 01:24 | I'm assuming there's carpet in there.
| | 01:25 | So I'm going to type in Carpet.
| | 01:27 | Then for the Base Finish,
I'm going to put in Wood base.
| | 01:32 | The Wall Finish is just going to be Paint.
| | 01:35 | The Ceiling is also Paint.
| | 01:38 | We won't worry about the
Ceiling Height for right now.
| | 01:41 | So when you type in to one of these
text fields, Revit does keep track of the
| | 01:46 | values you've typed in.
| | 01:48 | So you can choose it off the list next time.
| | 01:50 | It's not like you have to completely
re-type it, but still I don't want to go
| | 01:53 | through each and every one of these
and choose from these dropdowns over and
| | 01:57 | over and over again.
| | 01:58 | So you could see where that
would be a somewhat tedious affair.
| | 02:01 | So let's go to the View tab.
| | 02:04 | Let's go to Schedules.
| | 02:05 | I'm going to choose Schedules/Quantities.
| | 02:11 | We're working with rooms right now.
| | 02:12 | So I'm going to go ahead and choose
Rooms as the Category, but before I click
| | 02:16 | OK, instead of scheduling the building
components, I'm going to do Schedule key.
| | 02:21 | Instead of the default name that
they're suggesting here, Room Style, I'm going
| | 02:25 | to slip the word Finish in here
and call this Room Finish Style.
| | 02:30 | Now this will give me the same fields
that are available for rooms, and it will
| | 02:34 | add one more called the Key Name.
| | 02:36 | What I need to do here is I'm going to
just try and move this out of the way so
| | 02:40 | I can see in the background.
| | 02:41 | I want to add them in the same order.
| | 02:42 | So I'll do Floor Finish and then
Base Finish and then Wall Finish and
| | 02:48 | then Ceiling Finish.
| | 02:49 | So we'll just add those four.
| | 02:51 | We'll go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:52 | Now the way this works is
you get an empty schedule.
| | 02:56 | You have to use this button up
here on the Ribbon to add a new row.
| | 03:00 | The Key Name is going to default to number 1.
| | 03:02 | I'm going to call this, Bedrooms.
| | 03:06 | Then for the Floor Finish, I'm going to
choose all the stuff that I've already
| | 03:10 | typed in for the Bedrooms.
| | 03:14 | Then I'll add a new one.
| | 03:16 | I'll call this Main Areas.
| | 03:22 | We'll still use Carpet.
| | 03:23 | We should vary this a little bit. We'll do no base.
| | 03:27 | Then for Wall Finish, I'll do, just
to make this different, Wall Covering.
| | 03:34 | And for the Ceiling Finish, I'll
also do Paint. Let's do one more.
| | 03:38 | I'll call this Public Areas.
| | 03:44 | This will be Tile Floor,
Tile Base, Paint and Paint.
| | 03:58 | So I have these three different styles.
| | 04:00 | Again, the specifics aren't terribly important.
| | 04:02 | I just want you to understand the process here.
| | 04:04 | So the next thing I'm going to do is come
back down here and go back to my Room Schedule.
| | 04:08 | In order to use that new Key Schedule
in this Room Schedule, I need to add that
| | 04:14 | key field to the schedule.
| | 04:16 | So with this schedule selected,
I'll scroll over here in my Properties.
| | 04:21 | And I'm going to go to the Edit fields.
| | 04:23 | I'm going to select where
I want this guy to insert.
| | 04:27 | So I'll select right before the Floor Finish.
| | 04:30 | You'll see Room Finish
Style is now listed there.
| | 04:33 | That's the key name that I gave when I
created that schedule, and I'll insert it.
| | 04:37 | It went in below the floor instead
of above the floor, so no big deal.
| | 04:41 | I can just click this button here to move it up.
| | 04:42 | I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 04:46 | Now you'll see the word none
appear for all of these things.
| | 04:50 | But if I just go in here and open
this up and choose Bedrooms, you'll see
| | 04:55 | that that fills in automatically all the
other fields that I've associated with Bedrooms.
| | 05:01 | If I choose Main Areas for the Living Room
and for the Entry, you'll see those fill in.
| | 05:06 | Then here for things like the Front
Lobby and the Elevator Lobby, I can choose
| | 05:10 | Public Areas and those will fill in.
| | 05:12 | So naturally, I might want to think
this through a little bit more carefully
| | 05:15 | and create a few other key styles and
think about them, like maybe closets are
| | 05:20 | little different than some of the
other more occupied areas, but you get the
| | 05:24 | general idea is what you're trying
to do is group as many of these fields
| | 05:28 | together, input the data once, and
then use this key schedule to make data
| | 05:33 | input go much more quickly.
| | 05:35 | I can go even more quickly than
what I've seen right here by making a
| | 05:41 | multiple selection.
| | 05:43 | So let's say that all of these rooms right
here were going to be one particular style.
| | 05:49 | I showed this in the previous movie,
but I want to just repeat it right now.
| | 05:53 | If I select all of those items and then
go to the floor plan where those items
| | 05:58 | are actually selected, I can come here
to the Properties palette and my Room
| | 06:04 | Finish Style will be available on the
Properties palette, and I can choose Main
| | 06:08 | Areas and apply that to
several items, all at once.
| | 06:12 | Let's go back and look at our schedule.
| | 06:13 | You see that it filled them all in.
| | 06:16 | So if you've got two tiled windows
next to each other, you can move even
| | 06:19 | more quickly still.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Annotation and DetailsAdding text| 00:00 | Now that we have a pretty well-
defined Revit model, it's time to begin
| | 00:03 | adding notes and other annotations to
convey design intent and prepare our
| | 00:06 | documents for printing.
| | 00:07 | We'll begin this process with simple text.
| | 00:09 | I'm in a simple elevation
view in a file called Text.
| | 00:12 | I'm going to click on the Annotate tab.
| | 00:16 | Then click the Text tool.
| | 00:17 | The shortcut for text is TX,
if you'd rather do it that way.
| | 00:21 | You'll get a cursor onscreen.
| | 00:23 | You just pick your point for
where you'd like your note to go.
| | 00:27 | And you begin typing your note.
| | 00:29 | To complete the note, all you
have to do is click next to it.
| | 00:33 | That will keep you in the Text tool
and allow you to add your next note, or
| | 00:36 | you can click the Modify tool to cancel the
command altogether and get completely out.
| | 00:40 | Now I'm going to select the text and
point out one thing that I forgot to do.
| | 00:44 | I kind of forgot on purpose to
illustrate something. Even though this is
| | 00:48 | annotation and it behaves a little
differently, it's like model objects in the
| | 00:52 | sense that you still have to pay
attention on the Properties palette.
| | 00:55 | So you still have to pay
attention to your settings.
| | 00:57 | And particularly you have to pay
attention to the type of text that we're choosing.
| | 01:01 | In this case you can see
that I've chosen 1/4" Arial.
| | 01:05 | It's a little too big for the view.
| | 01:06 | 1/4" Arial is really for
titles and large labels.
| | 01:10 | 3/32" Arial is more
appropriate for simple notes.
| | 01:15 | So I'm going to change the type.
| | 01:17 | We can do that any time we like, but
when you type your notes, it's a good idea
| | 01:21 | to look there before you start, so that
you actually create the notes with the
| | 01:25 | right type in first place.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to go ahead and
move this a little bit closer.
| | 01:28 | Notice that there's an integral
move control handle right on the text.
| | 01:32 | Furthermore, there's
actually a little rotate handle.
| | 01:35 | You can use that to rotate the text.
| | 01:37 | If you spin it around beyond a
certain point, it will actually flip over to
| | 01:41 | stay right reading.
| | 01:42 | So Revit does that for you automatically.
| | 01:43 | Let's undo a couple of times.
| | 01:45 | Now the 3/32" Arial is a
fixed size relative to plotting.
| | 01:51 | That's the final plotted paper-size.
| | 01:54 | That's very important to understand.
| | 01:55 | All annotation in Revit is
based on final plotted size.
| | 02:00 | It's all derived right here
form the scale of the drawing.
| | 02:02 | So if I click on the scale, we're
currently at 1/8" equals a foot,
| | 02:06 | when I change the scale of this view to
1/4" = 1'-0", you'll notice that has a
| | 02:11 | dramatic effect on any
annotation displayed in this view.
| | 02:14 | That includes the section head.
| | 02:16 | That includes the level heads.
| | 02:18 | And it also includes the
note that we've just added.
| | 02:20 | I'm going to zoom in a little bit over here.
| | 02:25 | Let's go ahead and select this note.
| | 02:27 | Now I probably want this note to
actually point to something in the drawing.
| | 02:31 | So we have several options here where
we can add leaders to the existing notes
| | 02:36 | that we already have.
| | 02:37 | We can add those leaders to the left.
| | 02:39 | We can add them to the right, and
we can make them straight or curved.
| | 02:42 | So I'm going to pick on the tool
to add the leader to the right.
| | 02:49 | Then use the shape handles to
drag the leader and point it in.
| | 02:53 | Notice that the elbow here will
automatically snap to a horizontal when I get close.
| | 02:59 | So that's pretty handy.
| | 03:00 | So I've got that note completed.
| | 03:02 | Let me go ahead and click Text.
| | 03:04 | Rather than add the note, adjust its
type, then add a leader, I can do all
| | 03:09 | of this in one shot.
| | 03:10 | So I can save myself a little bit of effort.
| | 03:12 | So the first thing I want to do is go
to the Properties, choose 3/32" Arial.
| | 03:18 | Make sure that's the right type.
| | 03:19 | Then I want to come over
here and look at my options.
| | 03:22 | You can add a one segment leader, a
two segment leader or a curved leader.
| | 03:27 | I'm going to choose Two Segment Leader.
| | 03:30 | Then you can even decide how you
want that leader attached to the text.
| | 03:34 | It can attach to the top right,
the middle, at the bottom.
| | 03:38 | So I'm going to choose Top Right.
| | 03:40 | The first point I want to click is
somewhere wherever I want the arrowhead to be,
| | 03:44 | so I'm going to click
right there where the arrowhead is.
| | 03:47 | Then you notice it will try and line up for me.
| | 03:49 | Then this last point gets a little
tricky when we're placing the text.
| | 03:54 | It will line up with a few key points over here.
| | 03:57 | I'll go ahead and pick one of those,
but often we're going to have to do some
| | 04:00 | fine tuning afterward I'm typing, anyhow.
| | 04:02 | You'll see what I mean in a moment here.
| | 04:04 | So I'm going to type Brick Soldier Course.
| | 04:10 | When I click off of that, notice how
the note actually snapped to the left.
| | 04:13 | Not 100% sure why it does that, but we
can use this move grip. Drag it back.
| | 04:22 | Then make whatever adjustments
are necessary to the leader line.
| | 04:27 | I could continue with that process,
but that's the essential overall process
| | 04:30 | to creating the notes.
| | 04:32 | Now the leader is part of the text.
| | 04:36 | When you select on it,
you actually have a few options.
| | 04:39 | You could add additional leaders.
| | 04:41 | So let's assume that there was
another soldier course down here.
| | 04:44 | You can simply click that plus sign and add
a second leader and point the same note
| | 04:49 | to more than one location.
| | 04:50 | You can remove a Leader after
the fact, if you no longer need it.
| | 04:53 | If the text were to wrap, which we can
do very easily by dragging that little
| | 04:59 | control handle, you see that
will wrap it to multiple lines.
| | 05:02 | We could change the way that
the leader attaches to the text.
| | 05:07 | We have a few options there.
| | 05:10 | That's actually new in Revit 2011.
| | 05:13 | Furthermore, if we want to change
the kind of the arrowhead or other
| | 05:18 | behavior like the font and so forth, then we
want to select the text and choose Edit Type.
| | 05:24 | Now if we want edit 3/32" Arial,
we can just go ahead and start editing.
| | 05:29 | If we want to make a copy of 3/32"
Arial, we can duplicate it first.
| | 05:34 | You can see here most of the
settings are fairly self explanatory.
| | 05:37 | We have a Line Weight.
| | 05:39 | We have an opaque background.
| | 05:40 | What does that mean?
| | 05:41 | Well, if I go over here to the Text tool,
let's go back to Annotate. Let's go to text.
| | 05:48 | I'm going to turn off the leader.
| | 05:49 | Go back to a No Leader option.
| | 05:53 | I'm just going to pick a point right here,
and I will type another note. Click Modify.
| | 06:01 | Notice how the text is actually masking
out part of the surrounding brick pattern.
| | 06:08 | This is what it means when we select
the text and we edit its type, when
| | 06:13 | it's set to Opaque.
| | 06:14 | If I change the Background to
Transparent and click Apply, you'll see that the
| | 06:20 | Brick now shows through.
| | 06:21 | So naturally, if you're planning to
put the notes on top of any patterns, the
| | 06:26 | opaque background is probably pretty handy.
| | 06:28 | You also have Leader/Border Offsets.
| | 06:30 | That will determine how far
off the text of the leader is.
| | 06:33 | And you can change to
different arrowheads if you like.
| | 06:36 | So there is a variety of
different choices in here.
| | 06:39 | For example, if I would rather have a
filled arrow, I can click OK, zoom back out,
| | 06:47 | and you'll see that my arrowheads
have now changed from that open arrowhead
| | 06:52 | that they were before to a
filled triangle arrowhead.
| | 06:55 | So text can be added to any view.
| | 06:57 | It is view specific.
| | 06:59 | If you were to go to another view, you
would have to create additional notes
| | 07:02 | there and/or copy and paste
these notes from another view.
| | 07:05 | You can add leaders that are
automatically part of the text.
| | 07:09 | They can be either on the left or
right, straight or curved, and be attached
| | 07:12 | in multiple points.
| | 07:13 | The text can have a transparent
background or an opaque background, and you
| | 07:16 | have control over everything from what
font you're using and whether it's bold,
| | 07:19 | and italic and so on.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding dimensions| 00:00 | We've already explored dimensions
earlier in this training series.
| | 00:03 | However, the focus of those explorations
was on using dimensions to edit the model.
| | 00:07 | Dimensions can of course be used
purely for annotative purposes in any view
| | 00:11 | where you wish call out the
dimensions to the contractor.
| | 00:13 | In this movie, we will look at some
techniques for using dimensions to annotate
| | 00:16 | our drawings and get
them ready for presentation.
| | 00:18 | I have a file here called Dimensions,
and I am looking at the Level 1 floor plan view,
| | 00:23 | and let's go ahead and
add some dimensions to this view.
| | 00:26 | On the Annotate tab I can
click the Aligned Dimension tool.
| | 00:29 | Now there is actually an Aligned
dimension and a Linear dimension.
| | 00:33 | The Aligned dimension will follow
the angle of the geometry that you
| | 00:36 | are dimensioning, and the
Linear dimension will always remain
| | 00:38 | horizontal and vertical.
| | 00:40 | I tend to prefer the Aligned
dimension. I think it gives me nicer results.
| | 00:43 | So I am going to use that one.
| | 00:44 | Now the easiest way to dimension is
similar to the methods that we have already seen.
| | 00:49 | You simply find two items that you
wish to dimension, like the faces of these walls,
| | 00:55 | and you click the points and
then you click your third point for where
| | 00:59 | you want the dimension to go.
| | 00:59 | It's pretty simple.
| | 01:00 | It's pretty straightforward.
| | 01:00 | I would like you to direct your
attention to the Options bar so that we can
| | 01:05 | understand why we were
able to do that so quickly.
| | 01:07 | There are several choices
that we have here for dimensions.
| | 01:12 | We can use the wall faces.
| | 01:13 | We can use wall centerlines.
| | 01:15 | We can use the core as
reference points for the dimension.
| | 01:18 | My happens to be set to Wall faces
which gives me nicer results, if I am trying
| | 01:23 | to get the inside clear dimensions.
| | 01:25 | If I change it to Wall centerlines,
then Revit will automatically find
| | 01:29 | the centers of the walls and anytime
regardless of what the setting is in
| | 01:33 | the Options bar, I am able to press the
Tab key and cycle to other available options.
| | 01:40 | So you are never locked in completely to
just the one setting, but you certainly
| | 01:44 | do want to look there in the Options bar
and choose the setting that you plan to
| | 01:47 | use most frequently.
| | 01:49 | Now we are not limited to just
dimensioning walls, although walls are certainly
| | 01:52 | one of our more common things to dimension.
| | 01:53 | Let's start with these column grids.
| | 01:58 | Notice that I can select several items at once.
| | 02:01 | The items that I have selected
will stay highlighted in blue while I
| | 02:04 | have selected them.
| | 02:05 | If I select it again, it will
remove that item from the dimension.
| | 02:10 | I select it one more time and add it back.
| | 02:12 | Those become the witness
lines of your dimensions.
| | 02:15 | However, you always need to end your
dimension with a click in empty space.
| | 02:21 | If you click on some geometry, Revit
will think you are trying to dimension that
| | 02:25 | geometry and add a witness line there.
| | 02:27 | So if I click in white space that's
where I am placing the dimension string, and
| | 02:31 | it will place the dimension at that location.
| | 02:34 | You can repeat it over here and
place it where I want it to go.
| | 02:41 | Now I could go through and change
this to Wall faces, and I could start the
| | 02:46 | process of selecting all of the
different points that I want to dimension, but
| | 02:50 | let me show you a faster way.
| | 02:52 | We have been choosing the
Pick Individual Reference option.
| | 02:55 | That's the default option.
| | 02:57 | If you open that option up though, we have
this choice below it, which is Entire Walls.
| | 03:02 | Now the way this one works is you just
simply click on a wall and then you get a
| | 03:06 | dimension that goes from end to end.
| | 03:08 | That's useful, but it would actually be
more useful if it gave me more than just
| | 03:12 | the end-to-end dimension of that wall.
| | 03:14 | So right next to it, if we clicked
Options, we can actually see that there are
| | 03:18 | several different options that we can
take advantage of to get more points
| | 03:22 | from our dimensions.
| | 03:23 | So I am going to go ahead and tell it
to dimension the Openings, and I am going
| | 03:26 | to choose the Widths.
| | 03:28 | When I click OK, let me just drag my
wheel a little bit, zoom in down here, and
| | 03:33 | I am going to select this wall and
pull the dimension out here and click, and
| | 03:38 | you could see that with one quick
easy click I can create a dimension that
| | 03:43 | covers quite a bit of ground.
| | 03:44 | Let's do it again over here,
select here, pull it out here.
| | 03:49 | It doesn't get much easier than that.
| | 03:51 | Now if we click Options again, we
can actually do Intersecting Walls.
| | 03:57 | I tend to think this is a little bit too busy.
| | 04:00 | So not my favorite choice.
| | 04:02 | And I have a hard time reading all that.
| | 04:06 | Certainly, we can move the text
around and that is one of our options.
| | 04:09 | So if you did like this, you could
select it and you see these little squares
| | 04:14 | here that allow you to drag the text.
| | 04:16 | You could pull it out there.
| | 04:18 | If you drag it far enough, it will
actually add a little leader back to it.
| | 04:21 | So if you really do want all these
dimensions, then I would certainly recommend
| | 04:26 | going and cleaning up a little bit.
| | 04:28 | But that's a little bit too
much as far as I am concerned.
| | 04:30 | So I am going to delete that.
| | 04:31 | I will zoom back out a little,
select my Aligned dimension again, go back
| | 04:37 | Options, turn off Intersecting Walls.
| | 04:40 | But what about Intersecting Grids?
| | 04:41 | I will try that one.
| | 04:43 | So I am going to select here and
then pull it out to about here.
| | 04:48 | Now this time, it just did the Walls
and the Openings, which I think is much
| | 04:53 | cleaner, but it did go ahead and include any
gridlines that happen to intersect as well.
| | 04:58 | So that might be handy.
| | 05:00 | Now let's get rid of this dimension
that I drew before, overall wall length.
| | 05:04 | We don't really need that one, and
let's talk about Edit Witness Lines.
| | 05:08 | If I select this existing dimension,
I can add or remove points from it.
| | 05:13 | Maybe I don't want gridline D to
be part of the dimension anymore.
| | 05:17 | I could do Edit Witness Lines, and I
could highlight gridline D and remove
| | 05:21 | it from the dimension.
| | 05:23 | Maybe I want to add gridlines B to it or
maybe I want to add this curtain wall opening.
| | 05:28 | So I can go ahead and click there and
then gridlines B and then this door opening.
| | 05:33 | Then finally the outer edge of this wall here.
| | 05:37 | Here is the thing you want to be careful of.
| | 05:39 | Don't press Escape here. Don't click Modify.
| | 05:42 | If you do, that will
cancel everything you just did.
| | 05:44 | What you want to do is click somewhere
in white space to actually finish the
| | 05:48 | dimension, and then you can
click Modify to deselect it.
| | 05:52 | So even though we only are allowed to
pick one wall with that Pick Walls option,
| | 05:57 | it's pretty easy to come back and add
additional items to that overall dimension
| | 06:01 | string and makes one continuous string here.
| | 06:03 | You can fine tune the
position by just dragging on it.
| | 06:07 | You can even do stuff like this.
| | 06:09 | If necessary, we can modify the
actual value of that dimension.
| | 06:14 | So perhaps right here let's say that
this was actually a field dimension that
| | 06:18 | we wanted to verify.
| | 06:19 | We can click right on the dimension,
click right on the text and then below the
| | 06:24 | dimension I am going to
type VIF for Verify in Field.
| | 06:28 | That piece of text will
appear there beneath the dimension.
| | 06:31 | You can't override the number.
| | 06:34 | So I couldn't put in like 18 feet there,
but if I wanted to I could decide not
| | 06:39 | to show the number at all
and replace it with VIF.
| | 06:42 | So then I will remove it from here.
| | 06:46 | When I click OK, it
won't show any number at all.
| | 06:49 | Instead, it will just say we are
going to verify that dimension.
| | 06:51 | We are not sure what it is.
| | 06:52 | So you can do that, but if you tried to
put in just a number here, 18 feet, Revit
| | 07:00 | is going to say, oh no, you don't.
| | 07:01 | We are not going to allow that, because
that's not really what you have there in the model.
| | 07:05 | So what they would rather you do is
actually change the witness lines and have
| | 07:09 | them edit something else.
| | 07:11 | So I am going to do ZF, Zoom to Fit.
| | 07:15 | Nothing makes a drawing start to look like a
construction document quite like dimensions.
| | 07:18 | Adding dimensions is quick and easy,
and we have many options at our disposal
| | 07:22 | to control both which elements we are
dimensioning and how those dimensions display.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding symbols| 00:00 | Construction documents
incorporate many kinds of symbols.
| | 00:03 | Revit has dedicated tools for text,
dimension, tags, and keynotes. Any other
| | 00:07 | kind of symbol we can use
generic annotation families.
| | 00:10 | Such families can represent
any symbol where you require.
| | 00:12 | Let's go ahead and have a look.
| | 00:13 | I am in a file called Symbols,
looking at a first floor plan, and we have a
| | 00:17 | couple of symbols that are already in the
file based on the template that we started with.
| | 00:21 | On the Annotate tab way over at the
right we can find Symbol tool, and again as
| | 00:26 | I said these are just generic
annotation symbols, and there is a couple of them
| | 00:29 | that are loaded in here.
| | 00:30 | Let's start with the North
Arrow. Pretty simple north arrow.
| | 00:33 | I am just going to place that
somewhere down in the corner of the drawing.
| | 00:38 | Now if I click on it, you may be
expecting the North Arrow to kind of actually
| | 00:43 | know what direction north is, and that
wouldn't be that unreasonable expectation
| | 00:47 | for somebody using a program like Revit.
| | 00:49 | But it turns out that North Arrow
is just a generic annotation symbol.
| | 00:52 | It doesn't actually have
any 'smarts' built into it.
| | 00:55 | So you literally have to select it, go
to rotate, and then put in some sort of
| | 01:00 | an angle here for whatever north is.
| | 01:01 | So let's say that north was 20 degrees.
| | 01:03 | We just put in 20 degrees and we press Enter.
| | 01:07 | Now it turns out that when you click
the Symbol tool, there actually is an
| | 01:11 | option here where you can
check say Rotate after placement.
| | 01:14 | That takes you right into the
Rotation option after you place a symbol.
| | 01:18 | Okay, let's look at another example.
| | 01:20 | Let's look at the Centerline
symbol, a really simple symbol.
| | 01:23 | I am going to kind of place it over
here towards the top of the plan, click
| | 01:28 | Modify, zoom in, like so.
| | 01:32 | So we've got these two dimensions
here where it's an equal dimension.
| | 01:35 | Let's go ahead and select this symbol.
| | 01:37 | We will click Rotate again.
| | 01:40 | Type in 90 degrees, and then use the
little move handle that's on there and just
| | 01:48 | drag it like so, and that tells us
we've got a Centerline right there.
| | 01:51 | I am going to do ZF for Zoom to Fit.
| | 01:54 | So there aren't anymore
currently in this project.
| | 01:56 | So we will go over here to the Insert
tab, and we will click on Load Family.
| | 02:01 | That takes us to our Library folder like
we've seen in previous movies, and I am
| | 02:06 | going to go to the Annotations
folder, and scroll down a little bit.
| | 02:09 | We'll get a couple of graphic scales right here.
| | 02:12 | I am going to go ahead and
choose this one, 1-8. Click Open.
| | 02:18 | Go back over to my Annotate tab, click
on the Symbol tool, see the Graphic Scale
| | 02:23 | is listed there, and I will go
ahead and place it right about here.
| | 02:28 | Now it's a little tough to judge the
actual scale here, but if you zoom in on this,
| | 02:35 | if we were to actually measure these
points, it is accurately telling us the distance.
| | 02:40 | Let me go ahead and Zoom Previous.
| | 02:43 | And it might be easier to kind of see if we
go ahead and open up our Floor Plan sheet.
| | 02:49 | So here is our Floor Plan
sheet. We will zoom in.
| | 02:52 | This is our first floor plan, and you
can kind to see the graphic scale there
| | 02:57 | with the north arrow.
| | 02:58 | So it looks a little better in context
when you see it surrounded by the rest of
| | 03:02 | the drawing and how it sits on the
sheet. It makes a little bit more sense.
| | 03:08 | So those are just some different
symbols that we can add in to our projects.
| | 03:14 | If you don't have a 'smart' symbol for
the test that you are trying to do, you
| | 03:19 | can basically create these generic
annotations which again they are not terribly
| | 03:23 | smart, in the sense that they don't
react to things and they aren'y linked to
| | 03:26 | anything, but they do the job
of giving us symbol that we need.
| | 03:30 | There are a few other types of
items that you might want to look at.
| | 03:33 | We've got Spot Elevations, Spot
Coordinates, and even Slope symbols.
| | 03:38 | So no computer design program would
be complete without the ability to
| | 03:41 | add various symbols required by
architectural documentation and Revit is no exception.
| | 03:45 | In this movie we saw just a few
simple examples of the Symbol tool in
| | 03:48 | action, and we can use those to put
the finishing touches on our various drawings and plans.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding legend views| 00:00 | If you'd like to add a legend to your
project, perhaps showing each kind of door
| | 00:03 | or window that you've used,
no need to draw this manually.
| | 00:06 | With the Legend view, Revit allows you
to place a graphical representation of
| | 00:09 | any family that you have used in your project.
| | 00:11 | You will be able to control the scale
and the detail level, as well as whether
| | 00:15 | or not you insert the symbol
in the plan, elevation or section.
| | 00:17 | Nice thing to know about the
Legend view is that these graphics are
| | 00:20 | representational only;
| | 00:21 | they do not throw off the count of your
schedules or otherwise get treated like
| | 00:25 | actual parts of your model.
| | 00:26 | So let's go ahead and take a look here.
| | 00:28 | I am going to do a simple door legend.
| | 00:29 | I am in a file called
Legends in the Chapter 11 folder.
| | 00:33 | I am going to go to the View tab, and
under Legends, I will choose a legend.
| | 00:42 | It will ask me for a name.
| | 00:44 | I am going to call this Door Types and
Scale, and quarter-inch is the default,
| | 00:50 | and that looks pretty good
to me. So I'll click OK.
| | 00:53 | The Legend view is actually kind of
drafting view, so it's basically just a
| | 00:56 | blank sheet of paper.
| | 00:57 | The difference is that we can
actually add legend components on it.
| | 01:01 | So to do this we go over here to the
Annotate tab and under the Component tool,
| | 01:06 | and I want to just kind of point this
out here as the first time look at this tool.
| | 01:10 | Look carefully at this icon.
| | 01:11 | You can see it's really kind of two-
dimensional and compare that to the
| | 01:15 | Component tool on the Home tab,
which was three-dimensional.
| | 01:18 | So the components you have available
on the Annotate tab are two-dimensional
| | 01:22 | view specific components, and there
is actually a few different varieties.
| | 01:26 | Detail Components, Repeating Details.
| | 01:28 | We'll look at some of those in the
Detail movies upcoming. And Legend Component,
| | 01:32 | which is what we're going to look at right now.
| | 01:33 | So when you choose Legend Component,
| | 01:35 | and on the Options bar
you'll get lots of choices.
| | 01:40 | So if we open up this list, for
example, if you wanted to make a wall types
| | 01:44 | legend, all of the wall families and
types that you're using in your project
| | 01:49 | will be listed here.
| | 01:50 | So you can go through, and we used Brick on
MetalStud, or we used the 4 7/8" Partition.
| | 01:59 | We could add one of each of those, and
then use those as a wall types legend, or
| | 02:05 | this was a doorlegend we are creating.
| | 02:06 | So let's scroll up to the Door
category, and see what we have available.
| | 02:12 | So this project is using a
couple of different doors.
| | 02:15 | We've got a Double Glass Door.
| | 02:17 | Now it's coming in plan here by default.
| | 02:19 | We can actually change that.
| | 02:21 | So I am going to do a front
elevation, which looks little nicer.
| | 02:24 | So we will go ahead and bring in the
elevation, then I will go to the next
| | 02:29 | door, Single Flush Door.
| | 02:32 | See how they line up nicely for us?
And then a Single Glass Door.
| | 02:46 | And that may be all of the ones we have used.
| | 02:48 | Oh, we've got our Curtain Wall Door here.
| | 02:50 | Now, the curtain wall door is a
little bizarre because it comes in really,
| | 02:53 | really tiny, but it turns out
here that there is this Host Length.
| | 02:58 | The curtain wall doors are a little
different than regular doors because they
| | 03:01 | actually rely on the size of the
curtain wall bay that you give them.
| | 03:04 | So all we need to do is put
in a more reasonable size bay.
| | 03:07 | So how about 6 feet?
| | 03:10 | Then we'll get a better size
for our curtain wall door there.
| | 03:15 | So we want to go ahead and click Modify,
and next I can finish this out with text.
| | 03:20 | So I could just basically click on a
piece of text, type in a door name, and
| | 03:30 | repeat the process over here.
| | 03:32 | Then we can do dimensions even, if you need to.
| | 03:38 | If you don't wanted to actually say
the dimension, you can click on it.
| | 03:43 | Click right on the text, say Replace
With Text, you can say See Plan, and add
| | 03:52 | any other annotations and notes that
you like, and that completes your legend.
| | 03:57 | Then basically we can add
this legend to our sheet.
| | 04:00 | So if I come down and look for my
Schedule Sheet, you can see there is already a
| | 04:09 | door schedule and some
other schedules on this sheet.
| | 04:11 | It seems like a good
place to add my door legend.
| | 04:14 | I am going to go ahead and expand
Legends here, and just drag it right out of
| | 04:21 | the Project Browser, and drop it
wherever I want it to go on the view.
| | 04:27 | So I will just kind of put it right over here.
| | 04:29 | That's all there is to it.
| | 04:32 | So you can create legends for any type
of family that you have in your project,
| | 04:36 | doors, walls, windows, whatever you need,
and drag them on the sheet, and print
| | 04:40 | them right along with the set.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a detail callout| 00:00 | Details are an integral part of any
architectural documentation package.
| | 00:04 | One of the challenges in working with
building information modeling in Revit is
| | 00:07 | there is a temptation to over-model.
| | 00:09 | In other words, it is theoretically
possible to add items like flashing or
| | 00:13 | fasteners or many of the other
small items directly to your model.
| | 00:17 | However, typically such items would
only need to show in large scale details.
| | 00:22 | Therefore resist the
temptation to model such elements.
| | 00:25 | Keep your models at a scale of
about eighth to quarter-inch detail.
| | 00:30 | There is little payoff in modeling
items beyond that and you often pay a price
| | 00:35 | in diminished computer performance.
| | 00:36 | For such items, we will continue to
rely on detail drawings, which have always
| | 00:41 | been part of an architectural communication.
| | 00:44 | Revit offers a full complement of tools
to facilitate detail drawings and does
| | 00:48 | so in a way that maximizes the
potential of both the live 3D model and the
| | 00:52 | large-scale detail embellishments.
| | 00:54 | So let's get started in this movie by
doing the first step in the process, which
| | 00:58 | is creating a callout view from your model.
| | 01:01 | So I'm in a file called Detail Callout,
and I'm looking at a section cut through
| | 01:05 | the stair, and what I want to do it is
enlarge a portion of the stair and begin
| | 01:10 | detailing that area.
| | 01:11 | So I can do that by going to the View
tab and clicking on the Callout tool.
| | 01:17 | Now you can do a callout from plan
view, section view or an elevation view.
| | 01:21 | So Revit allows you to do it
from any kind of orthographic view.
| | 01:24 | I'm going to go ahead and click and
drag a small rectangle around the area
| | 01:31 | that I want to enlarge.
| | 01:33 | So the callout will appear.
| | 01:34 | Usually, you'll see a view appear here
on the Project Browser called Callout
| | 01:40 | of Section at Stair.
| | 01:41 | So it's usually a pretty good idea
to rename that, and I'll call this
| | 01:47 | Stair Landing Detail.
| | 01:50 | Now, let's go ahead and double-click
the bubble here which will bring us into
| | 01:56 | that detail, to have us take a look,
and you'll see a couple of things.
| | 02:01 | The detail is cropped down to
just the area that we surrounded.
| | 02:05 | If I pause my mouse over that crop region,
that rectangle there, you can see it highlight.
| | 02:11 | The solid part in the middle is the
model crop that actually crops the actual
| | 02:16 | model geometry, and then there is that
dashed boundary on the outside that's
| | 02:20 | actually called the annotation crop.
| | 02:22 | We'll look at both of those
when we'll make a few adjustments.
| | 02:24 | The first adjustment I would like to
do is I'm going to zoom in slightly with
| | 02:28 | my wheel, and I'm going to fine-tune the
cropping of this detail just a little bit.
| | 02:35 | So I'm going to crop out a
little bit more right there.
| | 02:37 | I'll drag this down here just a touch.
| | 02:42 | This one I'm going to cut off the right
side of the stair like so and then here
| | 02:48 | I'm going to just crop it
down just a little tighter.
| | 02:50 | Now I should point that if we were
going to return to Section at Stair,
| | 02:54 | all those modifications
affect the crop there as well.
| | 02:58 | This is a live interaction just like
everything else you'd expect in Revit.
| | 03:02 | So let's go back to our Stair Detail here.
| | 03:05 | Now, the next thing I want to do is
down here in the View Control Bar,
| | 03:08 | quarter inch is not quite large enough.
| | 03:10 | This is supposed to be a detail after all.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to increase the
scale to 1/2" equals a foot.
| | 03:16 | So that will make that adjustment, and
that affected the annotation crop as well.
| | 03:21 | Now, let's talk about the
annotation crop. Just exactly what is that?
| | 03:24 | So I'm going to go to the Annotate tab,
I'm going to add a little piece of text
| | 03:28 | here, and I will write a note and then
click somewhere else and click Modify.
| | 03:40 | Now, I've got this note and I've
selected it, and let's talk about the
| | 03:43 | annotation crop region.
| | 03:44 | If I drag the note, you see how at some
point it will disappear. See it right here?
| | 03:50 | So let's pull it over here.
| | 03:53 | The annotation crop is actually
designed to crop out annotation where the model
| | 03:59 | crop, the inner one, is
designed to crop out model.
| | 04:02 | That can be useful in certain kinds of
views, like overall floor plans where
| | 04:05 | you're integrating a match line or
something like that, but it doesn't really
| | 04:08 | help us very much here.
| | 04:09 | Now I certainly could increase the size of
the crop and get the note to display again.
| | 04:15 | See how as soon as it
touches the note it will disappear.
| | 04:18 | But in this case, I don't see the
annotation crop is really giving this
| | 04:21 | drawing any benefit.
| | 04:22 | So I'm going to deselect the crop and
over here on the Properties palette,
| | 04:29 | it says Section, and then the
name of the view, Stair Landing.
| | 04:32 | So I'm going to scroll down.
| | 04:34 | That tells me I am looking
at the properties of the view.
| | 04:36 | And here under the Extents category,
I have an Annotation Crop setting, and I'm
| | 04:42 | going to uncheck that box to
remove the annotation c |
|
|
